Case Studies for Areal Linguistics

Århammer, Nils, 2007. Das Nordfriesische, eine bedrohte Minderheitssprache in zehr Dialekten: Eine Bestandsaufnahme. In Munske, Horst Haider (ed.), Sterben die Dialekte aus? Vorträge am interdisziplinären Zentrum für Dialektforschung an der Friedrich-Alexander-Universität Erlangen-Nürnberg, 22.10 – 10.12 2007. www.dialektforschung.phil.uni-erlangen.de/publikationen/sterben-die-dialekte-aus.shtml Google Scholar

Bandle, Oskar, Braunmüller, Kurt, Jahr, Ernst Håkon, Karker, Allan, Naumann, Hans-Peter and Teleman, Ulf (eds), 2002/2004. The Nordic Languages: An International Handbook of the History of the North Germanic Languages, two volumes. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Barnes, Michael P., 1998. The Norn Language of Orkney and Shetland. Lerwick: The Shetland Times.Google Scholar

Berend, Nina, 1998. Sprachliche Anpassung: Eine sociolinguistische-dialektologische Untersuchung zum Rußlanddeutschen. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar

Berend, Nina, 2009. Vom Sprachinseldialekt zur Migrantensprache: Anmerkungen zum Sprachwandel der Einwanderungsgeneration. In Liebert, Wolf-Andreas and Schwinn, Horst (eds), Mit Bezug auf Sprache: Festschrift für Rainer Wimmer, pp. 361–381. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar

Berend, Nina and Jedig, Hugo, 1991. Deutsche Mundarten in der Sowjetunion: Geschichte der Forschung und Bibliographie. Marburg: Elwert.Google Scholar

Bergsland, Knut, 1992. Language contacts between Southern Sami and Scandinavian. In Jahr, Ernst Håkon (ed.), Language Contact: Theoretical and Empirical Studies, pp. 5–15. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Bernini, Giuliano and Ramat, Paolo, 1996. Negative Sentences in the Languages of Europe: A Typological Approach. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Biberauer, Teresa, 2009. Afrikaans. In Brown, Keith and Ogilvie, Sarah (eds), Concise Encyclopedia of Languages of the World, pp. 7–11. Oxford: Elsevier.Google Scholar

Bidese, Ermenegildo, Dow, James R. and Stolz, Thomas (eds), 2005. Das Zimbrische zwischen Germanisch und Romanisch. Bochum: Brockmeyer.Google Scholar

Boas, Hans C., 2009. The Life and Death of Texas German. Durham: Duke University Press.Google Scholar

Boberg, Charles, 2012. English as a minority language in Quebec. World Englishes 31: 493–502.Google Scholar

Bomhard, Allan R. and Kerns, John C., 1994. The Nostratic Macrofamily: A Study in Distant Linguistic Relationship. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Bowerman, Sean, 2004. White South African English: Morphology and Syntax. In Kortmann, Bernd, Burridge, Kate, Mesthrie, Rajend, Schneider, Edgar W. and Upton, Clive (eds), A Handbook of Varieties of English, vol. 2: Morphology and Syntax, pp. 948–961. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Brattegard, Olav, 1945. Die mittelniederdeutsche Geschäftssprache des hansischen Kaufmanns zu Bergen, two volumes. Bergen: A. S. John Griegs Boktrykkeri.Google Scholar

Braunmüller, Kurt, 1991. Die skandinavischen Sprachen im Überblick. Stuttgart: UTB.Google Scholar

Braunmüller, Kurt and House, Juliane (eds), 2009. Convergence and Divergence in Language Contact Situations. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Campbell, Lyle, 2006. Areal linguistics: A closer scrutiny. In Matras, , McMahon, and Vincent, (eds), pp. 1–31.CrossRef Google Scholar

Carlie, Johan, 1925. Studium über die mittelniederdeutsche Urkundensprache der dänischen Köningskanzlei von 1330–1430 nebst einer Übersicht über die Kanzleiverhältnisse. Lund: Gleerupska Universitetsbokhandeln.Google Scholar

Colleman, Timothy, 2013. ’n Germaanse toebroodjie: Three cases of English influence on the grammar of Afrikaans. Paper at the Germanic Sandwich conference held at the University of Leuven in January 2013.Google Scholar

Dahl, Östen, 2001. The origin of the Scandinavian languages. In Dahl, and Koptjevskaja-Tamm, (eds), vol. 1, pp. 215–235.Google Scholar

Dahl, Östen, 2009. Issues in complexity as a result of language contact. In Braunmüller, and House, (eds), pp. 41–52.Google Scholar

Dahl, Östen and Koptjevskaja-Tamm, Maria (eds), 2001. The Circum-Baltic Languages, two volumes. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Dalton-Puffer, Christiane, 1996. The French Influence on Middle English Morphology: A Corpus-based Study of Derivation. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

den Besten, Hans, 1986. Double negation and the genesis of Afrikaans. In Muysken, Pieter and Smith, Norval (eds), Substrata and Universals in Creole Genesis, pp. 185–230. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

den Besten, Hans, 1989. From Khoekhoe foreignertalk via hottentot Dutch to Afrikaans: The creation of a novel grammar. In Piitz, Martin and Dirven, René (eds), Wheels within Wheels: Papers of the Duisburg Symposium on Pidgin and Creole Languages, pp. 207–250. Frankfurt: Peter Lang.Google Scholar

Diercks, Willy, 1993. Zur Verwendung prä- und postmodifizierender Morpheme in Mittelniederdeutschen und in den skandinavischen Sprachen. In Braunmüller, Kurt and Diercks, Willy (eds), Niederdeutsch und die skandinavischen Sprachen, vol. I: pp. 161–194. Heidelberg: Universitätsverlag C. Winter.Google Scholar

Donaldson, Bruce C., 1991. The Influence of English in Afrikaans: A Case Study of Linguistic Change in a Language Contact Situation. Pretoria: Van Schaik.Google Scholar

Drinka, Bridget, 2013. Sources of auxiliation in the perfects of Europe. Studies in Language 37: 599–644.Google Scholar

Durkin, Philip, 2014. Borrowed Words: A History of Loanwords in English. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Eggers, Eckhard, 1998. Sprachwandel und Sprachmischung im Jiddischen. Frankfurt: Lang.Google Scholar

Emonds, Joseph, 2011. English as a North Germanic language: From the Norman Conquest to the present. In Trušnik, Roman, Nemčoková, Katarína and Bell, Gregory Jason (eds), Theories and Practice: Proceedings of the Second International Conference on English and American Studies, pp. 13–26. Zlín: Univerzita Tomáše Bati.Google Scholar

Emonds, Joseph Embley and Faarlund, Jan Terje, 2014. English: The Language of the Vikings. Olomouc: Palacký University.Google Scholar

Faatz, Jan Patrick, 2009. Uwer unse Sprak is nich gut un warn klok ut … : Eine Untersuchung zum Gebrauch des Petuhtantendeutsch in der heutigen flensburger Alltagssprache. Norderstedt: Grin.Google Scholar

Filppula, Markku, 2002. More on the English progressive and the Celtic connection. In Tristram, Hildegard L. C. (ed.), The Celtic Englishes III: pp. 150–168. Heidelberg: Winter.Google Scholar

Filppula, Markku, Klemola, Juhani and Paulasto, Heli, 2008. English and Celtic in Contact. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Filppula, Markku, Klemola, Juhani and Pitkänen, Heli (eds), 2002. The Celtic roots of English. Joensuu: Joensuu Yliopistopaino.Google Scholar

Fischer, Olga, 2013. The role of contact in English syntactic change in Old and Middle English periods. In Schreier, and Hundt, (eds), pp. 18–40.Google Scholar

Gadeanu, Sorin, 1998. Sprache auf der Suche: Zur Identitätsfrage des Deutschen in Rumänian am Beispiel der Temerwarer Stadtsprache. Regenburg: Roderer.Google Scholar

Gamillscheg, Ernst, 1934–1936. Romania Germanica: Sprach- und Siedlungsgeschichte der Germanen auf dem Boden des alten Römerreichs, three volumes. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Gold, David L., 1985. Jewish English. In Fishman, Joshua A. (ed.), Readings in the Sociology of the Jewish Languages, pp. 280–298. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Hancock, Ian, 1992. Roots of inequity: Romani cultural rights in their historical and social context. Immigrants and Minorities 2 (1): 3–20.Google Scholar

Hancock, Ian, 2010. Romani and Angloromani. In Schreier, , Trudgill, , Schneider, and Williams, (eds), pp. 367–383.Google Scholar

Hansen, Björn, 2000. The German modal verb müssen and the Slavonic languages: The reconstruction of a success story. Scando-Slavica 46: 77–93.Google Scholar

Haspelmath, Martin, 1998. How young is Standard Average European? Language Sciences 20: 271–287.Google Scholar

Haspelmath, Martin, 2001. The European linguistic area: Standard Average European. In Haspelmath, Martin, König, Ekkehard, Oesterreicher, Wolfgang and Raible, Wolfgang (eds), Language Typology and Language Universals: An International Handbook / Sprachtypologie und sprachliche Universalien: Ein internationales Handbuch / La typologie des langues et les universaux linguistiques: Manuel international, pp. 1492–1510. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Haugen, Einar, 1976. The Scandinavian Languages: An Introduction to their History. London: Faber and Faber.Google Scholar

Hawkins, John A., 1987. The Germanic languages. In Comrie, Bernard (ed.), The World’s Major Languages, pp. 68–76. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd and Kuteva, Tania, 2006. The Changing Languages of Europe. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Helgason, Pétur, Ringen, Catherine and Suomi, Kari, 2013. Swedish quantity: Central Standard Swedish and Fenno-Swedish. Journal of Phonetics 41 (6): 534–545.Google Scholar

Hélix, Laurence, 2011. Histoire de la langue française. Paris: Ellipses.Google Scholar

Hesseling, Dirk C., 1923. Het Afrikaans. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 1999. Ireland as a linguistic area. In Mallory, James P. (ed.), Language in Ulster, pp. 36–53. Special issue of Ulster Folklife 45. Holywood, Co. Down, Northern Ireland: Ulster Folk and Transport Museum.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2007. Irish English: History and Present-day Forms. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond (ed.), 2012a. Areal Features of the Anglophone World. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2012b. Early English and the Celtic hypothesis. In Nevalainen, Terttu and Traugott, Elizabeth Closs (eds), The Oxford Handbook of the History of English, pp. 497–507. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Hilty, G., 1968. Westfränkische Superstrateinflüsse auf die galloromanische Syntax. In Baldinger, K. (ed.), Festschrift W. v. Wartburg zum 80. Geburtstag, vol. 1, pp. 493–510. Tübingen: Niemeyer.Google Scholar

Hofmann, Dietrich, 1955. Nordisch–englische Lehnbeziehungen der Wikingerzeit. Kopenhagen: Munksgaard.Google Scholar

Ingham, Richard (ed.), 2010. The Anglo-Norman Language and its Contexts. Woodbridge: Boydell.Google Scholar

Ingham, Richard, 2012. The Transmission of Anglo-Norman: Language History and Language Acquisition. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Jacobs, Neil G., 2001. Yiddish in the Baltic region. In Dahl, and Koptjevskaja-Tamm, (eds), vol. 1, pp. 285–311.Google Scholar

Jacobs, Neil G., Prince, Ellen F. and van der Auwera, Johan, 1994. Yiddish. In König, Ekkehard and van der Auwera, Johan (eds), The Germanic Languages, pp. 388–419. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Jahr, Ernst Håkon, 2004. The special case of Norway in the twentieth century: language conflict and language planning. In Bandle, s et al. (eds), vol. 2, pp. 1635–1647.Google Scholar

Jespersen, Otto, 1905. Growth and Structure of the English Language. Leipzig: Teubner.Google Scholar

Jespersen, Otto, 1922. Language: Its Nature, Development and Origin. London: Allen & Unwin.Google Scholar

Jones, Mari C., 2010. Channel Island English. In Schreier, , Trudgill, , Schneider, and Williams, (eds), pp. 35–56.Google Scholar

Jones, Morris, 1973. The present condition of the Welsh language. In Stephens, Meic (ed.), The Welsh Language Today, pp. 110–126. Llanddysul: Gomer Press.Google Scholar

Jordan, Sabine, 1995. Niederdeutsches im Lettischen: Untersuchungen zu den mittelniederdeutschen Lehnwörter im Lettischen. Bielefeld: Verlag für Regionalgeschichte.Google Scholar

Kaiser, Georg A. and Scholze, Lenka, 2009. Verbstellung im Sprachkontakt: Das Obersorbische und Bündnerromanische im Kontakt mit dem Deutschen. In Scholze, Lenka and Wiemer, Björn (eds), Von Zuständen, Dynamik und Veränderung bei Pygmäen und Giganten: Festschrift für Walter Breu zu seinem 60. Geburtstag, pp. 305–330. Bochum: Brockmeyer.Google Scholar

Kaufmann, Götz, 2011. Looking for order in chaos: Standard convergence and divergence in Mennonite Low German. In Putnam, (ed.), pp. 189–230.Google Scholar

Kiefer, Ferenc, 2010. Areal-typological aspects of word-formation: The case of aktionsart-formation in German, Hungarian, Slavic, Baltic, Romani and Yiddish. In Rainer, Franz, Dressler, Wolfgang Y., Kastovsky, Dieter and Luschützky, Hans Christian (eds), Variation and Change in Morphology: Selected Papers from the 13th International Morphology Meeting, Vienna 2008, pp. 129–148. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

King, Ruth, 2000. The Lexical Basis of Grammatical Borrowing: A Prince Edward Island French Case study. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Klemola, Juhani, 2013. English as a contact language in the British Isles. In Schreier, and Hundt, (eds), pp. 75–87.Google Scholar

Knipf-Komlósi, Elisabeth, 2006. Sprachliche Muster bei Sprachinselsprechern am Beispiel der Ungarndeutschen. In Berend, Nina and Knipf-Komlósi, Elisabeth (eds), Sprachinselwelten: Entwicklung und Beschreibung der deutschen Sprachinseln am Anfang des 21. Jahrhunderts / The World of Language Islands: The Developmental Stages and the Description of German Languages Islands at the Beginning of the Twenty-First Century, pp. 39–56. Frankfurt am Main: Lang.Google Scholar

Koivulehto, Jorma, 2002. Contact with non-Germanic languages II: Relations to the East. In Bandle, et al. (eds), vol. 1, pp. 583–594.Google Scholar

Kontzi, Reinhold, 1982. Einleitung. In Kontzi, Reinhold (ed.), Substrate und Superstrate in den romanischen Sprachen, pp. 1–27. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft.Google Scholar

Koptjevskaja-Tamm, Maria and Wälchli, Bernhard, 2001. The Circum-Baltic languages: An areal-typological approach. In Dahl, and Koptjevskaja-Tamm, (eds), vol. 2, pp. 615–750.Google Scholar

Kortmann, Bernd, 1998. Adverbial subordinators in the languages of Europe. In van der Auwera, (ed.), pp. 457–561.Google Scholar

Kortmann, Bernd and van der Auwera, Johan (eds), 2011. The Languages and Linguistics of Europe: A Comprehensive Guide. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Kühl, Karoline H. and Petersen, Hjalmar P., 2009. Converging verbal phrases in related languages: A case study from Faro-Danish and Danish–German language contact situations. In Braunmüller, and House, (eds), pp. 101–124.Google Scholar

Lagman, Herbert, 1971. Svensk–Estnisk Språkkontakt: Studier över estniskans inflytande på de estlandssvenska dialekterna. Stockholm: Almqvist & Wiksell.Google Scholar

Lagman, Svante, Ohlsson, Stig Örjan and Voodla, Viivika (eds), 2002. Svenska språkets historia i Östsjöområdet. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus.Google Scholar

Lamiroy, Béatrice, 2011. Degrés de grammaticalisation à travers les langues de même famille. In L’évolution grammaticale à travers les langues romanes, pp. 167–192. Mémoires de la Société de Linguistique de Paris, vol. 19. Peeters.Google Scholar

Lass, Roger and Wright, Susan, 1986. Endogeny vs. contact: ‘Afrikaans influence’ on South African English. English World-Wide 7: 201–223.Google Scholar

Le Coultre, Jean-Jules, 1875. De l’ordre des mots dans Crestien de Troyes. In Ziel, Ernst (ed.), XIV. Programm des Vitzhumschen Gymnasiums, als Einladung zu dem 17. 18 und 19. März 1875 stattfindenden öffentlichen Examen und Redeactus, pp. 5–88. Dresden: Teubner.Google Scholar

Lenz, Alexandra N., Gooskens, Charlotte and Reker, Siemon (eds), 2009. Low Saxon Dialects Across Borders / Niedersächsische Dialekte über Grenze hinweg. Stuttgart: Steiner.Google Scholar

Lindell, Lenny and Thorbjörnsson-Djerf, Kenth, 2008. Ordbok över svensk romani: Resandefolkets språk och sånger. Inledning, grammatik och bearnetning av Gerd Carling. Stockholm: Podium.Google Scholar

Lutz, Angelika, 2002. When did English begin? In Fanego, Teresa, Méndez-Naya, Belén and Seoane, Elena (eds), Sounds, Words, Texts and Change: Selected Papers from 11 ICEHL, Santiago de Compostela, 7–11 September 2000, pp. 145–171. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Makhudu, K. Dennis Papi, 2002. An introduction to Flaaitaal (or Tsotsitaal). In Mesthrie, Rajend (ed.), Language in South Africa, pp. 398–406. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Manherz, Károly and Wild, Katalin, 1987. Zur Sprache und Volkskultur der Ungarndeutschen. Budapest: Tankönyvkiadó.Google Scholar

Marchello-Nizia, Christiane, 1995. L’évolution du français: Ordre des mots, démonstratifs, accent tonique. Paris: Armand Colin.Google Scholar

Markey, Thomas L., 1969. The Verbs Varda and Bliva in Scandinavian, with Special Emphasis on Swedish. Stockholm: Almqvist & Wiksell.Google Scholar

Markey, Thomas L., 1982. Afrikaans: Creole or non-creole? Zeitschrift für Dialektologie und Linguistik 49: 169–207.Google Scholar

Matisoff, James A., 1991. Sino-Tibetan linguistics: Present state and future prospects. Annual Review of Anthropology 20: 469–504.Google Scholar

Matras, Yaron, 2009. Language Contact. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Matras, Yaron and Bakker, Peter (eds), 2003. The Mixed Language Debate: Theoretical and Empirical Advances. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), 2006. Linguistic Areas: Convergence in Historical and Typological Perspective. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave.Google Scholar

Matras, Yaron and Sakel, Jeannette, 2007. Investigating the mechanisms of pattern replication in language convergence. Studies in Language 31: 829–865.Google Scholar

McWhorter, John H., 2002. What happened to English? Diachronica 19: 217–272.Google Scholar

McWhorter, John H., 2008. Our Magnificent Bastard Tongue: The Untold Story of English. New York: Gotham Books.Google Scholar

Meister Ferré, Barbara, 1994. Stability and Change in the Pennsylvania German Dialect of an Old Order Amish Community in Lancaster County. Stuttgart: Steiner.Google Scholar

Melchers, Gunnel and Sundkvist, Peter, 2010. Orkney and Shetland. In Schreier, , Trudgill, , Schneider, and Williams, (eds), pp. 17–34.Google Scholar

Messner, Dieter, 1997. Einführung in die Geschichte des französischen Wortschatzes. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft.Google Scholar

Mesthrie, Rajend, 2002. Endogeny versus contact revisited: Aspectual busy in South African English. Language Sciences 24: 345–358.Google Scholar

Miller, D. Gary, 2012. External Influences on English: From its Beginnings to the Renaissance. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Mitterand, Henri, 1968. Les mots français. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.Google Scholar

Mossé, Fernand, 1952. A Handbook of Middle English. Baltimore, MD: The Johns Hopkins Press.Google Scholar

Moulin, Claudine and Nübling, Damaris (eds), 2006. Perspektiven einer linguistischen Luxemburgistik. Heidelberg: Winter.Google Scholar

Munske, Horst Haider with Århammer, Nils, Faltings, Volkert F., Hoekstra, Jarich F., Vries, Oebele, Walker, Alastair G. H. and Wilds, Ommo (eds), 2001. Handbuch des Friesischen / Handbook of Frisian Studies. Tübingen: Niemeyer.Google Scholar

Murelli, Adriano and Kortmann, Bernd, 2011. Non-standard varieties in the areal typology of Europe. In Kortmann, and van der Auwera, (eds), pp. 525–544.Google Scholar

Nielsen, Hans Frede, 1985. Old English and the Continental Germanic Languages. Innsbruck: Innsbruck University Press.Google Scholar

Ohlsson, Stig Örjan, 2004. Language contact in the sixteenth, seventeenth and eighteenth centuries: The Kingdom of Sweden. In Bandle, et al. (eds), vol. 2, pp. 1361–1368.Google Scholar

O’Neil, Wayne, 1978. The evolution of the Germanic inflectional systems: A study in the causes of language change. Orbis 28: 248–286.Google Scholar

Östman, Jan-Ola, 2011. Language contact in the North of Europe. In Kortmann, and van der Auwera, (eds), pp. 359–380.Google Scholar

Otheguy, Ricardo and Zentella, Ana Celia, 2012. Spanish in New York: Language Contact, Dialect Leveling, and Structural Contiguity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Pawischitz, Sabine, 2009. Deutsche Lehnwörter in der burgenlandkroatischen Umgangssprache. In Scholze, Lenka and Wiemer, Björn (eds), Von Zuständen, Dynamik und Veränderung bei Pygmäen und Giganten: Festschrift für Walter Breu zu seinem 60. Geburtstag, pp. 331–346. Bochum: Brockmeyer.Google Scholar

Pedersen, Karen Margrethe, 2000. German as first language and minority second language in Denmark. In Hogan-Brun, Gabrielle (ed.), National Varieties of German outside Germany: A European Perspective, pp. 195–220. Oxford: Lang.Google Scholar

Pedersen, Karen Margrethe, 2009. South Schleswig Danish: A border-regional minority language. In Lenz, , Gooskens, and Reker, (eds), pp. 297–316.Google Scholar

Picoche, Jacqueline and Marchello-Nizia, Christiane, 1994. Histoire de la langue française. Paris: Nathan.Google Scholar

Polanska, Ineta, 2002. Zum Einfluss des Lettischen auf das Deutsche im Baltikum. Inaugural dissertation, Otto-Friedrich-Universität, Bamberg.Google Scholar

Polomé, Edgar C., 1972. Germanic and the other Indo-European languages. In Van Coetsem, Frans and Kufner, Herbert L. (eds), Toward a Grammar of Proto-Germanic, pp. 43–69. Tübingen: Niemeyer.Google Scholar

Poplack, Shana, 2008. Quebec English. Anglistik 19: 189–200.Google Scholar

Putnam, Michael T. (ed.), 2011. Studies on German-Language Islands. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.CrossRef Google Scholar

Raidt, Edith H., 1983. Einführung in Geschichte und Struktur des Afrikaans. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft.Google Scholar

Rainsford, T. M., Guillot, Céline, Lavrentiev, Alexei and Prévost, Sophie, 2012. La zone préverbale en ancien français: apport des corpus annotés. In Neveu, Franck, Toke, Valelia Muni, Bluenthal, Peter et al. (eds), Congrès mondial de linguistique française, pp. 159–176. www.shs-conferences.org/articles/shsconf/abs/2012/01/shsconf_cmlf12_000246/shsconf_cmlf12_000246.html Google Scholar

Reershemius, Gertrud, 2007. Reste des Westjiddischen in niederdeutschen Sprachgebiet. In Fandrych, Christian and Salverda, Reinier (eds), Standard, Variation und Sprachwandel in germanischen Sprachen, pp. 241–264. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar

Roberge, Paul, 2010. Contact and the history of Germanic languages. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 406–431. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar

Roca, Ana and Lipski, John M. (eds), 1993. Spanish in the United States: Linguistic Contact and Diversity. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Scheler, Manfred, 1977. Der englische Wortschatz. Berlin: Schmidt.Google Scholar

Scholze, Lenka, 2008. Das grammatische System der obersorbischen Umgangssprache im Sprachkontakt. Bautzen: Sorbisches Institut.Google Scholar

Schreier, Daniel and Hundt, Marianne (eds), 2013. English as a Contact Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Schreier, Daniel, Trudgill, Peter, Schneider, Edgard W. and Williams, Jeffrey P. (eds), 2010. The Lesser-known Varieties of English: An Introduction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Seip, Didrik Arup, 1931. Hvad norsk språk gav, og hvad det fikk i middelalderen. In Norge og Europa i middelalderen, pp. 88–103. Oslo: Ashehaug.Google Scholar

Smith, Johannes J., 1952. Theories about the Origin of Afrikaans. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press.Google Scholar

Smits, Ton F. H., 2009. Prinzipien der Dialektresistenz: Zur Bestimmung einer dialektalen Abbauhierarchie. In Lenz, , Gooskens, and Reker, (eds), pp. 297–338.Google Scholar

Spence, N. C. W., 1984. Channel Island French. In Trudgill (ed.), pp. 345–351.Google Scholar

Stenson, Nancy, 1993. English influence on Irish: The last 100 years. Journal of Celtic Linguistics 2: 107–128.Google Scholar

Stolz, Thomas, 2006. All or nothing. In Matras, , McMahon, and Vincent, (eds), pp. 32–50.Google Scholar

Talmy, Leonard, 1972. Yiddish verb prefixes between Germanic and Slavic. In Proceedings of the Eighth Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, pp. 231–250.Google Scholar

Thomason, Sarah G. and Kaufman, Terrence, 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Townend, Matthew, 2012. Contacts and conflicts: Latin, Norse and French. In Mugglestone, Lynda (ed.), The Oxford History of English, updated edition, pp. 75–105. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Tristram, Hildegard L. C., 1999. How Celtic is Standard English? St Petersburg: Russian Academy of Sciences.Google Scholar

Tristram, Hildegard L. C., 2002. Attrition of inflections in English and Welsh. In Filppula, , Klemola, and Pitkänen, (eds), pp. 111–149.Google Scholar

Trubetzkoy, Nicolai S., 1930. Proposition 16. In Actes du premier congrès international des linguistes à la Haye, du 10–15 avril 1928, pp. 17–18. Leiden: A.W. Sijthoff.Google Scholar

Trudgill, Peter (ed.), 1984. Languages in the British Isles. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

van Bree, Cor and Versloot, Arjen P. with Bremmer, Rolf H. Jr, 2008. Oorsprongen van het Stadsfries: With an extensive summary. Ljouwert: Fryske Akademy.Google Scholar

Van Coetsem, Frans, 1988. Loan Phonology and the Two Transfer Types in Language Contact. Dordrecht: Foris.Google Scholar

van der Auwera, Johan, 1998a. Phasal adverbials in the languages of Europe. In van der Auwera, (ed.), pp. 25–145.Google Scholar

van der Auwera, Johan, 1998b. Conclusion. In van der Auwera, (ed.), pp. 813–836.Google Scholar

van der Auwera, Johan (ed.) with Ó Baoill, Dónall P. (ed.), 1998c. Adverbial Constructions in the Languages of Europe. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

van der Auwera, Johan, 2011. Standard Average European. In Kortmann, and van der Auwera, (eds), pp. 291–306.Google Scholar

van der Auwera, Johan and Genee, Inge, 2002. English do: On the convergence of languages and linguists. English Language and Linguistics 6: 283–307.Google Scholar

van der Auwera, Johan, Schalley, Ewa and Nuyts, Jan, 2005. Epistemic possibility in a Slavonic parallel corpus: A pilot study. In Hansen, Björn and Karlík, Petr (eds), Modality in Slavonic Languages, pp. 201–217. Munich: Otto Sagner.Google Scholar

Van Ness, Silke, 1990. Changes in an Obsolescing Language: Pennsylvania German in West Virginia. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar

van Rensburg, M. C. J., 1983. Nie-standaardvorme, variasiepatrone en Afrikaans uit de vorige eeu. In Claassen, G. N. and van Rensburg, M. C. J. (eds), Taalverskeidenheid: ’n Blik op die Spektrum van taalvariasie in Afrikaans, pp. 134–161. Pretoria: Academica.Google Scholar

van Rensburg, Christo, 2012. So Kry Ons Afrikaans. Pretoria: Lapa.Google Scholar

Vennemann, Theo, gen. Nierfeld, 2003. Europa Vasconica – Europa Semitica, edited by Hanna, Patrizia Noel Aziz. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Vennemann, Theo, gen. Nierfeld, 2012. Germania Semitica, edited by Hanna, Patrizia Noel Aziz. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

von Wartburg, Walther, 1946. Problèmes et méthodes de la linguistique. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.Google Scholar

von Wartburg, Walther, 1967. La fragmentation linguistique de la Romania. Paris: Klincksieck. Translation of 1950, Die Ausgliederung der Romanischen Sprachräume, Bern: Francke.Google Scholar

Wälchli, Bernhard, 2011. The Circum-Baltic languages. In Kortmann, and van der Auwera, (eds), pp. 325–340.Google Scholar

Walker, Alistair H., 2001. Extent and position of North Frisian. In Munske, (ed.), pp. 263–284.Google Scholar

Walter, Henriette, 1994. L’Aventure des langues en Occident: Leur origine, leur histoire, leur géographie. Paris: Laffont.Google Scholar

Weerman, Fred, 2006. It’s the economy, stupid! Een vergelijkende blik op men en man. In Hüning, Matthias, Vogel, Ulrike, van der Wouden, Ton and Verhagen, Arie (eds), Nederlands tussen Duits en Engels, pp. 19–47. Leiden: Stichting Neerlandistiek Leiden.Google Scholar

Wehr, Barbara, 2001. Ein west-atlantischer Sprachbund: Irish, Französisch, Portugiesisch. In Eichner, Heiner, Mumm, Peter-Arnold, Panagl, Oswald and Winkler, Eberhard (eds), Fremd und Eigen: Untersuchungen zu Grammatik und Wortschatz des Uralischen und Indogermanischen in memoriam Hartmut Katz, pp. 253–278. Vienna: Edition Praesens.Google Scholar

Weinreich, Uriel, 1958a. Yiddish and colonial German in Eastern Europe: The differential impact of Slavic. In American Contributions to the Fourth International Congress of Slavicists, Moscow, September 1958, pp. 369–421. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar

Weinreich, U., 1958b. On the compatibility of genetic relationship and convergent development. Word 14: 374–379.Google Scholar

Wessén, Elias, 1929. Om det tyska inflytandet på svenskt språk under medeltiden. Nordisk tidskrift för vetenskap, konst och industri utgiven af Letterstedtska föreningen 5: 265–280.Google Scholar

Wexler, Paul, 2002. Two-tiered Relexification in Yiddish. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar

White, David L., 2002. Explaining the innovations of Middle English: What, where and why. In Filppula, , Klemola, and Pitkänen, (eds), pp. 153–174.Google Scholar

Wiik, Kalevi, 1997. The Uralic and Finno-Ugric phonetic substratum in Proto-Germanic. Linguistica Uralica 33: 258–280.Google Scholar

Wogan-Browne, Jocelyn with Collette, Carolyn, Kowalski, Maryanne, Mooney, Linne, Putter, Ann and Trotter, David (eds), 2009. Language and Culture in Medieval Britain: The French of England c. 1100 – c. 1500. Woodbridge, UK: York Medieval Press and Boydell Press.Google Scholar

Worren, Dagfinn, 2004. Interscandinavian language contact II: Linguistic influence. In Bandle, et al. (eds), vol. 2, pp. 2032–2048.Google Scholar

Adger, David, 2010. Gaelic syntax. In Watson, Moray and Macleod, Michelle (eds), The Edinburgh Companion to the Gaelic Language, pp. 304–351. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar

Ahlqvist, Anders, 2010. Early Celtic and English. Australian Celtic Journal 9: 43–73.Google Scholar

Aitken, A. J., 1981. The Scottish vowel-length rule. In Benskin, Michael and Samuels, Michael (eds), So Meny People, Longages and Tonges: Philological Essays in Scots and Medieval English Presented to Angus McIntosh, pp. 131–157. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar

Anderwald, Lieselotte, 2002. Negation in Non-standard British English: Gaps, Regularizations and Asymmetries. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Anderwald, Lieselotte, 2009. The Morphology of English Dialects: Verb-formation in Non-standard English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

van der Auwera, Johan and Genee, Inge, 2002. English do: On the convergence of languages and linguists. English Language and Linguistics 6: 283–307.Google Scholar

Beal, Joan C., 1993. The grammar of Tyneside and Northumbrian English. In Milroy, and Milroy, (eds), pp. 187–213.Google Scholar

Beal, Joan C., 2008. English dialects in the North of England: Phonology. In Kortmann, and Upton, (eds), pp. 122–144.Google Scholar

Bliss, Alan J., 1972. Languages in contact: Some problems of Hiberno-English. Proceedings of the Royal Irish Academy, Section C, 72: 63–82.Google Scholar

Braaten, Björn, 1967. Notes on continuous tenses in English. Norsk Tidskrift for Sprogvidenskap 21: 167–180.Google Scholar

Britain, David, 2012. English in England. In Hickey, (ed.), Areal Features of the Anglophone World, pp. 23–52.Google Scholar

Buchstaller, Isabelle, Corrigan, Karen, Holmberg, Anders, Honeybone, Patrick and Maguire, Warren, 2013. T-to-R and the Northern Subject Rule: Questionnaire-based spatial, social and structural linguistics. English Language and Linguistics 17 (1): 85–128.Google Scholar

Burchfield, Robert W., 1994a. Introduction. In Burchfield, (ed.), pp. 1–19.Google Scholar

Burchfield, Robert W. (ed.), 1994b. English in Britain and Overseas: Origins and Development. The Cambridge History of the English Language, vol. 5. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Butters, Ronald R., 2001. Grammatical structure. In Algeo, John (ed.), English in North America, pp. 325–339. The Cambridge History of the English Language, vol. 6. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Campbell, Alistair, 1959. Old English Grammar. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar

Chadwick, Nora, 1963. The British or Celtic part in the population of England. In Angles and Britons (The O’Donnell Lectures), pp. 111–147. Cardiff: University of Wales Press.Google Scholar

Claridge, Claudia and Kytö, Merja, 2010. Non-standard language in earlier English. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Varieties of English in Writing: The Written Word as Linguistic Evidence, pp. 15–42. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Clarke, Sandra, 2004. The legacy of British and Irish English in Newfoundland. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Legacies of Colonial English: Studies in Transported Dialects, pp. 242–261. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Dal, Ingerid, 1952. Zur Entstehung des Englischen Participium Praesentis auf -ing. Norsk Tidskrift for Sprogvidenskap 16: 5–116.Google Scholar

Davies, Norman, 1999. The Isles: A History. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Denison, David, 1985. The origins of periphrastic do: Ellegård and Visser reconsidered. In Eaton, Roger et al. (eds), Papers from the 4th International Conference of English Historical Linguistics, pp. 44–60. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Dobson, E. J., 1968. English Pronunciation 1500–1700, vol. 1: Survey of the Sources, vol. 2: Phonology, second edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Edwards, Viv, 1993. The grammar of Southern British English. In Milroy, and Milroy, (eds), pp. 214–238.Google Scholar

Ekwall, Eilert, 1975. A History of Modern English Sounds and Morphology, translated by Ward, A.. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Ellegård, Alvar, 1953. The Auxiliary Do: The Establishment and Regulation of its Use in English. Gothenburg Studies in English, vol. 2. Stockholm: Almqvist and Wiksell.Google Scholar

Evans, D. Simon, 1976. A Grammar of Middle Welsh. Dublin: Dublin Institute for Advanced Studies.Google Scholar

Filppula, Markku, 1997. Cross-dialectal parallels and language contacts: Evidence from Celtic Englishes. In Hickey, Raymond and Puppel, Stanisław (eds), Language History and Linguistic Modelling: A Festschrift for Jacek Fisiak on his 60th Birthday, pp. 943–957. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Filppula, Markku, 1999. The Grammar of Irish English: Language in Hibernian Style. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Filppula, Markku and Klemola, Juhani (eds), 2009. Re-evaluating the Celtic Hypothesis. Special issue of English Language and Linguistics 13 (2).Google Scholar

Filppula, Markku and Klemola, Juhani, 2012. Celtic and Celtic Englishes. In Bergs, Alexander and Brinton, Laurel (eds), English Historical Linguistics: An International Handbook, pp. 1687–1703. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Filppula, Markku, Klemola, Juhani and Paulasto, Heli, 2008. English and Celtic in Contact. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Foulkes, Paul and Docherty, Gerry (eds), 1999. Urban voices: Overview. In Foulkes, Paul and Docherty, Gerry (eds), Urban Voices, pp. 1–24. London: Edward Arnold.Google Scholar

Garrett, Andrew, 1998. On the origin of auxiliary do. English Language and Linguistics 2: 283–330.Google Scholar

Genee, Inge, 2005. Latin influence on Old Irish? Contact linguistics and the study of medieval language contact. Journal of Celtic Linguistics 9: 33–72.Google Scholar

Goose, Nigel et al. (eds), 2005. Immigrants in Tudor and Early Stuart England. Brighton: Sussex Academic Press.Google Scholar

Harris, John, 1984. English in the North of Ireland. In Trudgill, (ed.), pp. 115–134.Google Scholar

Harris, John, 1993. The grammar of Irish English. In Milroy, and Milroy, (eds), pp. 139–186.Google Scholar

Haspelmath, Martin, 1999. External possession in a European areal perspective. In Wayne, Doris and Barshi, Immanuel (eds), External Possession, pp. 109–135. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Hernández, Nuria, Kolbe, Daniela and Schulz, Monika Edith, 2011. A Comparative Grammar of British English Dialects, vol. 2: Modals, Pronouns and Complement Clauses. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 1984a. On the nature of labial velar shift. Journal of Phonetics 12: 345–354.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 1984b. Syllable onsets in Irish English. Word 35: 67–74.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 1995. Early contact and parallels between English and Celtic. Vienna English Working Papers 4 (2): 87–119.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 1997. Arguments for creolisation in Irish English. In Hickey, Raymond and Puppel, Stanisław (eds), Language History and Linguistic Modelling: A Festschrift for Jacek Fisiak on his 60th Birthday, pp. 969–1038. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2003. Rectifying a standard deficiency: Pronominal distinctions in varieties of English. In Taavitsainen, Irma and Jucker, Andreas H. (eds), Diachronic Perspectives on Address Term Systems, pp. 345–374. Pragmatics and Beyond, New Series, vol. 107. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2004. A Sound Atlas of Irish English. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2005. Dublin English: Evolution and Change. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2007. Irish English: History and Present-day Forms. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2008. Feature loss in 19th century Irish English. In Nevalainen, Terttu, Taavitsainen, Irma, Pahta, Päivi and Korhonen, Minna (eds), The Dynamics of Linguistic Variation: Corpus Evidence on English Past and Present, pp. 229–243. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2009. Weak segments in Irish English. In Minkova, Donka (ed.), Phonological Weakness in English: From Old to Present-day English, pp. 116–129. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2010. Attitudes and concerns in eighteenth-century English. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Eighteenth-century English: Ideology and Change, pp. 1–20. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2011. The Dialects of Irish, Study of a Changing Landscape. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2012a. English in Ireland. In Hickey, (ed.), Areal Features of the Anglophone World, pp. 79–107. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2012b. Internally and externally motivated language change. In Hernández-Campoy, Juan Manuel and Conde-Silvestre, Juan Camilo (eds), The Handbook of Historical Sociolinguistics, pp. 401–421. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2012c. Early English and the Celtic hypothesis. In Nevalainen, Terttu and Traugott, Elizabeth Closs (eds), The Oxford Handbook of the History of English, pp. 497–507. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2012d. Assessing the role of contact in the history of English. In Nevalainen, Terttu and Traugott, Elizabeth Closs (eds), The Oxford Handbook of the History of English, pp. 485–496. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond (ed.), 2012e. Areal Features of the Anglophone World. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond (ed.), 2012f. Standards of English: Codified Varieties around the World. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2013a. Supraregionalisation and dissociation. In Chambers, J. K. and Schilling, Natalie (eds), The Handbook of Language Variation and Change, second edition, pp. 537–554. Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2013b. English as a contact language in Ireland and Scotland. In Schreier, Daniel and Hundt, Marianne (eds), English as a Contact Language, pp. 88–105. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2014. A Dictionary of Varieties of English. Malden, MA: Wiley- Blackwell.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2015. The North of England and Northern English. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Researching Northern English, pp. 1–24. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Holthausen, Friedrich, 1974. Altenglisches etymologisches Wörterbuch, second edition. Heidelberg: Winter.Google Scholar

Honeybone, Patrick, 2007. New-dialect formation in nineteenth century Liverpool: A brief history of Scouse. In Grant, Anthony and Grey, Clive (eds), The Mersey Sound: Liverpool’s Language, People and Places, pp. 106–140. Liverpool: Open House Press.Google Scholar

Ihalainen, Ossi, 1994. The dialects of England since 1776. In Burchfield, (ed.), pp. 197–274.Google Scholar

Jespersen, Otto, 1940 [1909]. A Modern English Grammar on Historical Principles. 6 vols. Copenhagen: Munksgaard.Google Scholar

Jones, Mark J., 2002. The origin of Definite Article Reduction in northern English dialects: Evidence from dialect allomorphy. English Language and Linguistics 6: 325–345.Google Scholar

Jones, Morris and Thomas, Alan R., 1977. The Welsh Language: Studies in its Syntax and Semantics. Cardiff: University of Wales Press.Google Scholar

Keller, Wolfgang, 1925. Keltisches im englischen Verbum. In Anglica: Untersuchungen zur englischen Philologie, vol. 1: Sprache und Kulturgeschichte. Leipzig: Mayer und Müller, pp. 55–66.Google Scholar

King, Gareth, 1993. Modern Welsh: A comprehensive grammar. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Klemola, Juhani, 2000. The origins of the Northern Subject Rule: A case of early contact? In Tristram, Hildegard L. C. (ed.), The Celtic Englishes II, pp. 329–346. Heidelberg: Carl Winter.Google Scholar

Klemola, Juhani, 2002. Periphrastic DO: Dialectal distributions and origins. In Filppula, Markku, Klemola, Juhani and Pitkänen, Heli (eds), The Celtic Roots of English, pp. 199–210. Joensuu: University of Joensuu: Faculty of Humanities.Google Scholar

Klemola, Juhani, 2013. English as a contact language in the British Isles. In Schreier, Daniel and Hundt, Marianne (eds), English as a Contact Language, pp. 75–87. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Klemola, Juhani and Filppula, Markku, 1992. Subordinating uses of ‘and’ in the history of English. In Rissaneni, Matti, Ihalainen, Ossi and Taavitsainen, Irma (eds), History of Englishes: New Methods and Interpretations in Historical Linguistics, pp. 310–318. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Kortmann, Bernd and Lunkenheimer, Kerstin (eds), 2012. The Mouton Atlas of Variation in English. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Kortmann, Bernd, Herrmann, Tanja, Pietsch, Lukas and Wagner, Susanne, 2005. A Comparative Grammar of British English Dialects, vol. 1: Agreement, Gender, Relative Clauses. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Kortmann, Bernd and Upton, Clive (eds), 2008. Varieties of English, vol. 1: The British Isles. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Lass, Roger, 1987. The Shape of English: Structure and History. London: Dent.Google Scholar

Leech, Geoffrey, Hundt, Marianne, Mair, Christian and Smith, Nicholas, 2009. Change in Contemporary English: A Grammatical Study. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Lutz, Angelika, 2009. Celtic influence on Old English and West Germanic. In Filppula, and Klemola, (eds), pp. 227–249.Google Scholar

Maguire, Warren, 2012. English and Scots in Scotland. In Hickey, (ed.), Areal Features of the Anglophone World, pp. 53–77.Google Scholar

Matasović, Ratko, 2007. Insular Celtic as a language area. In Tristram, Hildegard L. C. (ed.), The Celtic Languages in Contact, pp. 93–112. Potsdam: Potsdam University Press.Google Scholar

McClure, J. Derrick, 1994. English in Scotland. In Burchfield, (ed.), pp. 23–93.Google Scholar

McWhorter, John H., 2009. What else happened to English? A brief for the Celtic hypothesis. In Filppula, and Klemola, (eds), pp. 163–191.Google Scholar

Mesthrie, Rajend, 1992. English in Language Shift: The History, Structure and Sociolinguistics of South African Indian English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Milroy, James and Milroy, Lesley (eds), 1993. Real English: The Grammar of the English Dialects in the British Isles. London: Longman.Google Scholar

Mitchell, Bruce and Robinson, Fred, 2007. A Guide to Old English, seventh edition. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Mittendorf, Ingo and Poppe, Erich, 2000. Celtic contacts of the English progressive? In Tristram, Hildegard L. C. (ed.), The Celtic Englishes II, pp. 117–145. Heidelberg: Carl Winter.Google Scholar

Montgomery, Michael, 2001. British and Irish antecedents. In Algeo, John (ed.), English in North America, pp. 86–153. The Cambridge History of the English Language, vol. 6. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Montgomery, Michael and Gregg, Robert, 1997. The Scots language in Ulster. In Jones, Charles (ed.), The Edinburgh History of the Scots Language, pp. 569–622. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar

Mossé, Ferdinand, 1938. Histoire de la Forme Périphrastique Être + Participe Présent en Germanique, part 2: Moyen-Anglais et Anglais Moderne. Paris: Librairie C. Klincksieck.Google Scholar

Penhallurick, Robert, 2008a. Welsh English: Phonology. In Kortmann, and Upton, (eds), pp. 105–121.Google Scholar

Penhallurick, Robert, 2008b. Welsh English: Morphology and syntax. In Kortmann, and Upton, (eds), pp. 360–372.Google Scholar

Poplack, Shana and Tagliamonte, Sali, 2001. African American English in the Diaspora. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Poussa, Patricia, 1990. A contact-universals origin for periphrastic do, with special consideration of OE–Celtic contact. In Adamson, Sylvia, Law, Vivien, Vincent, Nigel and Wright, Susan (eds), Papers from the Fifth International Conference on English Historical Linguistics, pp. 407–434. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Preußler, Walter, 1938. Keltischer Einfluß im Englischen. Indogermanische Forschungen 56: 178–191.Google Scholar

Raumolin-Brunberg, Helena, 2005. The diffusion of subject YOU: A case study in historical sociolinguistics. Language Variation and Change 17: 55–73.Google Scholar

Rockel, Martin, 1989. Grundzüge einer Geschichte der irischen Sprache [Outline of a History of the Irish Language]. Vienna: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften.Google Scholar

Rosenthal, Bernard et al. (eds), 2009. Records of the Salem Witch-Hunt. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Rupp, Laura and Page-Verhoeff, Hanne, 2005. Pragmatic and historical aspects of Definite Article Reduction in northern English dialects. English World-Wide 26 (3): 325–346.Google Scholar

Sabban, Annette, 1982. Gälisch–Englischer Sprachkontakt [Gaelic–English Language Contact]. Heidelberg: Groos.Google Scholar

Sabban, Annette, 1985. On the variability of Hebridean English syntax: The verbal group. In Görlach, Manfred (ed.), Focus on Scotland, pp. 125–144. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Schreier, Daniel, 2005. Consonant Change in English Worldwide: Synchrony Meets Diachrony. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar

Shuken, Cynthia, 1984. Highland and Island English. In Trudgill, (ed.), pp. 152–166.Google Scholar

Singler, John (ed.), 1990. Pidgin and Creole Tense-Mood-Aspect Systems. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Szmrecsanyi, Benedikt, 2012. Typological profile: L1 varieties. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 827–842.Google Scholar

Szmrecsanyi, Benedikt and Kortmann, Bernd, 2008. Vernacular universals and Angloversals in a typological perspective. In Filppula, Markku and Klemola, Juhani (eds), Vernacular Universals and Language Contacts, pp. 33–53. New York and London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Thomas, Erik, 2008. Rural southern white accents. In Schneider, Edgar W. (eds), Varieties of English, vol. 2: The Americas and the Caribbean, pp. 87–114. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Tolkien, John R. R., 1963. English and Welsh. In Angles and Britons (The O’Donnell Lectures), pp. 1–41. Cardiff: University of Wales Press.Google Scholar

Tristram, Hildegard L. C., 1997. Do-periphrasis in contact? In Ramisch, Heinrich and Wynne, Kenneth J. (eds), Language in Time and Space: Studies in Honour of Wolfgang Viereck on the Occasion of his 60th Birthday, pp. 401–417. Stuttgart: Franz Steiner.Google Scholar

Trudgill, Peter (ed.), 1984. Language in the British Isles. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Trudgill, Peter, 1998. Third-person singular zero: African American Vernacular English, East Anglian dialects and Spanish persecution in the Low Countries. Folia Linguistica Historica 18 (1/2): 139–148.Google Scholar

Trudgill, Peter, 2002. Sociolinguistic Variation and Change. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar

Trudgill, Peter, 2008. The dialect of East Anglia. In Kortmann, and Upton, (eds), pp. 178–193.Google Scholar

Trudgill, Peter, 2009. Sociolinguistic typology and complexification. In Sampson, Geoffrey, Gil, David and Trudgill, Peter (eds), Language Complexity as an Evolving Variable, pp. 98–109. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Trudgill, Peter, 2010. What really happened to Old English? In Trudgill, Peter, Investigations in Sociohistorical Linguistics: Stories of Colonisation and Contact, pp. 1–35. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Upton, Clive and Widdowson, John D. A., 2006. An Atlas of English Dialects, second edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Vennemann, Theo, 2002. On the rise of ‘Celtic’ syntax in Middle English. In Lucas, Peter and Lucas, Angela (eds), From Tongue to Text: Papers from the Third International Conference on Middle English: University College Dublin, 1–4 July 1999, pp. 203–234. Frankfurt: Peter Lang.Google Scholar

Visser, Federicus T., 1963–1973. An Historical Syntax of the English Language, four volumes. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar

Wagner, Heinrich, 1959. Das Verbum in den Sprachen der britischen Inseln [The Verb in the Languages of the British Isles]. Tübingen: Niemeyer.Google Scholar

Wagner, Susanne, 2008. English dialects in the South-West: Morphology and syntax. In Kortmann, and Upton, (eds), pp. 417–439.Google Scholar

Wagner, Susanne, 2012. Pronominal systems. In Hickey, (ed.), Areal Features of the Anglophone World, pp. 379–408.Google Scholar

Wakelin, Martyn, 1984. Rural dialects in England. In Trudgill, (ed.), pp. 70–93.Google Scholar

Wakelin, Martyn, 1986. The Southwest of England. Varieties of English Around the World, Text Series, vol. 5. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Wakelin, Martyn, 1988. The phonology of South-Western English 1500–1700. In Fisiak, Jacek (ed.), Historical Dialectology: Regional and Social, pp. 609–644. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Watson, Kevin and Clark, Lynn, 2016. The origins of Liverpool English. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Listening to the Past: Audio Records of Accents of English, pp. 113–141. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Williams, Stephen, 1980. A Welsh Grammar. Cardiff: University of Wales Press.Google Scholar

Winford, Donald, 2005. Contact-induced changes: Classification and processes. Diachronica 22 (2): 373–427.Google Scholar

Anderwald, Lieselotte, 2012. Negation in varieties of English. In Hickey, (ed.), pp. 299–328.Google Scholar

Brato, Thorsten and Huber, Magnus, 2012. Areal features of English in Africa. In Hickey, (ed.), pp. 161–185.Google Scholar

Eberle, Nicole and Schreier, Daniel, 2013. African Bermudian English and the Caribbean connection. English World-Wide 34: 279–304.Google Scholar

Faraclas, Nicholas, 2012. Nigerian Pidgin. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 407–432.Google Scholar

Hackert, Stephanie, 2012. The Caribbean. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 704–732.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2012a. Introduction: Areal features of the anglophone world. In Hickey, (ed.), pp. 1–19.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond (ed.), 2012b. Areal Features of the Anglophone World. Berlin and New York: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Huber, Magnus, 2012. Africa. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 806–823.Google Scholar

Kortmann, Bernd, 2012. The British Isles. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 679–702.Google Scholar

Kortmann, Bernd, 2013. How powerful is geography as an explanatory factor of variation? Areal features in the Anglophone world. In Auer, Peter, Hilpert, Martin, Stukenbrock, Anja and Szmrecsanyi, Benedikt (eds), Space in Language and Linguistics: Geographical, Interactional, and Cognitive Perspectives, pp. 165–194. Berlin and New York: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Kortmann, Bernd and Lunkenheimer, Kerstin (eds), 2012a. The Mouton World Atlas of Variation in English. Berlin and Boston: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Kortmann, Bernd and Lunkenheimer, Kerstin, 2012b. Introduction. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 1–11.Google Scholar

Kortmann, Bernd and Wolk, Christoph, 2012. Morphosyntactic variation in the anglophone world: A global perspective. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 906–936.Google Scholar

Lunkenheimer, Kerstin, 2012. Tense and aspect. In Hickey, (ed.), pp. 329–353.Google Scholar

Mesthrie, Rajend, 2012. Asia. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 784–805.Google Scholar

Mesthrie, Rajend and Bhatt, Rakesh M., 2008. World Englishes: The Study of New Linguistic Varieties. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Montgomery, Michael B., 2008. Appalachian English: Morphology and syntax. In Schneider, Edgar (ed.), Handbook of Varieties of English, vol. 2: The Americas and the Caribbean, pp. 428–467. Berlin and Boston: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Schneider, Edgar, 2007. Postcolonial English: Varieties around the World. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Schneider, Edgar W., 2012. North America. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 734–762.Google Scholar

Siegel, Jeff, 2012. Australia Pacific region. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 764–782.Google Scholar

Szmrecsanyi, Benedikt, 2013. Grammatical Variation in British English Dialects: A Study in Corpus-Based Dialectometry. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Wagner, Susanne, 2012. Pronominal systems. In Hickey, (ed.), pp. 379–408.Google Scholar

Wolk, Christoph, 2013. Integrating Aggregational and Probabilistic Approaches to Dialectology and Language Variation. PhD thesis, University of Freiburg, Germany.Google Scholar

Abondolo, Daniel (ed.), 1997a. The Uralic Languages. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar

Abondolo, Daniel, 1997b. Introduction. In Abondolo, (ed.), pp. 1–42.Google Scholar

Alexiou, Margaret, 2002. After Antiquity: Greek Language, Myth, and Metaphor. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press.Google Scholar

Andersen, Henning, 1996. Reconstructing Prehistorical Dialects: Initial Vowels in Slavic and Baltic. Trends in Linguistics, vol. 91. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Anthony, David, 1990. Migration in archeology: The baby and the bathwater. American Anthropologist 92: 895–914.Google Scholar

Barford, P. M., 2001. The Early Slavs: Culture and Society in Early Medieval Eastern Europe. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press.Google Scholar

Baxter, William H., 1992. A Handbook of Old Chinese Phonology. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Berger, Tilman, 2014. The convergence of Czech and German between the years 900 and 1500. In Besters-Dilger, et al. (eds), pp. 189–198.Google Scholar

Besters-Dilger, Juliane, Dermarkar, Cynthia, Pfänder, Stefan and Rabus, Achim (eds), 2014. Congruence in Contact-induced Language Change: Language Families, Typological Resemblance, and Perceived Similarity. Freiburg Institute for Advanced Studies, School of Language and Literature, Linguae & Litterae, vol. 27. Berlin and Boston: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Bickell, Balthasar and Nichols, Johanna, 2006. Oceania, the Pacific Rim, and the theory of linguistic areas. In Proceedings of the Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, vol. 32. Berkeley, CA: Berkeley Linguistics Society.Google Scholar

de Boel, Gunnar, 2008. The genesis of clitic doubling from Ancient to Medieval Greek. In Kallulli, and Tasmowski, (eds), pp. 89–103.Google Scholar

Brüske, Wolfgang, 1955. Untersuchungen zur Geschichte des Lutizenbundes: Deutsch-wendische Beziehungen des 10.–12. Jahrhunderts. Mitteldeutsche Forschungen, vol. 3. Münster: Böhlau.Google Scholar

Butt, John and Benjamin, Carmen, 2004. A New Reference Grammar of Modern Spanish, fourth edition. New York: McGraw Hill.Google Scholar

Curta, Florin, 2011. The Edinburgh History of the Greeks, c. 500 to 1050: the Early Middle Ages. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar

Dahl, Östen, 2001. The origin of the Scandinavian languages. In Dahl, Östen and Koptjevskaja-Tamm, Maria (eds), The Circum-Baltic Languages, vol. 1: Past and Present: Typology and Contact, pp. 215–236. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Damme, Robert, 1987. Westslavische Reliktwörter in Stralsunder Vokabular. In Ureland, P. Sture (ed.), Sprachkontakt in der Hanse: Aspekte des Sprachausgleichs im Ostsee- und Nordseeraum. Akten der 7. Internationalen Symposions über Sprachkontakt in Europa, Lübeck 1986, pp. 163–178. Tübingen: Niemeyer.Google Scholar

Eliot, C. N. E., 1890. A Finnish Grammar. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar

Emeneau, M. B., 1956. India as a linguistic area. Language 32: 3–16.Google Scholar

Endzelin, J., 1901. Ursprung und Gebrauch des lettischen Debitivs. Beiträge zur Kunde der indogermanischen Sprachen (Bezzenbergers Beiträge) 26: 66–74.Google Scholar

Feldbrugge, F. J. M., 2009. Law in Medieval Russia. Leiden and Boston: M. Nijhoff.Google Scholar

Friedman, Victor, 2008. Balkan object reduplication in areal and dialectological perspective. In Kallulli, and Tasmowski, (eds), pp. 33–64.Google Scholar

Gebauer, Jan, 1929. Historická mluvnice českého jazyka, vol. 4: Skladba [Historical Grammar of Czech: Syntax]. Prague: Česká Akademie Vĕd a Umĕní.Google Scholar

Gimbutas, Marija, 1971. The Slavs. New York: Praeger.Google Scholar

Gippius, A. A., 1996. ‘Russkaja Pravda’ i ‘Voprošanie Kirika’ v Novgorodskoj Kormčej 1282 g. (k xarakteristike jazykovoj situacii drevnego Novgoroda) [‘Russian Law Code’ and ‘Kirik’s Questions’ in the Novgorod Nomocanon of 1282 (toward a characterization of the language situation of Old Novgorod)]. Slavjanovedenie 1996.1: 48–62.Google Scholar

Hill, Jane, 2001. Languages on the ground: Toward an anthropological dialectology. In Terrell, John Edward (ed.), Archeology, Language, and History: Essays on Culture and Ethnicity, pp. 257–282. Westport, CT and London: Bergin & Garvey.Google Scholar

Hopper, Paul and Thompson, Sandra A., 1980. Transitivity in grammar and discourse. Language 56 (2): 251–299.Google Scholar

Jablonskis, Jonas, 1922. Lietuvių kalbos gramatika. Etimologija: Vidurinėms mokslo įstaigoms [Grammar of Lithuanian Etymology: For Institutions of Secondary Education], second edition. Kaunas: Švyturio bendrovės leidinys.Google Scholar

Jakobson, Roman, 1931. K xarakteristike evrazijskogo jazykovogo sojuza [Toward the Characterization of the Eurasian Linguistic Area]. Paris: Izd. Evraziitsev. Reprinted in 1962, Selected Writings, vol. 1: Phonological Studies, pp. 144–201, The Hague and Paris: Mouton.Google Scholar

Johansen, Paul and von zur Mühlen, Heinz, 1973. Deutsch und Undeutsch im mittelalterlichen und frühneuzeitlichen Reval. Ostmitteleuropa in Vergangenheit und Gegenwart, vol. 15. Köln: Böhlau, 1973.Google Scholar

Joseph, Brian D., 1983. The Synchrony and Diachrony of the Balkan Infinitive: A Study in Areal, General, and Historical Linguistics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Joseph, Brian D., 2010. Language contact in the Balkans. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 619–633. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar

Kallulli, Dalina and Tasmowski, Liliane, 2008. Clitic Doubling in the Balkan Languages. Linguistik aktuell, vol. 130. Amsterdam; Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Kantzow, Thomas, 1816. Pomerania, oder, Ursprunck, Altheit und Geschicht der Völcker und Lande Pomern, Cassuben, Wenden, Stettin, Rhügen in vierzehn Büchern, edited by Rosengarten, Hans Gottfried Ludwig, vol. 1. Greifswald: Mauritins.Google Scholar

Koškins, Igors, 1996. Deutsches Lehngut in den altrussischen Novgoroder Urkunden. In Brandt, Gisela (ed.), Beiträge zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache im Baltikum, pp. 87–98. Stuttgart: Hans Dieter Heinz.Google Scholar

Kuz´mina, I. B. and Nemčenko, E. V., 1971. Sintaksis pričastnyx form v russkix govorax [The Syntax of Participial Forms in Russian Dialects]. Moscow: Nauka.Google Scholar

Laca, Brenda, 2006. El objeto directo: La marcación preposicional [The direct object: Prepositional marking]. In Company, Concepción Company (ed.), Sintaxis histórica de la lengua española, part 1: La frase verbal [Historical Syntax of Spanish: The Verb Phrase], pp. 423–478. México: Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México.Google Scholar

Lorentz, Friedrich, 1903. Slovinzische Grammatik. St Petersburg: Vtoroe Otdelenie Imperatorskoj Akademii Nauk.Google Scholar

Lübben, August, 1888. Mittelniederdeutsches Handwörterbuch. Nach dem Tode des Verfassers vollendet von Christoph Walther. Norden: D. Soltau.Google Scholar

McAnallen, Julia, 2011. The History of Predicative Possession in Slavic: Internal Development vs. Language Contact. PhD dissertation, University of California, Berkeley.Google Scholar

Merrill, Jessica, 2012. The Role of Folklore Study in the Rise of Russian Formalist and Czech Structuralist Literary Theory. PhD dissertation, University of California, Berkeley.Google Scholar

Obolensky, Dimitri, 1971. The Byzantine Commonwealth: Eastern Europe, 500–1453. New York: Praeger.Google Scholar

Orzechowska, Hanna, 1973. Podwajanie dopełnień w historii bułgarskiego języka literackiego [Object doubling in the history of the Bulgarian literary language]. Warsaw: Państwowe Wydawnictwo Naukowe.Google Scholar

Otsmaa, Lilia, 1975. O russkix zaimstvovanijax v baltijskom nižnenemeckom jazyke [On Russian borrowings in Baltic Low German]. Linguistica 6: 86–113.Google Scholar

Schick, Ivanka, 2000. Clitic doubling constructions in Balkan–Slavic languages. In Beukema, Frits and den Dikken, Marcel (eds), Clitic Phenomena in European Languages, pp. 259–292. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Stoianovich, Traian, 1960. The conquering Balkan Orthodox merchant. The Journal of Economic History 20: 234–313.Google Scholar

Svantesson, Jan-Olof, Tsendina, Anna, Karlsson, Anastasia and Franzén, Vivan, 2005. The Phonology of Mongolian. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Thomason, Sarah Grey and Kaufman, Terrence, 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Timberlake, Alan, 1974. The Nominative Object in Slavic, Baltic, and West Finnic. Munich: Otto Sagner.Google Scholar

Tomić, Olga, 2004. The Balkan Sprachbund: Introduction. In Tomić, Olga (ed.), Balkan Syntax and Semantics, pp. 1–55. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Toporov, V. N. and Trubačev, O. N., 1962. Lingvističeskij analiz gidronimov Verxnego Podneprov´ja [Linguistic Analysis of Hydronyms of the Upper Dnepr Region]. Moscow: Akademija Nauk SSSR.Google Scholar

Vasmer, Max, 1941. Die Slaven in Griechenland. Berlin: Akademie der Wissenschaften.Google Scholar

Văžarova, Živka N., 1965. Slavjanski i slavjanobălgarski selišta v bălgarskite zemi VI–XI vek [Slavic and Slavobulgarian Settlements on Bulgarian Territory from the Sixth through the Eleventh Century]. Sofia: Bălgarska Akademija na Naukite.Google Scholar

Veenker, Wolfgang, 1967. Die Frage des finnougrischen Substrats in der russischen Sprache. Indiana University Publications, Uralic and Altaic Series, vol. 82. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar

Viitso, Tiit-Rein, 1997. Estonian. In Abondolo, (ed.), pp. 115–148.Google Scholar

VoprKir, 1888. Voprosy Kirika, Savvy i Il´i, s otvetami Nifonta, episkopa Novgorodskogo, i drugix ierarxičeskix lic, no. 2: Pamjatniki drevne-russkogo kanoničeskogo prava, pt. 1. Russkaja istoričeskaja biblioteka, izdavaemaja Arxeografičeskoj Kommissiej, vol. 6. [The Questions of Kirik, Savva, and Ilja, with Answers of Nifont, Bishop of Novgorod, and of Other Clerics. Monuments of Old Russian Canon Law. Russian Historical Library, published by the Archaeographic Commission]. St Petersburg.Google Scholar

Vryonis, Spiros, 1981. The evolution of Slavic society and the Slavic invasions in Greece: The first major Slavic attack on Thessaloniki, A.D. 597. Hesperia 50: 378–390.Google Scholar

Wiemer, Björn, Seržant, Ilja and Erker, Aksana, 2014. Convergence in the Baltic–Slavic contact zone: Triangulation approach. In Besters-Dilger, et al. (eds), pp. 15–42.Google Scholar

Willis, David, 2013. Negation in the history of the Slavonic languages. In Willis, David, Lucas, Christopher and Breitbarth, Anne (eds), The History of Negation in the Languages of Europe and the Mediterranean, vol. 1: Case Studies, pp. 341–398. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Witte, Hans, 1906. Wendische Zu- und Familiennamen aus mecklenburgischen Urkunden und Akten gesammelt und mit Unterstützung des Herrn Prof. Dr. Ernst Mucke zu Freiberg (Sachsen) bearbeitet. Mecklenburgischer Jahrbücher, Verein für Mecklenburgische Geschichte und Altertumskunde 71: 153–290.Google Scholar

Zaicz, Gábor, 1997. Mordva. In Abondolo, (ed.), pp. 184–218.Google Scholar

Zaliznjak, Andrej A., 2004. Drevnenovgorodskij dialekt, 2-e izd., pererabotannoe s učetom materiala naxodok 1995–2003 gg. [Old Novgorod Dialect, second edition, revised with consideration of finds 1995–2003]. Moscow: Jazyki russkoj kul′tury.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra and Dixon, Robert M. W., 2001. Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Alekseev, Mikhail E., 1994a. Budukh. In Smeets, (ed.), pp. 259–296.Google Scholar

Alekseev, Mikhail E., 1994b. Rutul. In Smeets, (ed.), pp. 213–258.Google Scholar

Alekseev, Mikhail E., Klimov, Georgij A., Starostin, Sergei A. and Testelets, Yakov G. (eds), 1999. Jazyki Mira: Kavkazskie Jazyki [Languages of the World: Caucasian Languages]. Moscow: Academia.Google Scholar

Alekseev, Mikhail E. and Radjabov, Ramazan, 2004. Tsez. In Job, (ed.), pp. 115–163.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory, 1997. Lak phonology. In Kaye, and Daniels, (eds), pp. 973–997.Google Scholar

Authier, Gilles, 2012. Grammaire juhuri, ou judeo-tat, langue iranienne des Juifs du Caucase de l’est. Beiträge zur Iranistik, vol. 36. Wiesbaden: Reichert.Google Scholar

Babel, Molly E., 2009. Phonetic and Social Selectivity in Speech Accommodation. PhD thesis, University of California, Berkeley.Google Scholar

Balanovsky, Oleg, et al. and The Genographic Consortium, 2011. Parallel evolution of genes and languages in the Caucasus region. Molecular Biology and Evolution 28 (10): 2905–2920.Google Scholar

Baudouin de Courtenay, Jan Ignacy Niecisław, 1963. Izbrannyye trudy po obshchemu yazykoznaniyu [Selected Works on General Linguistics], vol. 2. Moscow: Izdatel’stvo Akademii Nauk SSSR.Google Scholar

van den Berg, Helma, 1995. A Grammar of Hunzib. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar

van den Berg, Helma, 2005. The East Caucasian language family. Lingua 115 (1): 147–190.Google Scholar

Berta, Árpád, 1998. West Kipchak languages. In Johanson, and Csató, (eds), pp. 301–317.Google Scholar

Bickel, Baltasar, 2008. A general method for the statistical evaluation of typological distributions. Manuscript, University of Leipzig. www.uni-leipzig.de/~bickel/research/projects/publ.html Google Scholar

Bisang, Walter, 2004. Dialectology and typology: An integrative perspective. In Kortmann, Bernd (ed.), Dialectology Meets Typology: Dialect Grammar from a Cross-linguistic Perspective, pp. 11–46. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Bläsing, Uwe, 2003. Kalmuck. In Janhunen, Juha (ed.), The Mongolic Languages, pp. 229–247. New York: Routledge.Google Scholar

Blevins, Juliette, 2006. A theoretical synopsis of Evolutionary Phonology. Theoretical Linguistics 32 (2): 117–166.Google Scholar

Blevins, Juliette and Wedel, Andrew, 2009. Inhibited sound change: An evolutionary approach to lexical competition. Diachronica 26 (2): 143–183.Google Scholar

Boeder, Winfried, 2005. The South Caucasian languages. Lingua 115 (1): 5–89.Google Scholar

Brown, Cecil, Holman, Eric and Wichmann, Søren, 2013. Sound correspondences in the world’s languages. Language 89 (1): 4–29.Google Scholar

Bybee, Joan, 2003. Word frequency and context of use in the lexical diffusion of phonetically conditioned sound change. Language Variation and Change 14 (3): 261–290.Google Scholar

Catford, John C., 1977. Mountain of tongues: The languages of the Caucasus. Annual Review of Anthropology, 6: 283–314.Google Scholar

Catford, John C., 1983. Pharyngeal and laryngeal sounds in Caucasian languages. In Bless, Diane and Abbs, James (eds), Vocal Fold Physiology: Contemporary Research and Clinical Issues, pp. 344–350. San Diego: College-Hill.Google Scholar

Catford, John C., 1992. Caucasian phonetics and general phonetics. In Paris, Catherine (ed.), Caucasologie et mythologie comparée: Actes du Colloque International CNRS IVe Colloque de Caucasologie, pp. 193–216, Paris: Peeters.Google Scholar

Catford, John C., 1994. Vowel systems of Caucasian languages. In Aronson, Howard Isaac (ed.), Non-Slavic Languages of the USSR: Papers from the Fourth Conference, pp. 44–60. Bloomington, IN: Slavica Publishers.Google Scholar

C’ereteli, Grigol, 1976. K voprosu o klassifikacii novoaramejskix dialektov [On the question of classification of Neo-Aramaic dialects]. In Philologia Orientalis, vol. IV, Tbilisi: Mecniereba, pp. 224–232.Google Scholar

Chirikba, Viacheslav, 2008a. The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund. In Muysken, Pieter (ed.), From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics, pp. 25–93. Studies in Language Companion Series, vol. 25. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Chirikba, Viacheslav, 2008b. Armenians and their dialects in Abkhazia. In Lubotsky, Alexander, Schaeken, Jos and Wiedenhof, Jeroen (eds), Balto-Slavic and Indo-European Linguistics, pp. 51–67. Amsterdam: Rodopi.Google Scholar

Chitoran, Ioana, 2002. Georgian harmonic clusters: Phonetic cues to phonological representation. Phonology 15 (2): 121–141.Google Scholar

Cho, Taehong and Ladefoged, Peter, 1999. Variation and universals in VOT: evidence from 18 languages. Journal of Phonetics 27 (2): 207–229.Google Scholar

Coene, Frederik, 2009. The Caucasus: An Introduction. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Colarusso, John, 1988. The Northwest Caucasian Languages: A Phonological Survey. New York and London: Garland Publishing.Google Scholar

Comrie, Bernard (ed.), 1981. The Languages of the Soviet Union. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Comrie, Bernard, 2003. A note on pharyngealization and umlaut in two Tsezic languages. In Boeder, Winfried (ed.), Kaukasische Sprachprobleme: Beiträge zu den Kaukasistentagungen in Oldenburg 1995–2001, pp. 105–109. Bibliotheks- und Informationssystem der Universität Oldenburg.Google Scholar

Comrie, Bernard, 2008. Linguistic diversity in the Caucasus. Annual Review of Anthropology 37 (1): 131–143.Google Scholar

Comrie, Bernard and Khalilov, Madzhid, 2010. The Dictionary of Languages and Dialects of the Peoples of the Northern Caucasus: Comparison of the Basic Lexicon; Languages and Dialects of the Peoples of Republic of Daghestan, Ingush Republic, Republic of North Ossetia-Alania, Chechen Republic and of the Nakh-Daghestanian Peoples of Azerbaijan and Georgia. Makhachkala, and Leipzig: Max Planck Institute for Evolutionary Anthropology.Google Scholar

Daniel, Mikhail, Dobrushina, Nina and Knyazev, Sergey, 2011. Highlanders’ Russian: Case study in bilingualism and language interference in central Daghestan. In Mustajoki, Arto, Protassova, Ekaterina and Vakhtin, Nikolai (eds), Instrumentarium of Linguistics: Sociolinguistic Approach to Non-Standard Russian, pp. 65–93. Slavica Helsingiensia, vol. 40. University of Helsinki.Google Scholar

Dirr, Adolf, 1928. Einführung in das Studium der kaukasischen Sprachen: mit einer Sprachenkarte. Leipzig: Asia Major.Google Scholar

Dobrushina, Nina, 2013. How to study multilingualism of the past: Investigating traditional contact situations in Daghestan. Journal of Sociolinguistics 17 (3): 376–393.Google Scholar

Dzhidalaev, Nurislam S., 2010. Tjurksko-dagestanskie jazykovye kontakty (na primere lakskogo jazyka) [Turkic-Dagestanian language contacts (on the example of Lak)]. Makhachkala: Russian Academy of Science in Dagestan.Google Scholar

Fallon, Paul D., 2001. The Synchronic and Diachronic Phonology of Ejectives. New York and London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Flege, James E., Schirru, Carlo and MacKay, Ian R. A., 2003. Interaction between the native and second language phonetic subsystems. Speech Communication, 40: 467–491.Google Scholar

Flege, James E. and Port, Robert, 1981. Cross-language phonetic interference: Arabic to English. Language and Speech, 24: 125–146.Google Scholar

Forker, Diana, 2013. A Grammar of Hinuq. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Friedman, Victor A., 2009. Sociolinguistics in the Caucasus. In Ball, Martin J. (ed.), The Routledge Handbook of Sociolinguistics Around the World, pp. 127–138. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar

Gilles, Peter and Siebenhaar, Beat, 2010. Areal variation in segmental phonetics and phonology. In Auer, Peter and Schmidt, Jürgen Erich (eds), Language and Space, pp. 760–786. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Gippert, Jost, 2008. Endangered Caucasian languages in Georgia: Linguistic parameters of language endangerment. In Harrison, K. David, Rood, David S. and Dwyer, Arienne (eds), Lessons from Documented Endangered Languages, pp. 159–193. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Gordon, Matthew and Applebaum, Ayla, 2006. Turkish Kabardian. Journal of the International Phonetic Association 36 (2): 255–264.Google Scholar

Grawunder, Sven, 2013. Intensity slopes as robust measure for distinguishing glottalic vs pulmonic stop initiation. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 134 (5): 4069.Google Scholar

Grawunder, Sven, 2015. Foneticheskie kharakteristiki (nenazalizovannykh) glaznykh v bezhtinskom yazyke [Phonetic characteristics of (non-nasalized) vowels in Bezhta]. In Comrie, Bernard (ed.), Grammatika bezhtinskogo yazyka [A Grammar of Bezhta], pp. 52–62. Leipzig and Makhachkala: ALEPH.Google Scholar

Grawunder, Sven, Simpson, Adrian P. and Khalilov, Madzhid S., 2010. Phonetic characteristics of ejectives: Samples from Caucasian languages. In Fuchs, Susanne, Toda, Martine and Żygis, Marzena (eds), Turbulent Sounds: An Interdisciplinary Guide, pp. 209–244. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Gudava, Togo E., 1964. Konsonantizm andijxskix yazykov [The Consonantism of the Andic Languages]. Tbilisi: Izdatel’stvo Akademii Nauk Gruzinskoj SSR.Google Scholar

Harris, Alice C., 1991. The Indigenous Languages of the Caucasus, vol. I: The Kartvelian Languages. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books.Google Scholar

Haspelmath, Martin, 1993. A Grammar of Lezgian. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Haspelmath, Martin, 2006. Against markedness (and what to replace it with). Journal of Linguistics 42 (1): 25–70.Google Scholar

Hewitt, B. George, 1981. Caucasian languages. In Comrie, (ed.), pp. 196–237.Google Scholar

Hewitt, B. George, 1989. The Indigenous Languages of the Caucasus, vol. 2: The North West Caucasian Languages. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books.Google Scholar

Hewitt, B. George, 2004. Introduction to the Study of the Languages of the Caucasus. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar

Hewitt, B. George, 2005. North West Caucasian. Lingua 115 (1): 91–145.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2012a Areal features of the Anglophone world. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Areal Features of the Anglophone World, pp. 1–19. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2012b. Internally and externally motivated language change. In Hernández-Campoy, Juan Manuel and Conde-Silvestre, Juan Camilo (eds), The Handbook of Historical Sociolinguistics, pp. 387–407. Malden, MA: Wiley.Google Scholar

Höhlig, Monika, 1997. Kontaktbedingter Sprachwandel in der adygeischen Umgangssprache im Kaukasus und in der Türkei: Vergleichende Analyse des russischen und türkischen Einflusses in mündlichen adygeischen Texten. LINCOM Studies in Caucasian Linguistics, vol. 3. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar

Holisky, Dee Ann, 1991. Laz. In Harris, (ed.), pp. 395–472.Google Scholar

Holisky, Dee Ann and Gagua, Rasudan, 1994. Tsova-Tush (Batsbi). In Smeets, (ed.), pp. 147–212.Google Scholar

Hyman, Larry M., 2009. How (not) to do phonological typology: The case of pitch-accent. Language Sciences 31 (2): 213–238.Google Scholar

Isakov, Isak Abdulvakhidovich and Khalilov, Madzhid S., 2004. Hinukh. In Job, (ed.), pp. 167–214.Google Scholar

Isakov, Isak Abdulvakhidovich and Khalilov, Madzhid S., 2012. Gunzibskij jazyk (Fonetika Morfologija. Slovoobrazovanie. Leksika. Teksty) [The Hunzib Language]. Makhachkala: Russian Academy of the Sciences.Google Scholar

Jastrow, Otto, 1977. Zur Phonologie des Kurdischen in der Türkei. Studien zur Indologie und Iranistik, 3: 84–106.Google Scholar

Job, Michael (ed.), 2004. The Indigenous Languages of the Caucasus, vol. 3: The North East Caucasian Languages, part 1. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books.Google Scholar

Johanson, Lars, 2006. On the roles of Turkic in the Caucasus area. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas, pp. 160–181. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar

Johanson, Lars and Csató, Éva (eds), 1998. The Turkic Languages. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar

Kaye, Alan S. and Daniels, Peter T. (eds), 1997. Phonologies of Asia and Africa (including the Caucasus), vol. 1. Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns.Google Scholar

Keskin, Mesut, 2008. Zur dialektalen Gliederung des Zazaki. Unpublished MA thesis, Johann-Wolfgang-von-Goethe-Universität Frankfurt, Institut für Vergleichende indogermanische Sprachwissenschaft.Google Scholar

Khalidova, Rasidat Sachrudinovna, 2006. Avarsko-andijskie jazykovye kontakty [Avar-Andic Language Contacts]. Makhachkala: Russian Academy of the Sciences.Google Scholar

Khalilov, Madzhid Sharipovic, 2004. Gruzinsko-dagestanskie jazykovye kontakty [Georgian–Dagestanian Language Contacts]. Moskva: Nauka.Google Scholar

Khalilova, Zaira, 2009. A Grammar of Kwarshi. PhD thesis, University of Leiden.Google Scholar

Khan, Geoffrey, 2008. The Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Barwar. Handbook of Oriental Studies, Section 1: The Near and Middle East, vol. 96. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Kibrik, Alexander E., 2001. Bagvalinskij jazyk: Grammatika, teksty, slovari [The Bagvalal Language: Grammar, Texts, Dictionary]. Moscow: Russian Academy of the Sciences.Google Scholar

Kibrik, Alexander E. and Kodzasov, Sandro V., 1990. Sopostavitel’noe izucenie dagestanskix jazykov: Imja, Fonetika [A Comparative Study of Dagestanian Languages: Nouns, Phonetics]. Moscow: Izdatel’stvo Moskovskogo Universitet.Google Scholar

Kibrik, Alexander E. and Testelec, Yakuv G. (eds), 1999. Elementy tsakhurskogo yazyka v tipologicheskom osveshchenii [Elements of the Tsakhur Language in a typological light]. Moscow: Nasledie.Google Scholar

Kingston, John and Nichols, Johanna, 1986. Pharyngealization in Chechen. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 80: 62.Google Scholar

Klimov, Georgij A., 1994. Einführung in die kaukasische Sprachwissenschaft, translated and revised by Gippert, Jost. Hamburg: Helmut Buske.Google Scholar

Kodzasov, Sandro V., 1999. Caucasian: Daghestanian languages. In van der Hulst, Harry (ed.), Word Prosodic Systems in the Languages of Europe, pp. 995–1020. Berlin and New York: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Kornfilt, Jaklin, 1997. Turkish. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Koryakov, Yuri B., 2006. Atlas kavkazkikh yazykov [Atlas of the Caucasian Languages]. Moscow: RAN.Google Scholar

Lacroix, René, 2009. Description du Dialecte Laze d’Arhavi (Caucasique du Sud, Turquie): Grammaire et Textes. PhD thesis, Université Lumière Lyon 2, Lyon.Google Scholar

Ladd, D. Robert, 2014. Simultaneous Structure in Phonology. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Ladefoged, Peter and Maddieson, Ian, 1996. The Sounds of the World’s Languages. Blackwell.Google Scholar

Lancia, Leonardo and Grawunder, Sven, 2014. Tongue–larynx interactions in the production of word initial laryngealization over different prosodic contexts: a repeated speech experiment. In Fuchs, Susanne et al. (eds), Proceedings of the 10th International Seminar on Speech Production (ISSP), Cologne, pp. 245–248.Google Scholar

Lindblom, Björn, 1990. Explaining phonetic variation: A sketch of the H&H theory. In Hardcastle, William and Marchal, Alain (eds), Speech Production and Speech Modeling, pp. 403–439. Dordrecht: Kluwer.Google Scholar

Lisker, Leigh and Abramson, Arthur, 1964. A cross-language study of voicing in initial stops: Acoustical measurements. Word 20 (3): 384–422.Google Scholar

Lupyan, Gary and Dale, Rick, 2010. Language structure is partly determined by social structure. PLoS ONE 5 (1): e8559.Google Scholar

Maddieson, Ian, 1984. Patterns of Sounds. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Maddieson, Ian, Rajabov, Ramasan and Sonnenschein, Aaron, 1996. The main features of Tsez phonetics. UCLA Working Papers In Phonetics: 94–110.Google Scholar

Magomedova, Patimat, 2004. Chamalal. In Job, (ed.), pp. 5–65.Google Scholar

McMahon, April M. S., 1994. Understanding Language Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Mejlanova, Udeizat A., 1970. Gjunejskij dialekt: osnova lezginskogo literaturnogo jazyka [The Gunei Dialect: Basis of the Lezgian Literary Language]. Makhachkala: Inst. Istorii, Yazyka i Literatury im. G Cadasy.Google Scholar

Nasidze, Ivan et al., 2004. Mitochondrial DNA and Y-chromosome variation in the Caucasus. Annals of Human Genetics 68 (3): 205–221.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 1994. Chechen. In Smeets, (ed.), pp. 1–78.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 1997. Chechen phonology. In Kaye, and Daniels, (eds), pp. 941–971.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 2011. Ingush Grammar. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 2013. The vertical archipelago: Adding the third dimension to linguistic geography. In Auer, Peter, Hilpert, Martin, Stukenbrock, Anja and Szmrecsanyi, Benedikt (eds), Space in Language and Linguistics: Geographical, Interactional, and Cognitive Perspectives, pp. 38–60. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Ohala, John J., 1990. There is no interface between phonology and phonetics: A personal view. Journal of Phonetics, 18: 153–171.Google Scholar

Rogava, Georgij Vissarionovic and Kerasheva, Zajnab Ibragimovna, 1966. Adygabzem igrammatik – Grammatika adygejskogo jazyka [Grammar of the Adyghe Language]. Maykop, Krasnodar: Krasnodarske Thylq Tedzapi [Krasnodar Publishing House].Google Scholar

Schönig, Claus, 1998. Azerbaijanian. In Johanson, and Csató, (eds), pp. 248–260.Google Scholar

Schulze, Wolfgang, 2005. Towards a history of Udi. International Journal of Diachronic Linguistics, 1: 55–91.Google Scholar

Schulze-Fürhoff, Wolfgang, 1994. Udi. In Smeets, (ed.), pp. 447–514.Google Scholar

Smeets, Rieks (ed.), 1994. The Indigenous Languages of the Caucasus, vol. 4: North East Caucasian Languages, part 2. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books.Google Scholar

Stilo, Donald L., 1994. Phonological systems in contact in Iran and Transcaucasia. In Marashi, Mehdi (ed.), Persian Studies in North America: Studies in Honor of Mohammad Ali Jazayery, pp. 75–94. Bethesda, MD: Iranbooks.Google Scholar

Stilo, Donald L., 2004. Iranian as buffer zone between the universal typologies of Turkic and Semitic. In Csató, Éva Ágnes, Isaksson, Bo and Jahani, Carina (eds), Linguistic Convergence and Areal Diffusion: Case Studies from Iranian, Semitic and Turkic, pp. 35–63. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar

Stilo, Donald L., 2006. Circumpositions as an areal response: The case study of the Iranian zone. In Johanson, Lars and Bulut, Christiane (eds), Turkic–Iranian Contact-Areas, pp. 310–333. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Sumbatova, Nina R. and Mutalov, Rasul O., 2003. A Grammar of Icari Dargwa. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar

Talibov, Bukar B., 2004. Tsakhur. In Job, (ed.), pp. 347–419.Google Scholar

Testen, David, 1997. Ossetic phonology. In Kaye, and Daniels, (eds), pp. 707–731.Google Scholar

Thomason, Sarah G. and Kaufman, Terrence, 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.CrossRef Google Scholar

Tolstoj, Nikita I., 1997. Tyurkskie Yazyki [Turkic Languages]. Yazyki Mira, Moscow: Indrik, RAN.Google Scholar

Trubetzkoy, Nikolai Sergeevich, 1958 [1939]. Grundzüge der Phonologie, seventh edition. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.Google Scholar

Trudgill, Peter, 2011. Sociolinguistic Typology: Social Determinants of Linguistic Complexity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Trudgill, Peter, 1996. Dialect typology: Isolation, social network and phonological structure. In Guy, Gregory R., Feagin, Crawford, Schiffrin, Deborah and Baugh, John (eds), Towards a Social Science of Language: Papers in Honour of William Labov, vol. 1, pp. 3–21. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Trudgill, Peter, 2004. Linguistic and social typology: The Austronesian migrations and phoneme inventories. Linguistic Typology 8 (3): 305–320.Google Scholar

Trudgill, Peter, 2011. Sociolinguistic Typology: Social Determinants of Linguistic Complexity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Tuite, Kevin, 1999. The myth of the Caucasian Sprachbund: The case of ergativity. Lingua 108 (1): 1–29.Google Scholar

Tuite, Kevin, 2008. The rise and fall and revival of the Ibero-Caucasian hypothesis. Historiographia Linguistica 35 (1–2): 23–82.Google Scholar

Vadzhibov, Malik, 2012. Fonetika tabasaranskogo jazyka – sravitel’noe opisanie zvukovykh sistem literaturnogo jazyka i mezhgiul’skogo govora [Phonetics of the Tabasaran Language]. Saarbrücken: Lambert Academic Publishing.Google Scholar

Vaux, Bert, 1998. The Phonology of Armenian. Oxford: Clarendon Press.CrossRef Google Scholar

Vicenik, Chad, 2010. An acoustic study of Georgian stop consonants. Journal of the International Phonetic Association 40 (1): 59–92.Google Scholar

Warner, Natasha, 1996. Acoustic characteristics of ejectives in Ingush. In Proceedings of the Fourth International Conference on Spoken Language Processing, ICSLP 96, 3, Philadelphia, PA.Google Scholar

Wixman, Ronald, 1980. Language Aspects of Ethnic Patterns and Processes in the North Caucasus. Chicago: University of Chicago, Department of Geography.Google Scholar

Yunusbayev, Bayazit, et al., 2012. The Caucasus as an asymmetric semipermeable barrier to ancient human migrations. Molecular Biology and Evolution 29 (1): 359–365.Google Scholar

Zabitov, S. M. and Efendiev, I. I., 2001. Slovar’ arabskikh i persidskikh leksicheskikh zaimstvovanij v lezginskom jazyke [Dictionary of Arab and Persian Lexical Loans in the Lezgian Language]. Makhachkala: Dagestan State University.Google Scholar

Blau, Joyce, 1975. Le Kurde de ’Amādiya et de Djabal Sindjār: Analyse Linguistique, Textes Folkloriques, Glossaires. Paris: Klincksieck.Google Scholar

Borghero, Roberta, 2005. The Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Ashitha. Unpublished PhD thesis, University of Cambridge.Google Scholar

Brustad, Kristen, 2000. The Syntax of Spoken Arabic: A Comparative Study of Moroccan, Egyptian, Syrian, and Kuwaiti Dialects. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press.Google Scholar

Bulut, Christiane, 2002. Evliya Çelebi as a linguist and dialectologist: Seventeenth century East Anatolian and Azeri Turkic dialects. In Tezcan, Nuran and Atlansoy, Kadir (eds), Evliya Çelebi ve Seyahatname, pp. 49–64. Doğu Akdeniz Üniversitesi Yayınları.Google Scholar

Bulut, Christiane, 2006. Turkish elements in spoken Kurmanji. In Boeschoten, Hans and Johanson, Lars (eds), Turkic Languages in Contact: Proceedings of the Wassenaar Meeting, Feb. 1996, pp. 95–121. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Bulut, Christiane, 2007. Iraqi Turkman. In Postgate, John (ed.), Languages of Iraq, Ancient and Modern, pp. 159–187. Cambridge: British School of Archaeology in Iraq.Google Scholar

Campbell, Lyle, 2006. Areal linguistics: A closer scrutiny. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas: Convergence in Historical and Typological Perspective, pp. 1–31. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar

Djelil, Ordixane and Djelil, Celile, 1978. Zargotina K’urda [The Oral Tradition of the Kurds]. Moscow: Nauk.Google Scholar

Dum-Tragut, Jasmine, 2009. Armenian. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.CrossRef Google Scholar

Fox, Samuel Ethan, 2009. The Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Bohtan. Piscataway, NJ: Gorgias Press.Google Scholar

Gemalmaz, Efrasiyap, 1995. Erzurum ili Ağızları: Inceleme, Metinler, Sözlük ve Dizinler [The Spoken Varieties (of Turkish) in Erzurum: Analysis, Texts, Lexicon, Glossaries]. Ankara: Türk Dil Kurumu.Google Scholar

Gippert, Jost, 2007/2008. Zur dialektalen Stellung des Zazaki. Die Sprache 47 (1): 77–107.Google Scholar

Göksel, Aslı and Kerslake, Celia, 2005. Turkish: A Comprehensive Grammar. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Grawunder, Sven, Geumann, Anja, Haig, Geoffrey, Celebi, Cemile and Stilo, Donald, 2013. Stop contrasts in Kurmanji Kurdish: Testing the ejectives hypothesis. Paper held at the Fifth International Conference on Iranian Linguistics (ICIL5), University of Bamberg, August 2013.Google Scholar

Haig, Geoffrey, 2001. Linguistic diffusion in present-day east Anatolia: From top to bottom. In Dixon, Robert and Aikhenvald, Alexandra (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 195–224. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Haig, Geoffrey, 2004. The invisibilization of Kurdish. The other side of language planning in Turkey. In Conermann, Stephan and Haig, Geoffrey (eds), Die Kurden: Studien zu ihrer Sprache, Geschichte und Kultur, pp. 121–150. Hamburg: Schenefeld.Google Scholar

Haig, Geoffrey, 2006. Turkish influence on Kurmanji: Evidence from the Tunceli dialect. In Johanson, Lars and Bulut, Christiane (eds), Turkic–Iranian Contact Areas: Historical and Linguistic Aspects, pp. 283–299. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Haig, Geoffrey, 2011. Linker, relativizer, nominalizer, tense-particle: On the Ezafe in West Iranian. In Yap, Foong Ha, Grunow-Hårsta, Karen and Wrona, Janick (eds), Nominalization in Asian Languages: Diachronic and Typological Perspectives, vol. 1: Sino-Tibetan and Iranian Languages, pp. 363–390. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Haig, Geoffrey, 2014a. East Anatolia as a linguistic area? Conceptual and empirical issues. In Behzadi, Lale et al. (eds), Bamberger Orientstudien, pp. 13–35. Bamberg: Bamberg University Press.Google Scholar

Haig, Geoffrey, 2014b. Verb-goal (VG) word order in Kurdish and Neo-Aramaic: Typological and areal considerations. In Khan, Geoffrey and Napiorkowska, Lidia (eds), Neo-Aramaic and its Linguistic Context, pp. 407–425. New York: Gorgias Press.Google Scholar

Haig, Geoffrey and Öpengin, Ergin, 2014. Kurdish: A critical research overview. Kurdish Studies 2 (2): 99–122.Google Scholar

Haig, Geoffrey and Thiele, Hannah, 2014. Post-predicate goals in Northern Kurdish and neighbouring languages: A pilot study in quantitative areal linguistics. Paper held at the Second International Conference on Variation and Change in Kurdish, Mardin Artuklu University, 8–9 October 2014.Google Scholar

Hawkins, J. A., 2008. An asymmetry between VO and OV languages: The ordering of obliques. In Corbett, Greville and Noonan, Michael (eds), Case and Grammatical Relations: Essays in Honour of Bernard Comrie, pp. 167–190. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Herin, Bruno, 2012. The Domari language of Aleppo (Syria). Linguistic Discovery 10: 1–52.Google Scholar

Holes, Clive, 1992. Colloquial Arabic of the Gulf and Saudi Arabia. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Jastrow, Otto, 1980. Das mesopotamische Arabische. In Fischer, Wolfdietrich and Jastrow, Otto (eds), Handbuch der Arabischen Dialekte, pp. 140–154. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Jastrow, Otto, 1988. Der Neuaramäische Dialekt von Hertevin (Provinz Siirt). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Jastrow, Otto, 1992. Lehrbuch der Ṭuroyo-Sprache. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Kahn, Margaret, 1976. Borrowing and Regional Variation in a Phonological Description of Kurdish. Ann Arbor, MI: Phonetics Laboratory of the University of Michigan.Google Scholar

Kapeliuk, Olga, 2011. Language contact between Aramaic dialects and Iranian. In Weninger, Stefan (ed.), The Semitic Languages: An International Handbook, pp. 738–747. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Khan, Geoffrey, 2004. The Jewish Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Sulemaniyya and Ḥalabja. Brill: Leiden.Google Scholar

Khan, Geoffrey, 2008a. Arabic Documents from Early Islamic Khurasan. London: Nour Foundation.Google Scholar

Khan, Geoffrey, 2008b. The Jewish Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Urmi. Piscataway, NJ: Gorgias Press.Google Scholar

Khan, Geoffrey, 2008c. The Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Barwar, vol. 1: Grammar. Brill: Leiden.Google Scholar

Kıral, Filiz, 2001. Das gesprochene Aserbaidschanisch von Iran: Eine Studie zu den syntaktischen Einflüssen des Persischen. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Koptjevskaja-Tamm, Maria and Wälchli, Bernhard, 2001. The Circum-Baltic languages: An areal-typological approach. In Dahl, Östen and Koptjevskaja-Tamm, Maria (eds), Circum-Baltic Languages: Typology and Contact, pp. 615–750. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Lacroix, René, 2009. Description du Dialecte Laze d’Arhavi (Caucasique du Sud, Turquie): Grammaire et Textes. Unpublished PhD thesis, Université Lumière Lyon 2.Google Scholar

Lewendî, Mahmûd, 1997. Kurdên Şêxbizinî [The Şêxbizinî Kurds]. Bîrnebûn 3: 78–98.Google Scholar

MacKenzie, David, 1961. Kurdish Dialect Studies, vol. 1. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

MacKenzie, David, 1962. Kurdish Dialect Studies, vol. II. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Matras, Yaron, 2007. The borrowability of structural categories. In Matras, Yaron and Sakel, Jeanette (eds), Grammatical Borrowing in Cross-Linguistic Perspective, pp. 31–73. Berlin: Mouton.CrossRef Google Scholar

Matras, Yaron, 2009. Language Contact. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Matras, Yaron, 2010. Contact, convergence, and typology. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Contact Linguistics, pp. 66–85. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Matras, Yaron, 2012. A Grammar of Domari. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Menz, Astrid, 2010. Klusile und Affikaten im Anlaut armenischer Globalkopien im Dialektmaterial von Erzurum. In Boeschoten, Hendrik and Rentzsch, Julian (eds), Turcology in Mainz, pp. 173–190. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

Noorlander, Paul, 2014. Diversity in convergence: Kurdish and Aramaic variation entangled. Journal of Kurdish Studies 2 (2): 201–224.CrossRef Google Scholar

Öpengin, Ergin, 2012. Sociolinguistic situation of Kurdish in Turkey: Sociopolitical factors and language use patterns. International Journal of the Sociology of Language 217: 151–180.Google Scholar

Öpengin, Ergin, 2013. Clitic/Affix Interactions: A Corpus-Based Study of Person Marking in the Mukri Variety of Central Kurdish. Unpublished PhD thesis. Paris Sorbonne/University of Bamberg.Google Scholar

Öpengin, Ergin and Haig, Geoffrey, 2014. Variation in Kurmanji. A preliminary classification of dialects. Journal of Kurdish Studies 2 (2): 143–176.Google Scholar

Paul, Ludwig, 1998. Zazaki: Grammatik und Versuch einer Dialektologie. Wiesbaden: Reichert.Google Scholar

Skutnabb-Kangas, Tove and Bucak, Sertaç, 1995. Killing a mother tongue: How the Kurds are deprived of linguistic human rights. In Skutnabb-Kangas, Tove and Phillipson, Robert (eds), Linguistic Human Rights: Overcoming Linguistic Discrimination, pp. 347–370. Berlin: Mouton.Google Scholar

Stilo, Donald, 2005. Iranian as buffer zone between the universal typologies of Turkic and Semitic. In Csató, Éva Ágnes, Isaksson, Bo and Jahani, Carina (eds), Linguistic Convergence and Areal Diffusion: Case Studies from Iranian, Semitic and Turkic, pp. 35–63. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Stilo, Donald, 2012. Intersection zones, overlapping isoglosses, and ‘Fade- out/Fade-in’ phenomena in Central Iran. In Aghaei, Behrad and Ghanoonparvar, M. R. (eds), Iranian Languages and Culture: Essays in Honor of Gernot Ludwig Windfuhr, pp. 3–33. Costa Mesa: Mazda Publishers.Google Scholar

Talay, Shabo, 2006/2007. The influence of Turkish, Kurdish and other neighbouring languages on Anatolian Arabic. In Romano-Arabica VI-VII (2006–2007), pp. 179–188. University of Bucharest, Center for Arab Studies.Google Scholar

Talay, Shabo, 2008. Die Neuaramäischen Dialekte der Khabur-Assyrer in Nordostsyrien: Einführung, Phonologie und Morphologie. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Talay, Shabo, 2011. Arabic dialects of Mesopotamia. In Weninger, Stefan (ed.), The Semitic Languages: An International Handbook, pp. 909–920. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Vaux, Bert, 2007. Homshetsma: The language of the Armenians of Hamshen. In Simonian, Hoann (ed.), The Hemshin, pp. 255–278. New York: Routledge.Google Scholar

Zeldes, Amir, 2013. Is Modern Hebrew Standard Average European? The view from European. Linguistic Typology 17 (3): 439–470.Google Scholar

Ansaldo, Umberto, 2004. The correlation between exceed comparatives and verby languages. In Proceedings of the 11th Conference of the South East Asian Linguistic Society. Program for Southeast Asian Studies, Arizona State University.Google Scholar

Boretzky, Norbert, 1983. Kreolsprachen, Substrate und Sprachwandel. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Bostoen, Koen and Sands, Bonny, 2012. Clicks in south-western Bantu languages: Contact-induced vs. language-internal lexical change. In Brenzinger, Matthias and Fehn, Anne-Maria (eds), Proceedings of the 6th World Congress of African Linguistics, WOCAL6, Cologne, pp. 129–140. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Breu, Walter, 2003. Der indefinite Artikel in slavischen Mikrosprachen: Grammatikalisierung im totalen Sprachkontakt. In Kuße, Holger (ed.), Slavistische Linguistik 2001, pp. 27–68. Munich: Sagner.Google Scholar

Breu, Walter, 2004. Der definite Artikel in der obersorbischen Umgangssprache. In Krause, Marion and Sappok, Christian (eds), Slavistische Linguistik 2002, pp. 9–57. Munich: Sagner.Google Scholar

Bybee, Joan L., Perkins, Revere D. and Pagliuca, William, 1994. The Evolution of Grammar: Tense, Aspect, and Modality in the Languages of the World. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

Claudi, Ulrike, 1993. Die Stellung von Verb und Objekt in Niger-Kongo-Sprachen: Ein Beitrag zur Rekonstruktion historischer Syntax. Afrikanistische Monographien, vol. 1. Cologne: Institut für Afrikanistik, Universität zu Köln.Google Scholar

Clements, G. N. and Rialland, Annie, 2008. Africa as a phonological area. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 36–85.Google Scholar

Crass, Joachim and Meyer, Ronny, 2008. Ethiopia. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 228–250.Google Scholar

Creissels, Denis, Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., Frajzyngier, Zygmunt and König, Christa, 2008. Africa as a morphosyntactic area. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 86–150.Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S., 2011. Noun-modifier order in Africa. In Hieda, , König, and Nakagawa, (eds), pp. 287–311.Google Scholar

Evans, N. R. D. and Wilkins, D. P., 2000. In the mind’s ear: The semantic extensions of perception verbs in Australian languages. Language 76 (3): 546–592.Google Scholar

Ferguson, Charles, 1970. The Ethiopian Language Area. The Journal of Ethiopian Studies 8 (2): 67–80.Google Scholar

Ferguson, Charles A., 1976. The Ethiopian language area. In Bender, Marvin L., Bowen, J. D., Cooper, R. L. and Ferguson, Charles A. (eds), Language in Ethiopia, pp. 63–76. London: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Gilman, Charles, 1986. African areal characteristics: Sprachbund, not substrate? Journal of Pidgin and Creole Languages 1 (1): 33–50.Google Scholar

Greenberg, Joseph H., 1959. Africa as a linguistic area. In Bascom, W. R. and Herskovits, M. J. (eds), Continuity and Change in African Cultures, pp. 15–27. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

Greenberg, Joseph H., 1963. The Languages of Africa. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar

Greenberg, Joseph H., 1983. Some areal characteristics of African languages. In Dihoff, Ivan R. (ed.), Current Approaches to African Linguistics, vol. 1, pp. 3–21. Dordrecht: Foris.Google Scholar

Gregersen, Edgar A., 1977. Language in Africa: An Introductory Survey. New York, Paris and London: Gordon and Breach.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 1998. The Kalahari Basin as an object of areal typology: A first approach. In Schladt, Mathias (ed.), Language, Identity, and Conceptualization among the Khoisan, pp. 137–196. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2008. The Macro-Sudan Belt. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 151–185.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd, 1975. The study of word order in African languages. In Herbert, R. K. (ed.), Proceedings of the Sixth Conference on African Linguistics, Ohio State University, Columbus, April 12–13, 1975, pp. 161–183. Columbus, OH: The Ohio State University.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd, 1976. A Typology of African Languages, Based on the Order of Meaningful Elements. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd, 1994. Areal influence on grammaticalization. In Pütz, Martin (ed.), Language Contact and Language Conflict, pp. 56–68. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd, 1997. Cognitive Foundations of Grammar. Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd, 2011. Areas of grammaticalization and geographical typology. In Hieda, , König, and Nakagawa, (eds), pp. 41–66.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd, Claudi, Ulrike and Hünnemeyer, Friederike, 1991. Grammaticalization: A Conceptual Framework. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd and König, Christa, 2015. The ǃXun Language: A Dialect Grammar. Quellen zur Khoisan-Forschung. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd and Kuteva, Tania, 2002. World Lexicon of Grammaticalization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd and Kuteva, Tania, 2005. Language Contact and Grammatical Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd and Leyew, Zelealem, 2008. Is Africa a linguistic area? In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 15–35.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd and Nurse, Derek (eds), 2008. A Linguistic Geography of Africa. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2010. Language contact: Reassessment and reconsideration. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 1–28. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2012. Internally and externally motivated language change. In Hernández-Campoy, Juan Manuel and Conde-Silvestre, Juan Camilo (eds), The Handbook of Historical Sociolinguistics, pp. 401–421. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar

Hieda, Osamu, König, Christa and Nakagawa, Hirosi (eds), 2011. Geographical Typology and Linguistic Areas, With Special Reference to Africa. Tokyo University of Foreign Studies (TUFS), Studies in Linguistics. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Hopper, Paul J. and Traugott, Elizabeth C., 2003. Grammaticalization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Kießling, Roland, Mous, Maarten and Nurse, Derek, 2008. The Tanzanian Rift Valley area. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 186–227.Google Scholar

Kilian-Hatz, Christa, 2001. Ideophone: Eine typologische Untersuchung unter besonderer Berücksichtigung afrikanischer Sprachen. Habilitationsschrift, University of Cologne.Google Scholar

König, Christa, 2006. Case in Africa. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

König, Christa, 2008. The marked-nominative languages of Eastern Africa. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 251–271.Google Scholar

Kuteva, Tania, 1998. Large linguistic areas in grammaticalization: Auxiliation in Europe. Language Sciences 20 (3): 289–311.Google Scholar

Kuteva, Tania, 2000. Areal grammaticalization: The case of the Bantu–Nilotic borderland. Folia Linguistica 34 (3–4): 267–283.Google Scholar

Larochette, J., 1959. Overeenkomst tussen Mangbetu, Zande, en Bantu-talen. In Handelingen van het XXIIIe Vlaams Filologencongres, Brussels, pp. 247–248.Google Scholar

Leyew, Zelealem and Heine, Bernd, 2003. Comparative constructions in Africa: An areal dimension. Annual Publication in African Linguistics (APAL) 1: 47–68.Google Scholar

Lichtenberk, Frantisek, 1991. Semantic change and heterosemy in grammaticalization. Language 67 (3): 475–509.Google Scholar

Maddieson, Ian, 2003. The sounds of the Bantu languages. In Nurse, Derek and Philippson, Gérard (eds), The Bantu Languages. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar

Meeussen, A. E., 1975. Possible Linguistic Africanisms (Fifth Hans Wolff Memorial Lecture). Language Sciences, vol. 35. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University.Google Scholar

Moravcsik, Edith, 2003. A semantic analysis of associative plurals. Studies in Language 27 (3): 469–503.Google Scholar

Muysken, Pieter (ed.), 2008. Introduction: Conceptual and methodological issues in areal linguistics. In Muysken, Pieter (ed.), From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics, pp. 1–23. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Singer, Ruth, 1999. The inclusory construction in Australian languages. Melbourne Papers in Linguistics and Applied Linguistics 18: 81–96.Google Scholar

Stolz, Christel and Stolz, Thomas, 2001. Mesoamerica as a linguistic area. In Haspelmath, Martin, König, Ekkehard, Oesterreicher, Wulf and Raible, Wolfgang (eds), Language Typology and Language Universals: An International Handbook, vol. 2, pp. 1542–1553. Handbücher zur Sprach- und Kommunikationswissenschaft, vol. 20.2. New York: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Stolz, Thomas, 2002. No sprachbund beyond this line! On the age-old discussion of how to define a linguistic area. In Ramat, Paolo and Stolz, Thomas (eds), Mediterranean Languages: Papers from the MEDTYP Workshop, Tirrenia, June 2000, pp. 259–281. Bochum: Brockmeyer.Google Scholar

Thomason, Sarah Grey, 2001. Language Contact: An Introduction. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar

Thomason, Sarah Grey, 2003. Contact as a source of language change. In Joseph, Brian D. and Janda, Richard D. (eds), The Handbook of Historical Linguistics, pp. 687–712. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Tosco, Mauro, 1991. A Grammatical Sketch of Dahalo. Cushitic Language Studies, vol. 8. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Tosco, Mauro, 2000. Is there an ‘Ethiopian language area’? Anthropological Linguistics 42 (3): 329–365.Google Scholar

Traill, Anthony, 1994. A ǃXóõ Dictionary. Quellen zur Khoisan-Forschung, vol. 9. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Traugott, Elizabeth C. and Heine, Bernd (eds), 1991. Approaches to Grammaticalization, vol. 1. Typological Studies in Language, vol. 19.1. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Voeltz, F. K. Erhard and Kilian-Hatz, Christa (eds), 2001. Ideophones. Typological Studies in Language, vol. 44. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Weinreich, Uriel, 1953. Languages in Contact: Findings and Problems. New York: Linguistic Circle of New York. Reprinted 1963, The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar

Welmers, William E., 1973. African Language Structures. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Welmers, William E., 1977. The Major Indigenous Languages of Africa. Berkeley: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Westermann, Diedrich, 1911. Die Sudansprachen. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen.Google Scholar

Amha, Azeb, 2001. Ideophones and compound verbs in Wolaitta. In Voeltz, F. K. Erhard and Kilian-Hatz, Christa (eds), Ideophones, pp. 49–62. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Amha, Azeb and Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2006. Converbs from an African perspective. In Ameka, Felix, Dench, Alan and Evans, Nick, Catching Language: Issues in Grammar Writing, pp. 393–440. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Andersen, Torben, 1984. Aspect and word order in Moru. Journal of African Languages and Linguistics 6: 19–34.Google Scholar

Andersen, Torben, 1995. Absolutive and Nominative in Berta. In Nicolaï, Robert and Rottland, Franz (eds), Proceedings of the Fifth Nilo-Saharan Linguistics Colloquium, pp. 36–49. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar

Becker, E., 2011. The Prehistoric Inhabitants of the Wadi Howar: An Anthropological Study of Human Skeletal Remains from the Sudanese Part of the Eastern Sahara. Doctoral Dissertation, Johannes-Gutenberg-Universität, Mainz.Google Scholar

Bender, Marvin Lionel, 1996. Kunama. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar

Bickel, Balthasar, 2007. Typology in the twenty-first century: Major current developments. Linguistic Typology 11: 239–251.Google Scholar

Blackings, Mairi and Fabb, Nigel, 2003. A Grammar of Ma’di. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Boyd, Raymond, 1989. Adamawa-Ubangi. In Bendor-Samuel, John (ed.), The Niger-Congo Languages, pp. 178–215. Lanham: University Press of America.Google Scholar

Boyeldieu, Pascal, 1995. Le yakoma. In Boyd, Raymond (ed.), Le système verbal dans les langues oubangiennes, pp. 113–139. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar

Boyeldieu, Pascal, 2013. Case alignment(s) in Sinyar. Paper presented at the 11th Nilo-Saharan Linguistics Colloquium, University of Cologne.Google Scholar

Boyeldieu, Pascal and Nougayrol, Pierre, 2008. Les langues soudaniques centrales: Essai d’évaluation. In Ibriszimow, Dymitr (ed.), Problems of Linguistic-Historical Reconstruction in Africa, pp. 9–29. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar

Cloarec-Heiss, France, 1986. Dynamique et équilibre d’une syntaxe: le banda-linda de Centrafrique. Paris and Cambridge: Peeters-SELAF and Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Corbett, Greville G., 2000. Number. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Cyffer, Norbert, 2002. The Lake Chad: A new Sprachbund boundary? In Nicolai, Robert and Zima, Peter (eds), Lexical and Structural Diffusion, pp. 27–43. Corpus, Les Cahiers 1.Google Scholar

Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2001. Language shift and morphological convergence in the Nilotic area. Sprache und Geschichte in Afrika 16/17: 83–124.Google Scholar

Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2005. Head marking, dependent marking and constituent order in the Nilotic area. In Voeltz, F. K. Erhard (ed.), Studies in African Linguistic Typology, pp. 71–92. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2007. Eastern Sudanic and the Wadi Howar and Wadi El Milk diaspora. Sprache und Geschichte in Afrika 18: 37–67.Google Scholar

Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2008. Africa’s verb-final languages. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 271–307.Google Scholar

Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2010a. Differential Object Marking in Nilo-Saharan. Journal of African Languages and Linguistics 31: 13–46.Google Scholar

Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2010b. On the origin of ergativity in Tima. In Floricic, Franck (ed.), Essais de typologie et de linguistique générale: Mélanges offerts à Denis Creissels, pp. 233–239. Paris: Presses Universitaires de l’École Normale Supérieure.Google Scholar

Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2011. Historical Linguistics and the Comparative Study of African Languages. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2014a. Nilo-Saharan. In Lieber, Rochelle and Štekauer, Pavol (eds), The Oxford Handbook of Derivational Morphology, pp. 591–608. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2014b. Marked nominative systems in Eastern Sudanic and their historical origin. Afrikanistik Online 11.Google Scholar

Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2015. The Leopard’s Spots: Essays on Language, Cognition and Culture. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., in press. Nilo-Saharan. In Vossen, Rainer and Dimmendaal, Gerrit J. (eds), The Handbook of African Languages. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Dixon, R. M. W., 2002. Australian Languages: Their Nature and Development. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Ehret, Christopher, 2001. A Historical-Comparative Reconstruction of Nilo-Saharan. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar

Fabb, Mairi and Fabb, Nigel, 2003. A Grammar of Ma’di. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Ferguson, Charles A., 1970. The Ethiopian language area. Journal of Ethiopian Studies 8 (2): 67–80.Google Scholar

Greenberg, Joseph H., 1955. Studies in African Linguistic Classification. New Haven, CT: Compass Publishing Co.Google Scholar

Greenberg, Joseph H., 1963. The Languages of Africa. Bloomington and The Hague: Indiana University Press, Research Center in Anthropology, Folklore and Linguistics and Mouton.Google Scholar

Greenberg, Joseph H., 1966. Some universals of grammar with particular reference to the order of meaningful elements. In Greenberg, Joseph H. (ed.), Universals of Language, pp. 73–113. Cambridge MA: The MIT Press.Google Scholar

Gulfan, Gumma Ibrahim, 2013. Converbs in Taglennaa (Kordofan Nubian). In Schadeberg, Thilo C. and Blench, Roger (eds), Nuba Mountain Language Studies, pp. 371–379. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar

Hayward, Richard J., 1991. À propos patterns of lexicalization in the Ethiopian language area. In Claudi, Ulrike and Mendel, Daniela (eds), Ägypten im afro-orientalischen Kontext, pp. 139–156. Special issue of Afrikanistische Arbeitspapiere (AAP).Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd, 1976. A Typology of African Languages Based on the Order of Meaningful Elements. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd and Leyew, Zelealem, 2003. Comparative constructions in Africa: An areal dimension. Annual Publications in African Linguistics 1: 47–68.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd and Nurse, Derek (eds), 2008. A Linguistic Geography of Africa. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Houis, Maurice, 1970. Réflexion sur une double corrélation typologique. The Journal of West African Languages 7 (2): 59–68.Google Scholar

Hutchison, John, 1981. The Kanuri Language: A Reference Grammar. Madison: African Studies Program.Google Scholar

Jakobi, Angelika and Crass, Joachim, 2004. Grammaire du beria (langue saharienne). Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar

Kießling, Roland, Mous, Maarten and Nurse, Derek, 2008. The Tanzanian Rift Valley area. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 186–227.Google Scholar

König, Christa, 2008. Case in Africa. Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Kutsch Lojenga, Constance, 1994. Ngiti: A Central Sudanic Language of Zaire. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar

Leslau, Wolf, 1945. The influence of Cushitic on the Semitic languages of Ethiopia: A problem of substratum. Word 1: 59–82.Google Scholar

Miller, Cynthia L. and Gilley, Leoma G., 2007. Evidence for ergativity in Shilluk. Journal of African Languages and Linguistics 22: 33–68.Google Scholar

Moñino, Yves, 2012. Is [the] Ubangian branch a family among Niger-Congo languages? Paper presented at the Niger-Congo International Congress. Paris, 18–21 September 2012.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Language Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

Nurse, Derek, 2008. Tense and Aspect in Bantu. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Rapold, Christian H., 2008. Medial verbs in Benchnon. In Ebert, Karen H., Mattissen, Johanna and Suter, Rafael (eds), From Siberia to Ethiopia: Converbs from a Cross-linguistic Perspective, pp. 155–183. Zürich: Seminar für Allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft, Universität Zürich.Google Scholar

Rilly, Claude, 2007. La langue du royaume de Méroé: Un panorama de la plus ancienne culture écrite d’Afrique subsaharienne. Paris: Champion.Google Scholar

Santandrea, Stefano, 1970. Brief Grammar Outlines of the Yulu and Kara Languages. Bologna: Nigrizia.Google Scholar

Schrock, Terrill B., 2013. A Grammar of Ik (Icé-tód), Northeast Uganda’s Last Thriving Kuliak Language. Utrecht: LOT.Google Scholar

Storch, Anne, 2005. Dynamics of interacting populations: Language contact in the Lwoo languages of Bahr el-Ghazal. Studies in African Linguistics 32 (1): 65–93.Google Scholar

Thomason, Sarah Grey and Kaufman, Terrence, 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Tosco, Mauro, 2000. Is there an Ethiopian language area? Anthropological Linguistics 42 (3): 329–365.Google Scholar

Tucker, A. N., 1967. The Eastern Sudanic Languages 1. London: Dawsons.Google Scholar

Tucker, A. N. and Bryan, Margaret A., 1966. Linguistic Analyses: The Non-Bantu Languages of North-Eastern Africa. London: Oxford University Press for the International African Institute.Google Scholar

Abdulaziz, Mohamed H. and Osinde, Ken, 1997. Sheng and Engsh: Development of mixed codes among the urban youth in Kenya. International Journal of the Sociology of Language 125: 43–63.Google Scholar

Arnott, D. W., 1970. The Nominal and Verbal Systems of Fula. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Atindogbé, Gratien G., Storch, Anne and Blench, Roger M., 2011. Introduction. In Storch, Anne, Atindogbé, Gratien G. and Blench, Roger M. (eds), Copy Pronouns: Case Studies from African Languages. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar

Bastin, Yvonne, 2003. The interlacustrine zone (zone J). In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 501–528.Google Scholar

Bendor-Samuel, John (ed.), 1989. The Niger-Congo Languages: A Classification and Description of Africa’s Largest Language Family. Lanham, MD: University Press of America.Google Scholar

Bird, Charles S., 1970. The development of Mandekan (Manding): A study of the role of extra-linguistic factors in linguistic change. In Dalby, David (ed.), Language and History in Africa, pp. 146–159. New York: Africana Publishing Company.Google Scholar

Bostoen, Koen and Sands, Bonny, 2012. Clicks in south-western Bantu languages: Contact-induced vs. language-internal lexical change. In Brenzinger, Matthias and Fehn, Anne-Maria (eds), Proceedings of the 6th World Congress of African Linguistics (WOCAL 6), pp. 121–132. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar

Breedveld, J. O., 1995. Form and Meaning in Fulfulde: A Morphophonological Study of Maasinankoore. Leiden: Research School CNWS.Google Scholar

Bucholtz, Mary, 1999. ‘Why be normal?’ Language and identity practices in a community of nerd girls. Language in Society 28: 203–223.Google Scholar

Childs, G. Tucker, 1997. The status of Isicamtho, an Nguni-based urban variety of Soweto. In Spears, Arthur K. and Winford, Donald (eds), The Structure and Status of Pidgins and Creoles, pp. 341–367. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Childs, G. Tucker, 2003. An Introduction to African Languages. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Childs, G. Tucker, 2010a. Language contact in Africa: A selected review. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 695–713. Chichester, UK: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar

Childs, G. Tucker, 2010b. The Mande and Atlantic groups of Niger-Congo: Prolonged contact with asymmetrical consequences. Journal of Language Contact, Thema 3: 15–46.Google Scholar

Clements, George N. and Rialland, Annie, 2008. Africa as a phonological area. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 36–85.Google Scholar

Corbett, Greville G., 2013. Number of genders. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar

Creissels, Denis, 2006. S-O-V-X constituent order and constituent order alternations in West African languages. In Cover, Rebecca T. and Kim, Yuni (eds), Proceedings of the Thirty-First Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, pp. 37–51. Berkeley, CA: Berkeley Linguistics Society.Google Scholar

Creissels, Denis, Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., Frajzyngier, Zygmunt and König, Christa, 2008. Africa as a morphosyntactic area. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 86–150.Google Scholar

Cysouw, Michael and Comrie, Bernard, 2009. How varied typologically are the languages of Africa?. In Botha, Rudolf and Knight, Chris (eds), The Cradle of Language, pp. 189–203. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Dalby, David, 1970. Reflections on the classification of African languages: With special reference to the work of Sigismund Wilhelm Koelle and Malcolm Guthrie. African Language Studies 11: 147–171.Google Scholar

Di Carlo, Pierpaolo and Good, Jeff, 2014. What are we trying to preserve? Diversity, change, and ideology at the edge of the Cameroonian Grassfields. In Austin, Peter K. and Sallabank, Julia (eds), Endangered Languages: Beliefs and Ideologies in Language Documentation and Revitalization, pp. 229–262. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Diamond, Jared, 1997. Guns, Germs, and Steel. London: Vintage.Google Scholar

Diamond, Jared and Bellwood, Peter, 2003. Farmers and their languages: The first expansions. Science 300: 597–603.Google Scholar

Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2001a. Areal diffusion versus genetic inheritance: An African perspective. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 359–392. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2001b. Language shift and morphological convergence in the Nilotic area. In Nurse, Derek (ed.), Historical Language Contact in Africa, pp. 83–124. Sprache und Geschichte in Afrika, vol. 16/17. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar

Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2008. Language ecology and linguistic diversity on the African continent. Language and Linguistics Compass 2: 840–858.Google Scholar

Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2011. Historical Linguistics and the Comparative Study of African Languages. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Dombrowsky-Hahn, Klaudia, 1999. Phénomènes de contact entre les langues minyanka et bambara (sud du Mali). Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S., 2009. Verb-object-negative order in central Africa. In Cyffer, Norbert, Ebermann, Erwin and Ziegelmeyer, Georg (eds), Negation Patterns in West African Languages and Beyond, pp. 307–362. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S., 2013a. Order of genitive and noun. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S., 2013b. Order of subject, object and verb. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S. and Haspelmath, Martin (eds), 2013c. The World Atlas of Language Structures Online. Munich: Max Planck Digital Library.Google Scholar

Eckert, Penelope, 2000. Linguistic Variation as Social Practice: The Linguistic Construction of Identity in Belten High. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Foley, William A., 2005. Personhood and linguistic identity, purism and variation. In Austin, Peter K. (ed.), Language Documentation and Description, vol. 3, pp. 157–180. London: Hans Rausing Endangered Languages Project.Google Scholar

Gensler, Orin D., 1994. On reconstructing the syntagm S-Aux-O-V-Other to Proto-Niger-Congo. In Moore, Kevin E., Peterson, David A. and Wentum, Comfort (eds), Proceedings of the Twentieth Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, Special Session on Historical Issues in African Linguistics, pp. 1–20. Berkeley, CA: Berkeley Linguistics Society.Google Scholar

Gensler, Orin D., 1997. Grammaticalization, typology, and Niger-Congo word order: Progress on a still-unsolved problem. Journal of African Languages and Linguistics 18: 57–93.Google Scholar

Gerhardt, Ludwig, 1983. Lexical interferences in the Chadic/Benue-Congo border-area. In Wolff, Ekkehard and Meyer-Bahlberg, Hilke (eds), Studies in Chadic and Afroasiatic Linguistics, pp. 301–310. Hamburg: Helmut Buske.Google Scholar

Good, Jeff, 2012. How to become a ‘Kwa’ noun. Morphology 22: 293–335.Google Scholar

Good, Jeff, 2013. A (micro-)accretion zone in a remnant zone? Lower Fungom in areal-historical perspective. In Bickel, Balthasar, Grenoble, Lenore A., Peterson, David A. and Timberlake, Alan (eds), Language Typology and Historical Contingency: In Honor of Johanna Nichols, pp. 265–282. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Greenberg, Joseph H., 1949. Studies in African linguistic classification III: The position of Bantu. Southwestern Journal of Anthropology 5: 309–317.Google Scholar

Greenberg, Joseph H., 1978. Diachrony, synchrony, and language universals. In Greenberg, Joseph H. (ed.), Universals of Human Language, pp. 61–91. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.Google Scholar

Greenberg, Joseph H., 1983. Some areal characteristics of African languages. In Dihoff, Ivan R. (ed.), Current Approaches to African Linguistics, vol. 1, pp. 3–21. Dordrecht: Foris.Google Scholar

Greenberg, Joseph H., 1995. The diachronic typological approach to language. In Shibatani, Masayoshi and Bynon, Theodora (eds), Approaches to Language Typology, pp. 145–166. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Grégoire, Claire, 2003. The Bantu languages of the forest. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 349–370.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 1999a. The genesis of verbal negation in Bantu and its dependency on functional features of clause types. In Hombert, Jean-Marie and Hyman, Larry M. (eds), Bantu Historical Linguistics: Theoretical and Empirical Perspectives, pp. 545–587. Stanford, CA: CSLI.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 1999b. Head-initial meets head-final: Nominal suffixes in eastern and southern Bantu from a historical perspective. Studies in African Linguistics 28: 49–91.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2003. Logophoricity in Africa: An attempt to explain and evaluate the significance of its modern distribution. Sprachtypologie und Universalienforschung 56: 366–387.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2007. Preverbal objects and information structure in Benue-Congo. In Aboh, Enoch O., Harmann, Katharina and Zimmerman, Malte (eds), Focus Strategies in African Languages: The Interaction of Focus and Grammar in Niger-Congo and Afro-Asiatic, pp. 83–112. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2008. The Macro-Sudan Belt: Towards identifying a linguistic area in northern Sub-Saharan Africa. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 151–185.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2010. Sprachraum and geography: Linguistic macro-areas in Africa. In Lameli, Alfred, Kehrein, Roland and Rabanus, Stefan (eds), Language and Space: An International Handbook of Linguistic Variation, vol. 2: Language Mapping, pp. 561–585. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2011. Proto-Bantu and Proto-Niger-Congo: Macro-areal typology and linguistic reconstruction. In Hieda, Osamu, König, Christa and Nakagawa, Hirosi (eds), Geographical Typology and Linguistic Areas: With Special Reference to Africa, pp. 109–141. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom and Stoneking, Mark, 2008. A historical appraisal of clicks: A linguistic and genetic population perspective. Annual Review of Anthropology 37: 93–109.Google Scholar

Hajek, John, 2013. Vowel nasalization. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar

Harries, Lyndon, 1958. Ku̦mu: A sub-Bantu language. Kongo-Overzee 265–296.Google Scholar

Heath, Jeffrey, 2008. A Grammar of Jamsay. Berlin: Mouton.Google Scholar

Heggarty, Paul, Maguire, Warren and McMahon, April, 2010. Splits or waves? Trees or webs? How divergence measures and network analysis can unravel language histories. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society B: Biological Sciences 365: 3829–3843.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd, 1968. Die Verbreitung und Gliederung der Togorestsprachen. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd, 1975. Language typology and convergence areas in Africa. Linguistics 144: 27–47.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd, 1976. A Typology of African Languages: Based on the Order of Meaningful Elements. Berlin: D. Riemer.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd, 1980. Methods in comparative Bantu linguistics (the problem of Bantu linguistic classification). In Bouquiaux, Luc (ed.), L’Expansion Bantoue: Actes du colloque international du CNRS, Viviers (France) 4–16 avril 1977, vol. II, pp. 295–308. Paris: SELAF.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd and Kuteva, Tania, 2005. Language Contact and Grammatical Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd and Leyew, Zelealem, 2008. Is Africa a linguistic area? In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 15–35.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd and Nurse, Derek (eds), 2008. A Linguistic Geography of Africa, pp. 151–185. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Herbert, Robert K., 1990. The sociohistory of clicks in southern Bantu. Anthropological Linguistics 3/4: 295–315.Google Scholar

Holden, Clare J. and Gray, Russell D., 2006. Rapid radiation, borrowing and dialect continua in the Bantu languages. In Forster, Peter and Renfrew, Colin (eds), Phylogenetic Methods and the Prehistory of Languages, pp. 19–31. Cambridge: McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research.Google Scholar

Hyman, Larry M., 2004. How to become a ‘Kwa’ verb. Journal of West African Languages 30: 69–88.Google Scholar

Hyman, Larry M., 2007a. Niger-Congo verb extensions: Overview and discussion. In Payne, Doris L. and Peña, Jaime (eds), Selected Proceedings of the 37th Annual Conference on African Linguistics, pp. 149–163. Somerville, MA: Cascadilla.Google Scholar

Hyman, Larry M., 2007b. Reconstructing the Proto-Bantu verbal unit: Internal evidence. In Kula, Nancy C. and Marten, Lutz (eds), SOAS Working Papers in Linguistics, vol. 15, pp. 201–211. London: SOAS.Google Scholar

Hyman, Larry M., 2011. The Macro-Sudan Belt and Niger-Congo reconstruction. Language Dynamics and Change 1: 3–49.Google Scholar

Hymes, Dell H., 1968. Linguistic problems in defining the concept of ‘tribe’. In Helm, June (ed.), Essays on the Problem of Tribe: Proceedings of the 1967 Annual Spring Meeting of the American Ethnological Society, pp. 65–90. Seattle: University of Washington Press.Google Scholar

Hymes, Dell H., 1972. Linguistic aspects of comparative political research. In Holt, Robert T. and Turner, John E. (eds), The Methodology of Comparative Research, pp. 295–341. New York: Free Press.Google Scholar

Irvine, Judith T., 1978. Wolof noun classification: The social setting of divergent change. Language in Society 7: 37–64.Google Scholar

Irvine, Judith T. and Gal, Susan, 2000. Language ideology and linguistic differentiation. In Kroskrity, Paul V. (ed.), Regimes of Language: Ideologies, Polities, and Identities, pp. 35–83. Santa Fe, NM: School of American Research Press.Google Scholar

Katamba, Francis, 2003. Bantu nominal morphology. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 103–120.Google Scholar

Kießling, Roland and Mous, Maarten, 2004. Urban youth languages in Africa. Anthropological Linguistics 46: 303–341.Google Scholar

König, Christa, 2008. Case in Africa. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Kopytoff, Igor, 1987. The internal African frontier: The making of African political culture. In Kopytoff, Igor (ed.), The African Frontier: The Reproduction of Traditional African Societies, pp. 3–84. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar

Kropp Dakubu, M. E., 1997. Korle Meets the Sea: A Sociolinguistic History of Accra. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Louw, J. A., 1986. Some linguistic influence of Khoi and San in the prehistory of the Nguni. In Vossen, Rainer and Keuthmann, Klaus (eds), Contemporary Studies on Khoisan: In Honour of Oswin Köhler on the Occasion of his 75th Birthday, pp. 141–168. Hamburg: Helmut Buske.Google Scholar

Louw, J. A., 2013. The impact of Khoesan on Southern Bantu. In Vossen, Rainer (ed.), The Khoesan Languages, pp. 435–444. Abingdon, UK: Routledge.Google Scholar

Lüpke, Friederike and Storch, Anne, 2013. Repertoires and Choices in African Languages. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Maddieson, Ian, 2013a. Glottalized consonants. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar

Maddieson, Ian, 2013b. Presence of uncommon consonants. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar

Maddieson, Ian, 2013c. Tone. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar

Maho, Jouni, 1999. A Comparative Study of Bantu Noun Classes. Göteburg: Acta Universitatis Gothoburgensis.Google Scholar

Mazrui, Alamin M., 1995. Slang and code-switching: The case of Sheng in Kenya. Afrikanistische Arbeitspapiere 42: 168–179.Google Scholar

Mc Laughlin, Fiona, 2008. The ascent of Wolof as an urban vernacular and national lingua franca in Senegal. In Vigouroux, Cécile B. and Mufwene, Salikoko S. (eds), Globalization and Language Vitality: Perspectives from Africa, pp. 142–170. London: Continuum.Google Scholar

Mc Laughlin, Fiona (ed.), 2009a. The Languages of Urban Africa. London: Continuum.Google Scholar

Mc Laughlin, Fiona, 2009b. Senegal’s early cities and the making of an urban language. In Mc Laughlin, Fiona (ed.), The Languages of Urban Africa, pp. 71–85. London: Continuum.Google Scholar

Meeussen, A. E., 1967. Bantu grammatical reconstructions. Africana Linguistica 3: 79–121.Google Scholar

Miehe, Gudrun and Winkelmann, Kerstin (eds), 2007. Noun Class Systems in Gur Languages, vol. 1: Southwestern Gur Languages (without Gurunsi). Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar

Mous, Maarten, 1994. Ma’a or Mbugu. In Bakker, Peter and Mous, Maarten (eds), Mixed Languages: 15 Case Studies in Language Intertwining, pp. 175–200. Amsterdam: IFOTT.Google Scholar

Mous, Maarten, 2003a. The linguistic properties of lexical manipulation and its relevance for Ma’á. In Matras, Yaron and Bakker, Peter (eds), The Mixed Language Debate: Theoretical and Empirical Advances, pp. 209–235. Berlin: Mouton.Google Scholar

Mous, Maarten, 2003b. The Making of a Mixed Language: The Case of Ma’a/Mbugu. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Mufwene, Salikoko S., 2003. Contact languages in the Bantu area. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 195–208.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 1997. Modeling ancient population structures and movement in linguistics. Annual Review of Anthropology 26: 359–384.Google Scholar

Nurse, Derek, 2007. Did the Proto-Bantu verb have a synthetic or an analytic structure? In Kula, Nancy C. and Marten, Lutz (eds), SOAS Working Papers in Linguistics, vol. 15, pp. 239–256. London: SOAS.Google Scholar

Nurse, Derek and Philippson, Gérard, 2003a. Introduction. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 1–12.Google Scholar

Nurse, Derek and Philippson, Gérard (eds), 2003b. The Bantu Languages. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Olson, Kenneth S. and Hajek, John, 2003. Cross-linguistic insights on the labial flap. Linguistic Typology 7: 157–186.Google Scholar

Pakendorf, Brigitte, Bostoen, Koen and de Filippo, Cesare, 2011. Molecular perspectives on the Bantu expansion: A synthesis. Language Dynamics and Change 1: 50–88.Google Scholar

Polinsky, Maria, 2013. Applicative constructions. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar

Redden, James E., 1979. A Descriptive Grammar of Ewondo. Carbondale, IL: Department of Linguistics, Southern Illinois University.Google Scholar

Rudd, Philip W., 2008. Sheng: The Mixed Language of Nairobi. PhD dissertation, Ball State University, Muncie, IN, USA.Google Scholar

Schadeberg, Thilo, 1981. Das Kordofanische. In Heine, Bernd, Schadeberg, Thilo C. and Wolff, Ekkehard (eds), Die Sprachen Afrikas, pp. 117–128. Hamburg: Helmut Buske.Google Scholar

Schadeberg, Thilo C., 2003. Historical linguistics. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 143–163.Google Scholar

Schuh, Russell G., 1995. Avatime noun classes and concord. Studies in African Linguistics 24: 123–149.Google Scholar

Segerer, Guillaume, 2000. Description de la langue bijogo (Guinée Bissau). PhD thesis, Université de la Sorbonne Nouvelle, Paris III, Paris.Google Scholar

Segerer, Guillaume, 2002. La langue bijogo de Babaque (Guinée Bissau). Louvain and Paris: Peeters.Google Scholar

Stassen, Leon, 2013. Comparative constructions. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar

Storch, Anne, 2004. Traces of a secret language: Circumfixes in Hone (Jukun) plurals. In Akinlabi, Akinbiyi and Adesola, Oluseye (eds), Proceedings of the Fourth World Congress of African Linguistics, pp. 337–349. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar

Storch, Anne, 2009. Cultured contact: Ritualisation and semantics in Jukun. In Möhlig, Wilhelm J. G., Seidel, Frank and Seifert, Marc (eds), Language Contact, Language Change and History Based on Language Sources in Africa, pp. 297–319. Sprache und Geschichte in Africa, vol. 20. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar

Storch, Anne, 2011. Secret Manipulations: Language and Context in Africa. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Thomas, John Paul, 2011. A Morphophonology of Komo: Non-tonal Phenomena. SIL Electronic Working Papers, 2011–006. Dallas, TX: SIL International.Google Scholar

Thomason, Sarah G., 1997. Ma’a (Mbugu). In Thomason, Sarah G. (ed.), Contact Languages: A Wider Perspective, pp. 469–487. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Thomason, Sarah G. and Kaufman, Terrence, 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Vansina, Jan, 1995. New linguistic evidence and ‘the Bantu expansion’. Journal of African History 36: 173–195.Google Scholar

Voeltz, Erhard Friedrich Karl, 1977. Proto Niger-Congo Verb Extensions. PhD dissertation, UCLA, Los Angeles.Google Scholar

Vossen, Rainer, 1997. What click sounds got to do in Bantu: Reconstructing the history of language contacts in southern Africa. In Smieja, Birgit and Tasch, Meike (eds), Human Contact through Language and Linguistics, pp. 353–366. Frankfurt: Peter Lang.Google Scholar

Wallis, Barry M., 1978. Diedrich Westermann’s Die westlichen Sudansprachen and the Classification of the Languages of West Africa. PhD dissertation, Northwestern University, Evanston, IL, USA.Google Scholar

Wedekind, Klaus, 1985. Thoughts when drawing a map of tone languages. Afrikanistische Arbeitspapiere 1: 105–124.Google Scholar

Westermann, Diedrich, 1911. Die Sudansprachen: Eine Sprachvergleichende Studie. Hamburg: L. Friedrichsen.Google Scholar

Williamson, Kay, 1985. How to become a Kwa language. In Makkai, Adam and Melby, Alan K. (eds), Linguistics and Philosophy: Essays in Honor of Rulon S. Wells, pp. 427–443. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Williamson, Kay, 1989a. Benue-Congo overview. In Bendor-Samuel, (ed.), pp. 247–274.Google Scholar

Williamson, Kay, 1989b. Niger-Congo overview. In Bendor-Samuel, (ed.), pp. 3–45.Google Scholar

Williamson, Kay and Blench, Roger M., 2000. Niger-Congo. In Heine, Bernd and Nurse, Derek (eds), African Languages: An Introduction, pp. 11–42. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Wolff, Ekkehard and Gerhardt, Ludwig, 1977. Interferenzen zwischen Benue-Kongo- und Tschad-Sprachen. In Voigt, Wolfgang (ed.), XIX. Deutscher Orientalistentag, pp. 1518–1543. Wiesbaden: F. Steiner.Google Scholar

Zeitlyn, David and Connell, Bruce, 2003. Ethnogenesis and fractal history on an African frontier: Mambila-Njerep-Mandulu. Journal of African History 44: 117–138.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2006. Serial verb constructions in a typological perspective. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Serial Verb Constructions: A Cross-linguistic Typology, pp. 1–68. Explorations in Linguistic Typology, vol. 2. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Batibo, Herman M. and Tsonope, Joe (eds), 2000. The State of Khoesan Languages in Botswana. Gaborone: Basarwa Languages Project.Google Scholar

Beach, Douglas M., 1938. The Phonetics of the Hottentot Language. Cambridge: Heffer and Sons.Google Scholar

Bell, Arthur and Washburn, Paul (eds), 2001. Khoisan: Syntax, Phonetics, Phonology, and Contact. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University.Google Scholar

Bleek, Dorothea F., 1928–1930. Bushman grammar: A grammatical sketch of the language of the ǀxam-ka-ǃk’e, Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen 19: 81–98; 20: 161–174.Google Scholar

Bleek, Dorothea F., 1956. A Bushman Dictionary. New Haven, CT: American Oriental Society.Google Scholar

Brenzinger, Matthias and Fehn, Anne-Maria, 2013. From body to knowledge: Perception and cognition in Khwe-ǁAni and Ts’ixa. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Storch, Anne (eds), Perception and Cognition in Language and Culture, pp. 161–191. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Brenzinger, Matthias and König, Christa (eds), 2010. Khoisan Languages and Linguistics: Proceedings of the First International Symposium January 4–8, 2003, Riezlern/Kleinwalsertal. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Chebanne, Anders M., 2000. The phonological system of the Cuaa language. In Batibo, and Tsonope, (eds), pp. 18–32.Google Scholar

Childs, G. Tucker, 1994. African ideophones. In Hinton, Leanne, Nichols, Johanna and Ohala, John J. (eds), Sound Symbolism, pp. 178–204. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Childs, G. Tucker, 2003. An Introduction to African Languages. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Clements, George N., 2000. Phonology. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 123–160.Google Scholar

Clements, George N. and Rialland, Annie, 2008. Africa as a phonological area. In Heine, Bernd and Nurse, Derek (eds), A Linguistic Geography of Africa, pp. 36–87. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Cole, Desmond T., 1955. An Introduction to Tswana Grammar. Cape Town: Longman.Google Scholar

Collins, Chris, 2002. Multiple verb movement in ǂHoan. Linguistic Inquiry 33 (1): 1–29.Google Scholar

Collins, Chris, 2003. The internal structure of the verb phrase in Juǀ’hoansi and ǂHoan. Studia Linguistica 57 (1): 1–25.Google Scholar

Collins, Chris, 2004. The absence of the linker in double object constructions in Nǀuu. Studies in African Linguistics 33 (2): 163–198.Google Scholar

Collins, Chris and Namaseb, Levi, 2011. A Grammatical Sketch of Nǀuuki with Stories. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Dale, Desmond, 1975. A Basic English–Shona Dictionary. Gwelo: Mambo Press.Google Scholar

Daniel, Michael and Moravcsik, Edith A., 2005. The associative plural. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 150–153.Google Scholar

den Besten, Hans, 1996. Associative DP. In Cremers, Crit and den Dikken, Marcel (eds), Linguistics in the Netherlands 1996, pp. 13–24. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Dickens, Patrick J., 1994. English–Juǀ’hoan/Juǀ’hoan–English Dictionary. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Dickens, Patrick J., 1997. Relative clauses in Juǀ’hoan. In Haacke, Wilfrid H. G. and Elderkin, Edward D. (eds), Namibian Languages: Reports and Papers, pp. 107–116. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Dickens, Patrick J., 2005. A Concise Grammar of Juǀ’hoan with a Juǀ’hoan–English Glossary and a Subject Index. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Dingemanse, Mark, 2012. Advances in the cross-linguistic study of ideophones. Language and Linguistics Compass 6: 654–672.Google Scholar

Doke, Clement M., 1992 [1927]. Textbook of Zulu Grammar. Cape Town: Longman.Google Scholar

Doke, Clement M. et al., 1990. English–Zulu/Zulu–English Dictionary. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press.Google Scholar

Donaldson, Bruce C., 1993. Afrikaans Grammar. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

ELCIN Church Council Special Committees, 1996. English–Ndonga Dictionary. Oniipa: ELCIN Printing Press.Google Scholar

Greenberg, Joseph H., 1950. Studies in African linguistic classification VI: The click languages. Southwestern Journal of Anthropology 6 (3): 223–237.Google Scholar

Greenberg, Joseph H., 1959. Africa as a linguistic area. In Bascom, William R. and Herskovitz, Melville J. (eds), Continuity and Change in African Cultures, pp. 15–27. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

Greenberg, Joseph H., 1963. The Languages of Africa. Bloomington, IN: Research Center in Anthropology, Folklore, and Linguistics, Indiana University.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 1998. The Kalahari Basin as an object of areal typology: A first approach. In Schladt, Mathias (ed.), Language, Identity, and Conceptualization among the Khoisan, pp. 137–196. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 1999. Head-initial meets head-final: Nominal suffixes in eastern and southern Bantu from a historical perspective. Studies in African Linguistics 28 (1): 49–91.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2000. Noun categorization in non-Khoe lineages of Khoisan. Afrikanistische Arbeitspapiere 63: 5–33.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2001. Phonological Regularities of Consonant Systems across Khoisan Lineages. Leipzig: Institut für Afrikanistik, Universität Leipzig.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2002. Die Entlehnung pronominaler Elemente des Khoekhoe aus dem ǃUi-Taa. In Schumann, Theda et al. (eds), Aktuelle Forschungen zu Afrikanischen Sprachen: Sprachwissenschaftliche Beiträge zum 14. Afrikanistentag, Hamburg, 11.–14. Oktober 2000, pp. 43–61. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2004. Linear order as a basic morphosyntactic factor in non-Khoe Khoisan. Paper presented at the International Conference ‘Syntax of the World’s Languages’, Leipzig, 5–8 August, 2004. www.iaaw.hu-berlin.de/afrika/linguistik-und-sprachen/mitarbeiter/1683070/dokumente/LinearWorldSyntaxH.pdf Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2006. Structural isoglosses between Khoekhoe and Tuu: The Cape as a linguistic area. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas: Convergence in Historical and Typological Perspective, pp. 99–134. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2008a. A linguist’s view: Khoe-Kwadi speakers as the earliest food-producers of southern Africa. Southern African Humanities 20: 93–132.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2008b. Greenberg’s ‘case’ for Khoisan: The morphological evidence. In Ibriszimow, Dymitr (ed.), Problems of Linguistic-Historical Reconstruction in Africa, pp. 123–153. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2010a. Sprachraum and geography: Linguistic macro-areas in Africa. In Lameli, Alfred, Kehrein, Roland and Rabanus, Stefan (eds), Language and Space: An International Handbook of Linguistic Variation, vol. 2: Language Mapping, pp. 561–585. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2010b. The relation between focus and theticity in the Tuu family. In Fiedler, Ines and Schwarz, Anne (eds), The Expression of Information Structure: A Documentation of its Diversity across Africa, pp. 69–93. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2011. Perception verbs in Nǁng (!Ui, Tuu) and beyond. Paper presented at the third KBA workshop, Somlószőlős, Hungary, 7–9 January 2011. http://www2.hu-berlin.de/kba/events/hungary/perception-verbs.pdf Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2013a. Morphology: Taa (East !Xoon dialect). In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 234–241.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2013b. Morphology: |Xam. In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 241–249.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2013c. Syntax: Taa (East !Xoon dialect). In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 408–419.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2013d. Syntax: |Xam. In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 419–431.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2013e. Typology. In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 25–37.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2013f. Using minority languages to inform the historical analysis of major written languages: A Tuu perspective on the ‘give’ ~ object marker polysemy in Sinitic. Journal of Asian and African Studies 85: 41–59.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2014a. Introduction: ‘Khoisan’ linguistic classification today. In Güldemann, and Fehn, (eds), pp. 1–41.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2014b. The Lower Nossob varieties of Tuu: !Ui, Taa or neither? In Güldemann, and Fehn, (eds), pp. 257–282.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, in press. Did Proto-Tuu have a paradigm of cardinal numerals? In Beyer, Klaus et al. (eds), New Perspectives on African Languages. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom and Fehn, Anne-Maria (eds), 2014. Beyond ‘Khoisan’: Historical Relations in the Kalahari Basin. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom and Loughnane, Robyn, 2012. Are there ‘Khoisan’ roots in body-part vocabulary? On linguistic inheritance and contact in the Kalahari Basin. Language Dynamics and Change 2 (2): 215–258.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom and Pratchett, Lee J., 2014. KoMmenting on ǂKx’aoǁ’ae. Paper presented at the 5th International Symposium on Khoisan Languages and Linguistics, Riezlern, 14–16 July 2014.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom and Vossen, Rainer, 2000. Khoisan. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 99–122.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom and Witzlack-Makarevich, Alena, 2013. The risks of analysis without spoken language corpora: Clause-second ke in Richtersveld Nama and Nǁng. Paper presented at the International Conference ‘Information Structure in Spoken Language Corpora (ISSLaC)’, Bielefeld, June 10–12, 2013. www.uni-bielefeld.de/lili/tagung/ISSLaC/files/Gueldemann_Witzlack_ISSLaC_handout.pdf Google Scholar

Haacke, Wilfrid H. G., 1999. The Tonology of Khoekhoe (Nama/Damara). Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Haacke, Wilfrid H. G., 2013. Namibian Khoekhoe (Nama/Damara): Syntax. In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 325–240.Google Scholar

Haacke, Wilfrid H. G., 2014. Verb serialisation in northern dialects of Khoekhoegowab: convergence or divergence? In Güldemann, and Fehn, (eds), pp. 125–151.Google Scholar

Haacke, Wilfrid H. G. and Eiseb, Eliphas, 2002. A Khoekhoegowab Dictionary with an English–Khoekhoegowab Index. Windhoek: Gamsberg Macmillan.Google Scholar

Hagman, Roy S., 1977. Nama Hottentot Grammar. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Publications.Google Scholar

Hahn, Theophilus, 1881. Tsuni-ǁGoam: The Supreme Being of the Khoi-Khoi. London: Trübner.Google Scholar

Hajek, John, 2005. Vowel nasalization. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 46–49.Google Scholar

Haspelmath, Martin, et al. (eds), 2005. The World Atlas of Language Structures. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd, 1976. A Typology of African Languages Based on the Order of Meaningful Elements. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd and König, Christa, 2013. Syntax: Northern Khoesan: !Xun. In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 293–325.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd and Nurse, Derek (eds), 2000. African Languages: An Introduction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Herbert, Robert K., 1987. Articulatory modes and typological universals: The puzzle of Bantu ejectives and aspirates. In Shockey, L. and Channon, R. (eds), Festschrift for Ilse Lehiste, pp. 401–413. Dordrecht: Foris.Google Scholar

Herbert, Robert K., 1990. The relative markedness of click sounds: Evidence from language change, acquisition, and avoidance. Anthropological Linguistics 32 (1/2): 120–138.Google Scholar

Hoffmann, Carl F., 1953. Zur Verbreitung der Zahlwortstämme in Bantusprachen, Afrika und Übersee 37: 65–80.Google Scholar

Honken, Henry, 2006. Fused loans in Khoesan. Pula 20 (1): 75–85.Google Scholar

Honken, Henry, 2013. Eastern ǂHoan: Morphology. In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 249–261.Google Scholar

Hyman, Larry M., 2003. Segmental phonology. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 42–58.Google Scholar

Kießling, Roland, 2014. Verbal serialisation in Taa (Southern Khoisan). In Witzlack-Makarevich, Alena and Ernszt, Martina (eds), Khoisan Languages and Linguistics: Proceedings of the Second International Symposium July 6–10, 2008, pp. 33–60. Riezlern/Kleinwalsertal. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Kilian-Hatz, Christa, 2001. Universality and diversity: Ideophones from Baka and Kxoe. In Voeltz, F. K. Erhard and Kilian-Hatz, Christa (eds), Ideophones, pp. 155–163. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Kilian-Hatz, Christa, 2008. A Grammar of Modern Khwe (Central Khoisan). Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Kisseberth, Charles W. and Odden, David, 2003. Tone. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 59–70.Google Scholar

Köhler, Oswin, 1973/1974. Neuere Ergebnisse und Hypothesen der Sprachforschung in ihrer Bedeutung für die Geschichte Afrikas. Paideuma 19/20: 162–199.Google Scholar

Köhler, Oswin, 1975. Geschichte und Probleme der Gliederung der Sprachen Afrikas: Von den Anfängen bis zur Gegenwart. In Baumann, Hermann (ed.), Die Völker Afrikas und ihre Traditionellen Kulturen, part 1: Allgemeiner Teil und Südliches Afrika, pp. 135–373. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner.Google Scholar

König, Christa, 2006. Focus in !Xun. In Ermisch, Sonja (ed.), Focus and Topic in African Languages, pp. 249–263. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

König, Christa, 2010. Serial verb constructions in !Xun. In Brenzinger, and König, (eds), pp. 144–175.Google Scholar

König, Christa and Heine, Bernd, 2008. A Concise Dictionary of Northwestern ǃXun. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Krüger, Caspar J. H., 2006. Introduction to the Morphology of Setswana. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar

Lanham, Leonard W., 1962. The proliferation and extension of Bantu phonemic systems influenced by Bushman and Hottentot. In Lunt, Horace G. (ed.), Proceedings of the Ninth International Congress of Linguistics, Cambridge, Mass., August 27–31, 1962, pp. 382–391. Janua Linguarum, Series Maior 12. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar

Lionnet, Florian, 2014. Demonstrative and relative constructions in Ju: A diachronic account. In Güldemann, and Fehn, (eds), pp. 181–207.Google Scholar

Louw, Johan A., 1986. Some linguistic influence of Khoi and San in the prehistory of the Nguni. In Voßen, Rainer and Keuthmann, Klaus (eds), Contemporary Studies on Khoisan, vol. 2, pp. 141–168. Quellen zur Khoisan-Forschung 5. Hamburg: Helmut Buske.Google Scholar

Luijks, Carla, 2001. The Khoekhoe and/or the San: Gathering the Afrikaans substrate languages. In Bell, and Washburn, (eds), pp. 184–199.Google Scholar

Maddieson, Ian, 2003. The sounds of the Bantu languages. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 15–41.Google Scholar

Malchukov, Andrej L., Haspelmath, Martin and Comrie, Bernard 2010. Ditransitive constructions: A typological overview. In Malchukov, Andrej L., Haspelmath, Martin and Comrie, Bernard (eds), Studies in Ditransitive Constructions: A Comparative Handbook, pp. 1–64. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Meinhof, Carl, 1905. Hottentottische Laute und Lehnworte im Kafir. Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft 58: 727–769, 59: 36–89.Google Scholar

Meinhof, Carl, 1930. Der Koranadialekt des Hottentottischen. Berlin: Reimer.Google Scholar

Mesthrie, Rajend and Roberge, Paul T. (eds), 2001/2002. Focus on Afrikaans Sociohistorical Linguistics, two volumes. Special issues of Journal of Germanic Linguistics 13 (4), 14 (1).Google Scholar

Miller, Amanda L., 2011. The representation of clicks. In van Oostendorp, Marc et al. (eds), The Blackwell Companion to Phonology, pp. 416–439. Oxford and Chichester, UK: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar

Miller-Ockhuizen, Amanda L., 2001. Two kinds of reduplication in Juǀ’hoansi. Afrikanistische Arbeitspapiere 66: 107–118.Google Scholar

Nakagawa, Hirosi, 2010. Phonotactics of disyllabic lexical morphemes in Gǀui. Working Papers in Corpus-based Linguistics and Language Education 5: 23–31. Tokyo University of Foreign Studies.Google Scholar

Nakagawa, Hirosi, 2011. A first report on Gǀui ideophones. In Hieda, Osamu, König, Christa and Nakagawa, Hirosi (eds), Geographical Typology and Linguistic Areas, With Special Reference to Africa, pp. 279–286. Tokyo University of Foreign Studies, Studies in Linguistics 2. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Nakagawa, Hirosi, 2012. The importance of TASTE verbs in some Khoe languages. Linguistics 50 (3): 395–420.Google Scholar

Nakagawa, Hirosi, 2014. The aspect system and posture verbs in Gǀui. Paper presented at the 5th International Symposium on Khoisan Languages and Linguistics, Riezlern, 14–16 July 2014.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

Nienaber, Gabriël S., 1994. Pa-hulle is kreools [Pa-hulle is creole]. Khoekhoe en Afrikaans in gesprek [Khoekhoe and Afrikaans in Dialogue]. Suid-Afrikaanse Tydskrif vir Taalkunde, Supplement 21: 14–67.Google Scholar

Nurse, Derek and Philippson, Gérard (eds), 2003. The Bantu Languages. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Ono, Hitomi, 2010. Personal pronouns. In Tanaka, Jiro and Sugawara, Kazuyoshi (eds), An Encyclopedia of ǀGui and ǁGana Culture and Society, pp. 91–92. Kyoto: Laboratory of Cultural Anthropology, Kyoto University.Google Scholar

Ono, Hitomi, 2014. Temporal expressions in Gǀui. Paper presented at the 5th International Symposium on Khoisan Languages and Linguistics, Riezlern, 14–16 July 2014.Google Scholar

Poulos, George (with Msimang, Christian T.), 1998. A Linguistic Analysis of Zulu. Cape Town: VIA Afrika.Google Scholar

Rapold, Christian, 2014. Areal and inherited aspects of compound verbs in Khoekhoe. In Güldemann, and Fehn, (eds), pp. 153–177.Google Scholar

Samarin, William J., 1971. Survey of Bantu ideophones. African Language Studies 12: 130–168.Google Scholar

Sands, Bonny E., 1998. Eastern and Southern African Khoisan: Evaluating Claims of Distant Linguistic Relationships. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Sands, Bonny E., 2001. Borrowing and diffusion as a source of lexical similarities in Khoesan. In Bell, and Washburn, (eds), pp. 200–224.Google Scholar

Snyman, Jan W., 1974. The Bushman and Hottentot languages of Southern Africa. Limi 2 (2): 28–44.Google Scholar

Snyman, Jan W., 1975. Žuǀ’hõasi Fonologie and Woordeboek [Žuǀ’hõasi Phonology and Dictionary]. Cape Town: Balkema.Google Scholar

Snyman, Jan W. (ed.), 1980. Bushman and Hottentot Linguistic Studies (Papers of Seminar Held on 27 July 1979). Pretoria: University of South Africa.Google Scholar

Snyman, Jan W., 2000. Palatalisation in the Tsowaa and Gǁana languages of central Botswana. In Batibo, and Tsonope, (eds), pp. 33–43.Google Scholar

Traill, Anthony, 1980. Phonetic diversity in the Khoisan languages. In Snyman, (ed.), pp. 167–189.Google Scholar

Traill, Anthony, 1985. Phonetic and Phonological Studies of ǃXóõ Bushman. Hamburg: Buske.Google Scholar

Traill, Anthony, 1986. Do the Khoi have a place in the San? New data on Khoisan linguistic relationships. Sprache und Geschichte in Afrika 7 (1): 407–430.Google Scholar

Traill, Anthony, 1994. A ǃXóõ Dictionary. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Traill, Anthony and Nakagawa, Hirosi, 2000. A historical !Xóõ-ǀGui contact zone: Linguistic and other relations. In Batibo, and Tsonope, (eds), pp. 1–17.Google Scholar

Viberg, Åke, 1984. The verbs of perception: A typological study. Linguistics 21 (1): 123–162.Google Scholar

Visser, Hessel, 2001. Naro Dictionary: Naro–English, English–Naro. D’Kar: Naro Language Project.Google Scholar

Visser, Hessel, 2010. Verbal compounds in Naro. In Brenzinger, and König, (eds), pp. 176–200.Google Scholar

Visser, Hessel, 2013. Naro: Morphology. In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 179–206.Google Scholar

Vossen, Rainer, 1997. Die Khoe-Sprachen: Ein Beitrag zur Erforschung der Sprachgeschichte Afrikas. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar

Vossen, Rainer (ed.), 2013. The Khoesan Languages. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

van Warmelo, Nicolaas Jacobus, 1989. Venda Dictionary: Tshivenda–English. Pretoria: J. L. van Schaik.Google Scholar

Westphal, Ernst O. J., 1971. The click languages of Southern and Eastern Africa. In Berry, Jack and Greenberg, Joseph H. (eds), Linguistics in Sub-Saharan Africa, pp. 367–420. The Hague and Paris: Mouton.Google Scholar

Westphal, Ernst O. J., 1980. The age of ‘Bushman’ languages in Southern African pre-history. In Snyman, (ed.), pp. 59–79.Google Scholar

Aycard, Pierre, 2014. The Use of Iscamtho by Children in White City-Jabavu, Soweto: Slang and Language Contact in an African Urban Context. Unpublished PhD thesis, University of Cape Town.Google Scholar

Botha, Rudolf P., 1988. Form and Meaning in Word Formation: A Study of Afrikaans Reduplication. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Botha, Yolande, 2013. Corpus evidence of anti-deletion in Black South African English noun phrases. English Today 29 (1): 16–21.Google Scholar

Branford, Jean, with Branford, William, 1991. A Dictionary of South African English, fourth edition. Cape Town: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Branford, William and Claughton, John, 2002. Mutual lexical borrowings among some languages of southern Africa: Xhosa, Afrikaans and English. In Mesthrie, (ed.), pp. 199–215.Google Scholar

Calteaux, Karen, 1996. Standard and Non-standard African Language Varieties in the Urban Areas of South Africa: Main Report for the STANON Research Programme. Pretoria: HSRC Publishers.Google Scholar

Childs, G. Tucker, 1997. The status of Isicamtho, an Nguni-based urban variety of Soweto. In Spears, Arthur K. and Winford, Donald (eds), The Structure and Status of Pidgins and Creoles, pp. 341–370. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Christie, Agatha, 1973. A Pocket Full of Rye. London: Fontana. First edition 1953.Google Scholar

Christie, Agatha, 1976. Curtain: Poirot’s Last Case. London: Book Club Associates. First edition 1975.Google Scholar

Combrink, J. G. H., 1978. Afrikaans: Its origin and development. In Lanham, Len W. and Prinsloo, K. P. (eds), Language and Communication Studies in South Africa, pp. 69–95. Cape Town: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

de Klerk, Vivian, 2006. Corpus Linguistics and World Englishes: A Study of Xhosa English. London: Continuum.Google Scholar

den Besten, Hans, 2012. Roots of Afrikaans: Selected Writings of Hans den Besten, edited by van der Wouden, Ton. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

den Besten, Hans, Luiks, Carla and Roberge, Paul, 2003. Reduplication in Afrikaans. In Kouwenberg, Silvia (ed.), Twice as Meaningful: Reduplication in Pidgins, Creoles and Other Contact Languages, pp. 271–287. London: Battlebridge.Google Scholar

Deumert, Ana, Hurst, Ellen, Masinyana, Oscar and Mesthrie, Rajend, 2006. Logical connectors and discourse markers in Urban Xhosa. Paper presented at the Linguistics Society of Southern Africa conference, University of KwaZulu-Natal, South Africa.Google Scholar

Donaldson, Bruce C., 1988. The Influence of English on Afrikaans. Pretoria: Serva.Google Scholar

Emeneau, Murray B., 1956. India as a linguistic area. Language 33: 3–16.Google Scholar

Finlayson, Rosalie, 1984. The changing nature of isihlonipho sabafazi. African Studies 43 (2): 137–146.Google Scholar

Gough, David, 1996. Black English in South Africa. In de Klerk, Vivian (ed.), Focus on South Africa. John Benjamins: Amsterdam.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2006. A forgotten heritage? Southern African Khoisan and its importance for modern linguistic research. Keynote address to the Linguistics Society of Southern Africa, University of Pretoria.Google Scholar

Güldemann, Tom, 2007. Preverbal objects and information structure in Benue-Congo. In Aboh, Enoch O., Harmann, Katharina and Zimmerman, Malte (eds), Focus Strategies in African Languages: The Interaction of Focus and Grammar in Niger-Congo and Afro-Asiatic, pp. 83–112. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Gunnink, Hilde, 2012. A Linguistic Analysis of Sowetan Zulu and Sowetan Tsotsi. Unpublished MA thesis, University of Leiden.Google Scholar

Harinck, G., 1969. Interaction between Xhosa and Khoe: Emphasis on the period 1620–1750. In Thompson, Leonard (ed.), African Societies in Southern Africa, pp. 145–170. London: Heinemann.Google Scholar

Herbert, Robert, 1990. ‘Hlonipha’ and the ambiguous woman. Anthropos 85: 455–473.Google Scholar

Herbert, Robert, 2002. The sociohistory of clicks in Southern Bantu. In Mesthrie, (ed.), pp. 297–315.Google Scholar

Herbert, Robert and Bailey, Richard, 2002. The Bantu languages: Sociohistorical perspectives. In Mesthrie, (ed.), pp. 50–78.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2010. Language contact: Reconsideration and reassessment. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 1–28. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Hundleby, Charles E., 1964. Xhosa–English Pronunciation in the South-East Cape. Unpublished PhD thesis, Rhodes University, Grahamstown.Google Scholar

Lanham, Leonard, 1964. The proliferation and extension of Bantu phonemic systems influenced by Bushman and Hottentot. In Lund, H. G. (ed.), Proceedings of the Ninth International Congress of Linguists, pp. 382–391. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar

Lanham, Leonard and Macdonald, Carol, 1979. The Standard in South African History and its Social History. Heidelberg: Julius Groos.Google Scholar

Lass, Roger, 1995. South African English. In Mesthrie, Rajend (ed.), Language and Social History: Studies in South African Sociolinguistics, pp. 89–106. Cape Town: David Philip.Google Scholar

Lass, Roger and Wright, Susan, 1986. Endogeny vs. contact: Afrikaans influence on South African English. English World-Wide 7: 201–223.Google Scholar

Links, Tony, 1989. So Praat ons Namaqualanders. Cape Town: Tafelberg.Google Scholar

Louw, J. A., 1983. The development of Xhosa and Zulu as languages. In Fodor, Istvan and Hagège, Claude (eds), Language Reform: History and Future. Hamburg: Buske.Google Scholar

McCormick, Kay, 2002. Code-switching, meaning and convergence in Cape Town. In Mesthrie, (ed.), pp. 216–234.Google Scholar

Mesthrie, Rajend, 1992. English in Language Shift: The History, Structure and Sociolinguistics of South African Indian English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Mesthrie, Rajend, 1997. A sociolinguistic study of topicalisation phenomena in South African Black English. In Schneider, Edgar (ed.), New Englishes: Studies in Honour of Manfred Gorlach, vol. 2, pp. 119–140. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Mesthrie, Rajend, 2002a. Endogeny versus contact revisited: Aspectual busy in South African English. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Collecting Views on Language Change: A Donation to Roger Lass on his Sixty-Fifth Birthday, pp. 345–358. Special issue of Language Sciences 24 (2–4).Google Scholar

Mesthrie, Rajend (ed.), 2002b. Language in South Africa. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Mesthrie, Rajend, 2006. Anti-deletions in an L2 grammar: A study of Black South African English mesolect. English World-Wide 27 (2): 111–145.Google Scholar

Mesthrie, Rajend, 2008. Black South African English: Morphology and syntax. In Mesthrie, Rajend (ed.), Varieties of English, vol. 4: Africa, South and Southeast Asia, pp. 488–500. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Mesthrie, Rajend, 2010. Socio-phonetics and social change: Deracialisation of the GOOSE vowel in South African English. Journal of Sociolinguistics 14 (1): 3–33.Google Scholar

Mesthrie, Rajend, 2014. The sociophonetic effects of Event X: Post-apartheid Black South African English in multicultural contact with other South African Englishes. In Buschfeld, Sarah, Hoffmann, Thomas, Huber, Magnus and Kautzsch, Alexander (eds), The Evolution of Englishes: The Dynamic Model and Beyond, pp. 58–69. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Mesthrie, Rajend and Hurst, Ellen, 2013. Slang registers, code-switching and restructured urban varieties in South Africa: An analytic overview of tsotsitaals with special reference to the Cape Town variety. Journal of Pidgin and Creole Languages 28 (1): 103–130.Google Scholar

Ngcobo, Mtholeni, 2013. Loan words (sic) classification in isiZulu: The need for a sociolinguistic approach. Language Matters 44 (1): 21–38.Google Scholar

Nienaber, P. J. (ed.), 1965. Taalkundige opstelle. Cape Town: A. A. Balkema.Google Scholar

Pauwels, Jan Lodewijk, 1958. Het dialect van Aarschot en omstreken. Tongeren: Michiels.Google Scholar

Ponelis, F. A., 1985. Setselskeiding in Afrikaans. Tydskrif vir Geesteswetenskappe 25 (2): 106–127.Google Scholar

Roberge, Paul, 2002. Afrikaans: Considering origins. In Mesthrie, (ed.), pp. 79–103.Google Scholar

van Rooy, Bertus, 2004. Black South African English: Phonology. In Schneider, Edgar, Burridge, Kate, Kortmann, Bernd, Mesthrie, Rajend and Upton, Clive (eds), A Handbook of Varieties of English, vol. 1: Phonology, pp. 943–952. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

van Rooy, Bertus, 2006. The extension of the progressive aspect in Black South African English. World Englishes 25 (1): 37–64.Google Scholar

Slabbert, Sarah and Finlayson, Rosalie, 2000. ‘I’m a cleva!’: The linguistic makeup of identity in a South African urban environment. International Journal of the Sociology of Language 144: 119–135.Google Scholar

Thipa, Henry, 1989. The Difference between Rural and Urban Xhosa Varieties. Unpublished PhD thesis, University of Natal, Pietermaritzburg.Google Scholar

Valkhoff, Marius, 1966. Studies in Portuguese and Creole, with Special Reference to South Africa. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press.Google Scholar

Wissing, Daan, 2002. Black South African English: A new English? Observations from a phonetic viewpoint. World Englishes 21 (1): 129–144.Google Scholar

Abbi, Anvita, 1997. Languages in contact in Jharkhand. In Abbi, Anvita (ed.), Languages of Tribal and Indigenous Peoples of India: The Ethnic Space, pp. 131–148. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2007. The Munda Verb: Typological Perspectives. Trends in Linguistics, Studies and Monographs, vol. 174. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory D. S. (ed.), 2008. The Munda Languages. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory D. S. and Harrison, K. David, 2008. Sora. In Anderson, (ed.), pp. 299–380.Google Scholar

Bickel, Balthasar, Bisang, Walter and Yādava, Yogendra P., 1999. Face vs. empathy: The social foundation of Maithili verb agreement. Linguistics 37 (3): 481–518.Google Scholar

Chatterji, Suniti Kumar, 1926. The Origin and Development of the Bengali Language: With a Foreword by Sir George Abraham Grierson. Third impression, 2002, New Delhi: Rupa.Google Scholar

Deeney, John J., , S.J., 1975. Ho Grammar and Vocabulary. Chaibasa: Xavier Ho Publications, St. Xavier’s High School.Google Scholar

Donegan, Patricia and Stampe, David, 2004. Rhythm and the synthetic drift of Munda. In Singh, Rajendra (ed.), The Yearbook of South Asian Languages and Linguistics, 2004, pp. 3–36. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Ebert, Karen, 1999. Nonfinite verbs in Kiranti languages: An areal perspective. In Yadava, Yogendra P. and Glover, Warren W. (eds), Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, pp. 371–400. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.Google Scholar

Ebert, Karen, 2001. Südasien als Sprachbund. In Haspelmath, Martin, König, Ekkhard, Oesterreicher, Wulf and Raible, Wolfgang (eds), Sprachtypologie und sprachliche Universalien: Ein internationales Handbuch. Handbücher zur Sprach- und Kommunikationswissenschaft, vol. 20.2.Google Scholar

Emeneau, Murray B., 1956. India as a linguistic area. Language 32: 3–16.Google Scholar

Genetti, Carol, 1999. Variation in agreement in the Nepali finite verb. In Yadava, Yogendra P. and Glover, Warren W. (eds), Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, pp. 542–555. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.Google Scholar

Ghosh, Arun, 2008. Santali. In Anderson, (ed.), pp. 11–98.Google Scholar

Grierson, Sir George Abraham, 1903. Linguistic Survey of India, vol. V: Indo-Aryan Family, Eastern Group, part II: Specimens of the Bihari and Oriya Languages. Calcutta.Google Scholar

Grignard, A., 1924. A Grammar of the Oraon Language and Study in Oraon Idiom. Calcutta: Catholic Orphan Press.Google Scholar

Hoffmann, Revd Johann, S.J., 1905/1909. Mundari Grammar and Exercises, parts I and II. Reprint 2001, New Delhi: Gyan Publishing House.Google Scholar

Jordan-Horstmann, Monika, 1969. Sadani: A Bhojpuri Dialect Spoken in Chotanagpur. Indologia Berolinensis, vol. 1. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Kullū, Paulus, 1992. Tonme kol-āṅgre [The New Testament]. Ranchi: Catholic Press.Google Scholar

Lewis, M. Paul, Simons, Gary F. and Fennig, Charles D. (eds), 2013. Ethnologue: Languages of the World, seventeenth edition. Dallas, TX: SIL International. www.ethnologue.com Google Scholar

Masica, Colin P., 1976. Defining a Linguistic Area: South Asia. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

Neukom, Lukas, 2001. Santali. Languages of the World/Materials, vol. 323. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar

Neukom, Lukas and Patnaik, Manideepa, 2003. A Grammar of Oriya. Zürich: Universität Zürich.Google Scholar

Nowrangi, Peter Shanti, 1956. A Simple Sadāni Grammar. Ranchi: D.S.S. Book Depot.Google Scholar

Osada, Toshiki, 1991. Linguistic convergence in the Chotanagpur area. In Mullick, S. Bosu (ed.), Cultural Chotanagpur: Unity in Diversity, pp. 99–119. New Delhi: Uppal Publishing House.Google Scholar

Osada, Toshiki, 1992. A Reference Grammar of Mundari. Tokyo: Tokyo University of Foreign Studies.Google Scholar

Osada, Toshiki, 2008. Mundari. In Anderson, (ed.), pp. 99–164.Google Scholar

Patnaik, Manideepa, 2008. Juang. In Anderson, (ed.), pp. 508–556.Google Scholar

Peterson, John, 2010. Language contact in Jharkhand: Linguistic convergence between Munda and Indo-Aryan in eastern-central India. Himalayan Linguistics 9 (2): 56–86. escholarship.org/uc/item/489929c1 Google Scholar

Peterson, John, 2011. A Grammar of Kharia: A South Munda Language. Brill Studies in South and Southwestern Asian Languages, vol. 1. Leiden and Boston: Brill.Google Scholar

Pinnow, Heinz-Jürgen, 1966. A comparative study of the verb in the Munda languages. In Zide, Norman H. (ed.), Studies in Comparative Austroasiatic Linguistics. Indo-Iranian Monographs, vol. V. London, The Hague and Paris: Mouton and Co.Google Scholar

Radice, William, 1994. Bengali: A Complete Course for Beginners. Teach Yourself series. London: Hodder, and Chicago: NTC.Google Scholar

Shukla, Shaligram, 1981. Bhojpuri Grammar. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press.Google Scholar

Thompson, Hanne-Ruth, 2012. Bengali. London Oriental and African Language Library, vol. 18. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Tiwari, Udai Narain, 1960. The Origin and Development of Bhojpuri. The Asiatic Society, Monograph Series, vol. X. Calcutta: The Asiatic Society.Google Scholar

Verma, Manindra K., 1991. Exploring the parameters of agreement. Language Sciences 13 (2): 125–143.Google Scholar

Yadav, Ramawatar, 1996. A Reference Grammar of Maithili. Trends in Linguistics, Documentation, vol. 11. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Ansaldo, Umberto, 2009. Contact Languages: Ecology and evolution in Asia. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Ansaldo, Umberto, 2011. Metatypy in Sri Lanka Malay. Annual Review of South Asian Languages and Linguistics 2011: 3–16.Google Scholar

Ansaldo, Umberto and Lim, Lisa, 2006. Globalisation, empowerment and the periphery: The Malays of Sri Lanka. In Elangaiyan, R., Brown, R. McKenna, Ostler, N. D. M. and Verma, M. K. (eds), Vital Voices: Endangered Languages and Multilingualism, pp. 39–46. Proceedings of the FEL X Conference. Bath: Foundation for Endangered Languages; Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages.Google Scholar

Ansaldo, Umberto and Matthews, Stephen, 2007. Deconstructing creole: The rationale. In Ansaldo, Umberto, Matthews, Stephen and Lim, Lisa (eds), Deconstructing Creole. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Ansaldo, Umberto and Nordhoff, Sebastian, 2008. Complexity and the age of languages. In Aboh, Enoch O. and Smith, Norval S. (eds), Complex Processes in New Languages, pp. 345–363. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

van der Auwera, Johan, 2011. Standard Average European. In Kortmann, Bernd and van der Auwera, Johan (eds), The Languages and Linguistics of Europe: A Comprehensive Guide, pp. 291–306. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Bakker, Peter, 2006. The Sri Lanka Sprachbund: The newcomers Portuguese and Malay. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas: Convergence in Historical and Typological Perspective, pp. 135–159. Houndmills, Basingstoke, UK and New York: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar

Bakker, Peter and Mous, Maarten, 1994. Mixed Languages: 15 Case Studies in Language Intertwining. Amsterdam: IFOTT.Google Scholar

Cavalli-Sforza, Luigi L., 2000. Genes, Peoples, and Languages. New York: North Point Press.Google Scholar

Cavalli-Sforza, Luigi L., Menozzi, Paolo and Piazza, Alberto, 1994. The History and Geography of Human Genes. Princeton: Princeton University Press.Google Scholar

Emeneau, Murray B., 1956. India as a linguistic area. Language 32 (1): 3–16.Google Scholar

Erdosy, George, 1995. The Indo-Aryans of Ancient South Asia: Language, Material Culture and Ethnicity. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Gair, James W., 1994. Universals and the South-South Asian language area. Keynote Address, 1994 SALA meeting, Philadelphia.Google Scholar

Gair, James W., 1998. Studies in South Asian Linguistics: Sinhala and Other Languages. New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Gair, James W., 2013. Sri Lankan languages in the South-South Asia linguistic area: Sinhala and Sri Lanka Malay. In Nordhoff, Sebastian (ed.), The Genesis of Sri Lanka Malay, pp. 165–194. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Haspelmath, M., 1998. How young is Standard Average European? Language Sciences 20: 271–287.Google Scholar

Haspelmath, Martin, 2001. The European Linguistic Area: Standard Average European. In Haspelmath, Martin (ed.), Language Typology and Language Universals, vol. 2, pp. 1492–1551. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Haugen, Einar, 1971. The ecology of language. Linguistic Reporter 13 (1): 19–26.Google Scholar

Krishnamurti, B., 1969. Comparative Dravidian Linguistics, pp. 309–330. Current Trends in Linguistics, vol. 5. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar

Krishnamurti, B., 2003. The Dravidian Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Kshatriya, Gautam K., 1995. Genetic affinities of Sri Lankan populations. Human Biology 67 (6): 843–866.Google Scholar

Lefebvre, Claire (ed.), 2011. Creoles, their Substrates and Language Typology. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Matras, Yaron, 2010. Contact, convergence and typology. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 66–85. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Nordhoff, Sebastian, 2009. A Grammar of Upcountry Sri Lanka Malay. PhD thesis, University of Amsterdam.Google Scholar

Reich, David, Kumarasamy, Thangaraj, Patterson, Nick, Price, Alkes L. and Singh, Lalji, 2009. Reconstructing Indian population history. Nature 461 (7263): 489–494.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm D., 2006. Metatypy. In Brown, Keith (ed.), Encyclopedia of Language and Linguistics. Oxford: Elsevier.Google Scholar

Sjoberg, Andree, 1992. The Impact of Dravidian on Indo-Aryan: An Overview. Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Trends in Linguistics, Studies and Monographs, vol 58. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Smith, Ian R., 1979a. Convergence in South Asia: A creole example. Lingua 48: 193–222.Google Scholar

Smith, Ian R., 1979b. Substrata versus universals in the formation of Sri Lanka Portuguese. Papers in Pidgin and Creole Linguistics 2: 183–200.Google Scholar

Thomason, Sarah G. and Kaufman, Terrence, 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Trudgill, Peter, 2011. Sociolinguistic Typology: Social Determinants of Linguistic Complexity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra, 2013. Areal diffusion and parallelism in drift: Shared grammaticalization patterns. In Robbeets, and Cuyckens, (eds), pp. 23–42.Google Scholar

Alpatov, Vladimir and Podlesskaya, Vera, 1995. Converbs in Japanese. In Haspelmath, and König, (eds), pp. 465–486.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory, 2005. The velar nasal (ŋ). In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 42–45.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory, 2006. Towards a typology of the Siberian linguistic area. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas: Convergence in Historical and Typological Perspective, pp. 266–300. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar

Bengston, John D. and Blažek, Václav, 2009. Ainu and Austric: Evidence of genetic relationship. Journal of Language Relationship 2: 1–24.Google Scholar

Benzing, Johannes, 1955. Die tungusischen Sprachen: Versuch einer vergleichenden Grammatik. Abhandlungen der geistes- und sozialwissenschaftlichen Klasse 11: 949–1099.Google Scholar

Bisang, Walter, 1995. Verb serialization and converbs: Differences and similarities. In Haspelmath, and König, (eds), pp. 137–188.Google Scholar

Bisang, Walter, 1998. Structural similarities of clause combining in Turkic, Mongolian, Manchu-Tungusic and Japanese: A typological alternative to the hypothesis of a genetic relationship. In Johanson, Lars (ed.), The Mainz Meeting: Proceedings of the Seventh International Conference on Turkish Linguistics, pp. 199–223. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Bugaeva, Anna, 2015. Causative constructions in Ainu: A typological perspective with remarks on the diachrony. STUF – Language Typology and Universals (Sprachtypologie und Universalienforschung) 68 (4): 439–484.Google Scholar

Bulatova, Nadežda Ja. and Grenoble, Leonore A. 1999. Evenki. Languages of the World/Materials, vol. 141. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar

Collinder, Björn, 1965. An Introduction to the Uralic Languages. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Comrie, Bernard, 1981. Negation and other verb categories in the Uralic languages. In Ikola, Osmo (ed.), Congressus Quintis Internationalis Fenno-Ugristarum, vol. VI, pp. 350–355. Turku: Suomen Kielen Seura.Google Scholar

Comrie, Bernard, 2008. The areal typology of Chinese: Between North and Southeast Asia. In Djamouri, Redouane, Meisterernst, Barbara and Sybesma, Rint (eds), Chinese Linguistics in Leipzig, pp. 1–21. Collection des Cahiers de Linguistique Asie Orientale, vol. 12. Paris: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales, Centre de Recherches Linguistiques sur l’Asie Orientale.Google Scholar

Croft, William, 1990. Typology and Universals. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Cysouw, Michael, 2005. Inclusive/exclusive forms for ‘we’. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 162–169.Google Scholar

Dahl, Östen, 1979. Typology of sentence negation. Linguistics 17: 79–106.Google Scholar

Diessel, Holger, 2005. Distance contrasts in demonstratives. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 170–173.Google Scholar

Doerfer, Gerhard, 1978. Urtungusisch ö. In Doerfer, Gerhard and Weiers, Michael (eds), Beiträge zur nordasiatischen Kulturgeschichte, pp. 66–116. Tungusica, vol. 1. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Doerfer, Gerhard, 1985. Mongolo-Tungusica. Wiesbaden: Steiner.Google Scholar

Domii, Tumurtogoo, 2006. The inclusive and the exclusive in Mongolian. In Shagdarsursen, T. (ed.), Mongol ulsin ix sürgüülijn: Erdem šinžilgeenij bičig, pp. 77–78. Acta Mongolica, vol. 6.267. Ulanbaatar: National University of Mongolia.Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S., 2005a. Prefixing versus suffixing in inflectional morphology. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 110–113.Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S., 2005b. Order of subject, object, and verb. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 330–333.Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S., 2005c. Order of genitive and noun; Order of adjective and noun. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 350–357.Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew, 2005d. Negative morphemes. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 454–457.Google Scholar

Erdal, Marcel, 2004. A Grammar of Old Turkic. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Evans, Nicholas, 2008. Insubordination and its uses. In Nikolaeva, Irina (ed.), Finiteness: Theoretical and Empirical Foundations, pp. 366–431. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Filchenko, Andrey Yury, 2007. A Grammar of Eastern Khanty. PhD dissertation, Rice University, Houston.Google Scholar

Frellesvig, Bjarke, 2010. A History of the Japanese Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Frellesvig, Bjarke and Whitman, John, 2008. Evidence for seven vowels in Proto-Japanese. In Frellesvig, Bjarke and Whitman, John (eds), Proto-Japanese: Issues and Prospects, pp. 15–41. Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 294. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

van Gelderen, Elly, 2008. Negative cycles. Linguistic Typology 12: 195–243.Google Scholar

Georg, Stefan, 2007. A Descriptive Grammar of Ket (Yenisei-Ostyak), part 1: Introduction, Phonology, Morphology. Folkestone: Global Oriental.Google Scholar

Gil, David, 2005. Numeral classifiers. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 226–229.Google Scholar

Göksel, Aslï and Kerslake, Celia, 2005. Turkish: A Comprehensive Grammar. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Gorelova, Liliya, 2002. Manchu Grammar. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Grönbech, Karl, 1936. Der Türkische Sprachbau. Copenhagen: Levin and Munksgaard.Google Scholar

Gruzdeva, Ekaterina, 1998. Nivkh. Languages of the World/Materials, vol. 111. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar

Hashimoto, Mantaro, 1986. The Altaicization of Northern Chinese. In McCoy, John and Light, Timothy (eds), Contributions to Sino-Tibetan Studies, pp. 76–97. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Haspelmath, Martin, 1995. The converb as a cross-linguistically valid category. In Haspelmath, and König, (eds), pp. 1–56.Google Scholar

Haspelmath, Martin et al. (eds), 2005. The World Atlas of Language Structures. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Haspelmath, Martin and König, Ekkehard (eds), 1995. Converbs in Cross-linguistic Perspective: Structure and Meaning of Adverbial Verb Forms – Adverbial Particles, Gerunds. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Heath, Jeffrey, 1998. Hermit crabs: Formal renewal of morphology by phonologically mediated affix substitution. Language 74: 728–759.Google Scholar

Honti, László, 1997. Die Negation im Uralischen, parts I–III. Linguistica Uralica 2: 81–96, 161–176, 241–252.Google Scholar

Janhunen, Juha, 1981. Korean vowel system in North Asian perspective. Hangeul 172: 129–146.Google Scholar

Janhunen, Juha, 1982. On the structure of Proto-Uralic. Finnisch-ugrische Forschungen 44: 23–42.Google Scholar

Janhunen, Juha, 1996. Manchuria: An Ethnic History. Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne, vol. 222. Helsinki: Suomalais-Ugrilainen Seura.Google Scholar

Janhunen, Juha, 1997. Problems of primary root structure in pre-proto-Japanic. International Journal of Central Asian Studies 2: 14–30.Google Scholar

Janhunen, Juha, 2007. Typological interaction in the Qinghai Linguistic Complex. Studia Orientalia 101: 85–103.Google Scholar

Janhunen, Juha, 2009. Proto-Uralic: What, where, and when? Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne 258: 57–78.Google Scholar

Janhunen, Juha, 2012. Mongolian. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Janhunen, Juha, 2013. Personal pronouns in Core Altaic. In Robbeets, and Cuyckens, (eds), pp. 211–226.Google Scholar

Johanson, Lars, 1995. On Turkic converb clauses. In Haspelmath, and König, (eds), pp. 313–348.Google Scholar

Johanson, Lars and Robbeets, Martine, 2010. Introduction. In Johanson, Lars and Robbeets, Martine (eds), Transeurasian Verbal Morphology in a Comparative Perspective: Genealogy, Contact, Chance, pp. 1–5. Turcologica, vol. 78. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Kaiser, Stefan, Ichikawa, Yasuko, Kobayashi, Noriko and Yamamoto, Hirofumi, 2001. Japanese: A Comprehensive Grammar. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Ko, Seongyeon, 2012. Tongue Root Harmony and Vowel Contrast in Northeast Asian Languages. PhD dissertation, Cornell University, New York.Google Scholar

Ko, Seongyeon, Whitman, John and Joseph, Andrew, 2014. Comparative consequences of the tongue root harmony analysis for proto-Tungusic, proto-Mongolic, and proto-Korean. In Robbeets, Martine and Bisang, Walter (eds), Paradigm Change in the Transeurasian Languages and Beyond, pp. 141–176. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Kortlandt, Frederik, 2004. Nivkh as a Uralo-Siberian language. In Hyllested, Adam, Jørgensen, Anders Richardt, Larsson, Jenny Helena and Olander, Thomas (eds), Per aspera ad asteriscos: Festschrift in Honour of Jens E. Rasmussen, pp. 285–289. Innsbruck: IBS.Google Scholar

Lee, Ki-Mun and Ramsey, Robert, 2011. A History of the Korean Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Li, Charles N. and Thompson, Sandra A. 1989. Mandarin Chinese: A Functional Reference Grammar. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Maddieson, Ian, 2005. Tone. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 58–61.Google Scholar

Malchukov, Andrej, 2012. Tungusic converbs and a typology of taxis. In Malchukov, Andrej and Whaley, Lindsay J. (eds), Recent Advances in Tungusic Linguistics, pp. 213–228. Turcologica, vol. 89. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Malchukov, Andrej, 2013. Verbalization and insubordination in Siberian languages. In Robbeets, and Cuyckens, (eds), pp. 177–208.Google Scholar

Martin, Samuel Elmo, 1988. A Reference Grammar of Japanese. Tokyo: Tuttle.Google Scholar

Martin, Samuel Elmo, 1992. A Reference Grammar of Korean. Tokyo: Tuttle.Google Scholar

Maslova, Elena, 2003a. A Grammar of Kolyma Yukaghir. Mouton Grammar Library, vol. 27. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Maslova, Elena, 2003b. Tundra Yukaghir. Languages of the World/Materials, vol. 372. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar

Miestamo, Matti, 2005. Standard Negation: The Negation of Declarative Verbal Main Clauses in a Typological Perspective. Empirical Approaches to Language Typology, vol. 31. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Murayama, Shichirō, 1992. Ainugo no kigen [Origins of the Ainu Language]. Tokyo: San’ichi Shobo.Google Scholar

Nedjalkov, Igor V., 1994. Negation in Evenki. In Kahrel, Peter and van den Berg, René (eds), Typological Studies in Negation, pp. 1–34. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Nedjalkov, Igor V., 1995. Converbs in Evenki. In Haspelmath, and König, (eds), pp. 441–464.Google Scholar

Nedjalkov, Igor V., 1997. Evenki: Descriptive Grammar. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Nevskaya, Irina, 2010. Inclusive and Exclusive in Altaic Languages. In Johanson, Lars and Robbeets, Martine (eds), Transeurasian Verbal Morphology in a Comparative Perspective: Genealogy, Contact, Chance, pp. 115–128. Turcologica, vol. 78. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 2012. Selection for M : T pronominals in Eurasia. In Johanson, Lars and Robbeets, Martine (eds), Copies versus Cognates in Bound Morphology, pp. 47–70. Brill’s Studies in Language, Cognition and Culture, vol. 2. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna and Peterson, David, 2005. Personal pronouns. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 546–553.Google Scholar

Nikolaeva, Irina, 1999. Ostyak. Languages of the World/Materials, vol. 305. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar

Norman, Jerry, 1988. Chinese. Cambridge Language Surveys. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Payne, John R., 1985. Negation. In Shopen, Timothy (ed.), Language Typology and Syntactic Description, vol. 1: Clause Structure, pp. 197–242. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Poppe, Nicholas, 1954. Grammar of Written Mongolian. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Poppe, Nicholas, 1955. Introduction to Mongolian Comparative Studies. Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne, vol. 110. Helsinki: Suomalais-Ugrilainen Seura.Google Scholar

Poppe, Nicholas, 1964. Der altaische Sprachtyp. In Spuler, B. et al. (eds), Mongolistik, pp. 1–16. Handbuch der Orientalistik, vol. 5.2. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Rickmeyer, Jens, 1989. Japanisch und der altaische Sprachtyp. Eine Synopsis struktureller Entsprechungen. Bochumer Jahrbuch zur Ostasienforschung 12: 313–323.Google Scholar

Robbeets, Martine, 2005. Is Japanese Related to Korean, Tungusic, Mongolic and Turkic? Turcologica, vol. 64. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Robbeets, Martine, 2007a. How the actional suffix chain connects Japanese to Altaic. Turkic Languages 11 (1): 3–58.Google Scholar

Robbeets, Martine, 2007b. The causative-passive in the Trans-Eurasian languages. Turkic Languages 11 (2): 235–278.Google Scholar

Robbeets, Martine, 2008. If Japanese is Altaic, why is it so simple? In Lubotsky, Alexander, Schaeken, Jos and Wiedenhof, Jeroen (eds), Evidence and Counter-evidence: Essays in Honour of Frederik Kortlandt, vol. 2: General Linguistics. Studies in Slavic and General Linguistics, vol. 33. Amsterdam: Rodopi.Google Scholar

Robbeets, Martine, 2009. Insubordination in Altaic. Journal of Philology, vol. 31. Ural-Altaic Studies 1: 61–79.Google Scholar

Robbeets, Martine, 2010. Transeurasian: Can verbal morphology end the controversy? In Johanson, Lars and Robbeets, Martine (eds), Transeurasian Verbal Morphology in a Comparative Perspective: Genealogy, Contact, Chance, pp. 81–114. Turcologica, vol. 78. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Robbeets, Martine, 2012. Shared verb morphology in the Transeurasian languages: Copy or cognate? In Johanson, Lars and Robbeets, Martine (eds), Copies vs. Cognates in Bound Morphology, pp. 427–446. Brill’s Studies in Language, Cognition and Culture, vol. 3. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Robbeets, Martine, 2013. Genealogically motivated grammaticalization. In Robbeets, and Cuyckens, (eds), pp. 147–175.Google Scholar

Robbeets, Martine, 2014. The development of negation in the Transeurasian languages. In Suihkonen, Pirkko and Whaley, Lindsay J. (eds), On Diversity and Complexity of Languages Spoken in Europe and North and Central Asia, pp. 401–420. Studies in Language Companion Series, vol. 164. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Robbeets, Martine, 2015. Diachrony of Verb Morphology: Japanese and the Transeurasian Languages. Trends in Linguistics, Studies and Monographs, vol. 291. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Robbeets, Martine, 2016. Insubordination and the establishment of genealogical relationship. In Evans, Nicholas and Watanabe, Honore (eds), Insubordination, pp. 209–246. Typological Studies in Language, vol. 115. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Robbeets, Martine and Cuyckens, Hubert (eds), 2013. Shared Grammaticalization: with Special Focus on the Transeurasian Languages. Studies in Language Companion Series, vol. 132. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Rybatzki, Volker, 2003. Middle Mongol. In Janhunen, Juha (ed.), The Mongolic Languages, pp. 57–82. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Shibatani, Masayoshi, 1990. The Languages of Japan. Cambridge Language Surveys. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Sohn, Ho-min, 1994. Korean. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Sohn, Ho-min, 2009. The semantics of clause linking in Korean. In Dixon, R. M. W. and Aikhenvald, Alexandra (eds), The Semantics of Clause Linking: A Cross-linguistic Typology, pp. 285–317. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Stassen, Leon, 1997. Intransitive Predication. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar

Stassen, Leon, 2005a. Predicative possession. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 474–477.Google Scholar

Stassen, Leon, 2005b. Predicative adjectives. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 478–481.Google Scholar

Stassen, Leon, 2005c. Comparative constructions. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 490–493.Google Scholar

Street, John, 1957. The Language of the Secret History of the Mongols. New Haven, CT: American Oriental Society.Google Scholar

Suihkonen, Pirkko, 2002. The Uralic languages. Fennia 180 (1/2): 165–176.Google Scholar

Svantesson, Jan-Olof, 1985. Vowel harmony shift in Mongolian. Lingua 67 (4): 283–327.Google Scholar

Tamura, Suzuko, 2000. The Ainu Language. ICHEL Linguistic Studies, vol. 2. Tokyo: Sanseidō.Google Scholar

Vajda, Edward J., 2004. Ket. Languages of the World/Materials, vol. 204. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar

Vovin, Alexander, 1993. A Reconstruction of Proto-Ainu. Brill’s Japanese Studies Library, vol. 4. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Vovin, Alexander, 2005. A Descriptive and Comparative Grammar of Western Old Japanese, part 1: Sources, Script and Phonology, Lexicon, Nominals. Languages of Asia, vol. 3. Folkestone: Global Oriental.Google Scholar

Vovin, Alexander, 2009. A Descriptive and Comparative Grammar of Western Old Japanese, part 2: Adjectives, Verbs, Adverbs, Conjunctions, Particles, Postpositions. Languages of Asia, vol. 8. Folkestone: Global Oriental.Google Scholar

Weiers, Michael, 1966. Untersuchungen zu einer Historischen Grammatik des Präklassischen Schriftmongolisch. PhD dissertation, Rheinischen Friedrich-Wilhelms-Universität, Bonn.Google Scholar

Werner, Heinrich, 1997. Die ketische Sprache. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Whaley, Lindsay J. and Li, Fengxiang, 2000. Emphatic reduplication in Oroqen and its Altaic context. Linguistics 38 (2): 355–372.Google Scholar

Whitman, John Bradford, 1990. A rule of medial *-r- loss in pre-Old Japanese. In Baldi, Philip (ed.), Linguistic Change and Reconstruction Methodology, pp. 511–545. Trends in Linguistics: Studies and Monographs, vol. 45. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Wohlgemuth, Jan, 2009. A Typology of Verbal Borrowings. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Wrona, Janick, 2008. The nominal and adnominal forms in Old Japanese: Consequences for a reconstruction of pre-Old Japanese syntax. In Frellesvig, Bjarke and Whitman, John (eds), Proto-Japanese: Issues and Prospects, pp. 193–215. Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 294. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Yap, Foong Ha and Matthews, Stephen, 2008. The development of nominalizers in East Asian and Tibeto-Burman languages. In López-Couso, María José and Seoane, Elena (eds), Rethinking Grammaticalization: New Perspectives, pp. 309–341. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Zeitoun, Elizabeth, 2007. A Grammar of Mantauran (Rukai). Taipei: Institute of Linguistics, Academia Sinica.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory D. S., 1998a. Xakas. Languages of the World/Materials, vol. 251. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory D. S., 1998b. Historical aspects of Yakut (Sakha) phonology. Turkic Languages 2 (2): 1–32.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2001. Deaffrication in the Siberian area. In Aronson, Howard I. (ed.), Non-Slavic Languages, vol. 9: Linguistic Studies, pp. 1–17. Columbus, OH: SLAVICA.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2003. Towards a phonological typology of native Siberia. In Holisky, Dee Ann and Tuite, Kevin (eds), Current Trends in Caucasian, East European and Inner Asian Linguistics: Papers in Honor of Howard I. Aronson, pp. 1–22. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2004. The languages of central Siberia: Introduction and overview. In Vajda, Edward (ed.), Languages and Prehistory of Central Siberia, pp. 1–119. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2005. Language Contact in South Central Siberia. Turcologica, vol. 54. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2006. Towards a typology of the Siberian linguistic area. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas: Convergence in Historical and Typological Perspective, pp. 266–300. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2010. Perspectives on the global language extinction crisis: The Oklahoma and Eastern Siberia language hotspots. Revue Roumaine de Linguistique XLV: 129–142.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2011. Language hotspots: What (applied) linguistics and education should do about language endangerment in the twenty-first century. Language and Education 25 (4): 273–289.Google Scholar

Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2015. Russian colonialism and hegemony and Native Siberian languages. In Stolz, Christel (ed.), Language Empires in Comparative Perspective. Colonial and Postcolonial Linguistics, vol. 6. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Aralova, Natalia, Grawunder, Sven and Winter, Bodo, 2012. The acoustic correlates of tongue root vowel harmony in Even (Tungusic). In The 17th International Congress of Phonetic Sciences, pp. 240–243. Hong Kong: City University.Google Scholar

Bergsland, Knut, 1997. Aleut Grammar: Unangam Tunuganaan Achixaasiẋ. Fairbanks: Alaska Native Language Center.Google Scholar

Bulatova, N. J. and Grenoble, Leonore A., 1999. Evenki. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar

Castrén, M. A., 1854. Grammatik der samojedischen Sprachen. Reprinted in 1966 as Uralic and Altaic Series, vol. 53. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University.Google Scholar

Fortescue, Michael, 1998. Language Relations across the Bering Strait: Reassessing the Archaeological and Linguistic Evidence. London and Washington: Cassell.Google Scholar

Georg, Stefan, 2007. Descriptive Grammar of Ket (Yenisei-Ostyak), part 1: Introduction, Phonology, Morphology. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Gilbers, Dicky G., Nerbonne, John and Schaeken, Jos, 2000. Languages in Contact. Studies in Slavic and General Linguistics, vol. 28. Atlanta: Rodopi.Google Scholar

Grenoble, Lenore A., 2000. Morphosyntactic change: The influence of Russian on Evenki. In Gilbers, et al. (eds), pp. 105–120.Google Scholar

Grenoble, Lenore A., 2010. Switch or shift: Code-mixing, contact-induced change and attrition in Russian-Evenki contacts. In Mustajoki, Arto, Protassova, Ekaterina and Vakhtin, Nikolai (eds), Sociolinguistic Approaches to Non-Standard Russian, pp. 139–152. Slavica Helsingensia, vol. 40. Helsinki: Instrumentarium of Linguistics.Google Scholar

Grenoble, Lenore A., 2012a. Contact induced change and language shift: The impact of Russian and the creation of the Russian Language Empire. Paper presented at Language Empires conference, Bremen, Germany, March 2012.Google Scholar

Grenoble, Lenore A., 2012b. Areal typology and syntactic change. Vestnik TGPU (TSPU Bulletin) 116 (1): 101–105.Google Scholar

Grenoble, Lenore A., 2014. Spatial semantics, case and relator nouns in Evenki. In Suihkonen, Pirkko and Whaley, Lindsay J. (eds), On Diversity and Complexity of Languages Spoken in Europe and North and Central Asia, pp. 111–131. Studies in Language Companion Series, vol. 164. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Grishina, N. M., 1977. Upotreblenie slova bang v slozhnom predlozhenii ketskogo jazyka [Use of the word bang in complex sentences in Ket]. Jazyki i Toponimija 4: 102–107.Google Scholar

Gruzdeva, Ekaterina, 2000. Aspects of Russian–Nivkh grammatical interference: The Nivkh imperative. In Gilbers, et al. (eds), pp. f121–134.Google Scholar

Häkkinen, Jaakko, 2012. Early contacts between Uralic and Yukaghir. Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne 264: 91–101.Google Scholar

Joki, A. J., 1977. Die Tungusen und ihre Kontakte mit anderen Völkern. Studia Orientalia 47: 109–118.Google Scholar

Kämpfe, H. R. and Volodin, A. P., 1995. Abriss der Tschuktschischen Grammatik. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar

Kilby, David, 1980. Universals and particulars of the Evenki case system. International Review of Slavic Linguistics 5: 45–74.Google Scholar

Ko, Seongyeon, 2012. Tongue Root Harmony and Vowel Contrasts in Northeast Asian Languages. PhD Dissertation, Cornell University, New York.Google Scholar

Kolesnikova, V. D., 1966. Sintaksis èvenkijskogo jazyka [Evenki Syntax]. Moscow and Leningrad: Nauka.Google Scholar

Kostjakov, M. M., 1976. Ketskie sootvetsvija russkomu slozhnopodchinennomu predlozheniju s pridatochnym vremeni [Ket correspondences to the Russian temporally subordinate clause]. Jazyki i toponimija 1: 56–63.Google Scholar

Krejnovich, E. A., 1958. Jukagirskij jazyk [The Yukaghir Language]. Moscow and Leningrad: Akademija Nauk SSSR.Google Scholar

Krejnovich, E. A., 1982. Issledovanija i materialy po jukagirskomu jazyku [Research and Materials on Yukaghir]. Leningrad: Nauka.Google Scholar

Lebedeva, E. P., 1997. Orochskij jazyk [The Orochi language]. In Romanova, et al. (eds), pp. 215–226.Google Scholar

Mal’chukov, A., 1995. Even. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar

Maslova, E., 2003a. Tundra Yukaghir. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar

Maslova, E., 2003b. A Grammar of Kolyma Yukaghir. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Menovshchikov, G. A. and Vakhtin, N. B., 1983. Èskimosskij jazyk [The Eskimo Language]. Leningrad: Proveshchenie.Google Scholar

Nedjalkov, Igor V., 1997. Evenki. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Nikolaeva, Irina, 2006. A Historical Dictionary of Yukaghir. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Nikolaeva, Irina and Tolskaja, Maria, 2001. A Grammar of Udihe. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Oskolskaya, Sofia and Stoynova, Natasha, 2013. The LA-form: Russian verbs in Nanai speech. Eesti ja soome-ugri keeleteaduse ajakiri / The Journal of Estonian and Finno-Ugric Linguistics 4 (2): 99–116.Google Scholar

Pakendorf, Brigitte, 2007. Contact in the History of the Sakha (Yakuts): Linguistic and Genetic Perspectives. Leiden: LOT.Google Scholar

Petrov, N. E., 1984. Modal’nye slova v jakutskom jazyke [Modal Words in Yakut]. Novosibirsk: Nauka.Google Scholar

Prokof’ev, G. N., 1937a. Sel’kupskij (ostjako-samoedskij) jazyk [The Sel’kup language]. In Prokof’ev, G. N. (ed.), Jazyki i pis’mennost’ narodov severa, part 1, pp. 91–124. Moscow and Leningrad: Uchpedgiz.Google Scholar

Prokof’ev, G. N., 1937b. Nganasanskij (tavgijskij) jazyk [The Nganasan language]. In Prokof’ev, G. N. (ed.), Jazyki i pis’mennost’ narodov severa, part 1, pp. 53–74. Moscow and Leningrad: Uchpedgiz.Google Scholar

de Reuse, W., 1994. Siberian Yupik Eskimo: The Language and its Contacts with Chukchi. Salt Lake City: University of Utah Press.Google Scholar

Romanova, O. et al. (eds), 1997. Jazyki Mira: Mongol’skie jazyki, Tunguso-Man’chzhurskie jazyki, Japonskij jazyk, Korejskij jazyk. Moscow: Indrik.Google Scholar

Sem, L. I., 1997. Nanajskij jazyk [The Nanai language]. In Romanova, et al. (eds), pp. 173–188.Google Scholar

Skorik, P. J., 1986. Kategorii imeni sushchestvitel’nogo v chukotsko-kamchatskikh jazykakh [Categories of the noun in Chukotko-Kamchatkan languages]. In Skorik, P. J. (ed.), Paleoaziatskie jazyki. Novosibirsk: Akademija Nauk SSSR.Google Scholar

Stapert, Eugénie, 2013. Contact-Induced Change in Dolgan: An Investigation into the Role of Linguistic Data for the Reconstruction of a People’s (Pre-)History. PhD Dissertation, Leiden University.Google Scholar

Stebnitskij, S. N., 1994. Ocherki po jazyku i fol’kloru korjakov [Studies on Koryak Language and Folklore]. Moscow: Muzej antropologii i ètnografii RAN.Google Scholar

Sunik, O. P., 1997. Ul’chskij jazyk [The Ul’chi language]. In Romanova, et al. (eds), pp. 248–260.Google Scholar

Tenishev, È. R. et al., 1988. Sravnitel’no-istoricheskaja grammatika tjurkskikh jazykov: Morfologija [Comparative-historical Grammar of the Turk Languages: Morphology]. Moscow: Nauka.Google Scholar

Tsintsius, V. I., 1948. Problemy sravnitel’noj grammatiki tunguso-man’chdzhurskikh jazykov [Problems in the Comparative Grammar of the Manchu-Tungus Languages]. Moscow: Nauka.Google Scholar

Tsintsius, V. I., 1997. Negidal’skij jazyk [Negidal language]. In Romanova, et al. (eds), pp. 188–201.Google Scholar

Tsydendambaev, T. B., 1981. Zametki ob etnicheskikh i jazykovykh kontaktakh burjat i evenkov [Notes on the ethnic and linguistic contacts between Buryat and Evenki]. In Ubrjatova, E. I. (ed.), Jazyki i Fol’klor narodov severa [Languages and Folklore of the Peoples of the North], pp. 70–91 Novosibirsk: Nauka.Google Scholar

Ubrjatova, E. I., 1985. Jazyk noril’skix dolgan [The Language of the Norilsk Dolgan]. Novosibirsk: Nauka.Google Scholar

Vajda, Edward, 2008. Head-negating enclitics in Ket. In Vajda, Edward (ed.), Subordination and Coordination Strategies in North Asian Languages, pp. 179–201. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Vajda, Edward, 2012. The Dene–Yeniseian connection: A reply to G. Starostin. Journal of Language Relationship 8: 138–152.Google Scholar

Zhukova, A. N., 1972. Grammatika korjakskogo jazyka [Grammar of Koryak]. Leningrad: Nauka.Google Scholar

Zhukova, A. N., 1980. Jazyk palanskikh korjakov [The Language of the Palana Koryak]. Leningrad: Nauka.Google Scholar

Bao, Houxing and Yan Sen 鲍厚星, 颜森, 1986. Hunan fangyan de fenqu 湖南方言的分区 [The distribution of dialects in Hunan]. Fangyan 3: 273–276.Google Scholar

Bauer, Robert S., 1996. Identifying the Tai Substratum in Cantonese. In Pan-Asiatic Linguistics: Proceedings of the Fourth International Symposium on Languages and Linguistics V, pp. 1806–1844. Bangkok: Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development, Mahidol University.Google Scholar

Baxter, William and Sagart, Laurent, 2014. Old Chinese: A New Reconstruction. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Beffa, Marie-Lise and Even, Marie-Dominique, 2011. Le mandchou. In Bonvini, et al. (eds), pp. 964–976.Google Scholar

Bisang, Walter, 1992. Das Verb im Chinesischen, Hmong, Vietnamesischen, Thai und Khmer. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar

Bisang, Walter, 1996. Areal typology and grammaticalization: Processes of grammaticalization based on nouns and verbs in East and mainland South East Asian languages. Studies in Language 20 (3): 519–597.Google Scholar

Bisang, Walter, 2009. On the evolution of complexity: Sometimes less is more in East and mainland Southeast Asia. In Sampson, Geoffrey, Gil, David and Trudgill, Peter (eds), Language Complexity as an Evolving Variable, pp. 34–49. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Bonvini, Emilio, Busuttil, Joëlle and Peyraube, Alain (eds), 2011. Dictionnaire des langues. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.Google Scholar

Chappell, Hilary, 2001. Language contact and areal diffusion in Sinitic languages: Problems for typology and genetic affiliation. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra and Dixon, R. M. W. (eds), Areal diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 328–357. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Chappell, Hilary, 2013. Pan-Sinitic object markers: morphology and syntax. In Guangshun, Cao, Chappell, Hilary, Djamouri, Redouane and Wiebusch, Thekla (eds), Breaking Down the Barriers: Interdisciplinary Studies in Chinese Linguistics and Beyond, two volumes, pp. 785–816. Taipei: Academia Sinica.Google Scholar

Chappell, Hilary (ed.), 2015a. Diversity in Sinitic languages. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Chappell, Hilary, 2015b. Linguistic areas in China for differential object marking, passive and comparative constructions. In Chappell, (ed.), pp. 13–52.Google Scholar

Chappell, Hilary, Li, Ming and Peyraube, Alain, 2007. Chinese linguistics and typology: The state of the art. Linguistic Typology 11 (1): 187–211.Google Scholar

Chappell, Hilary and Peyraube, Alain, 2006. The analytic causatives of Early Modern Southern Min in diachronic perspective. In Ho, Dah-an, Cheung, H. S., Pan, W. and Wu, F. (eds), Shan gao shui chang: Linguistic Studies in Chinese and Neighboring Languages, pp. 973–1011. Taipei: Academia Sinica.Google Scholar

Chappell, Hilary and Peyraube, Alain, 2015. The comparative construction in Sinitic languages: Synchronic and diachronic variation. In Chappell, (ed.), pp. 134–152.Google Scholar

Chappell, Hilary, Peyraube, Alain and Wu, Yunji, 2011. A comitative source for object markers in Sinitic languages: kai⁵⁵ in Waxiang and kang⁷ in Southern Min. Journal of East Asian Linguistics 20 (4): 291–338.Google Scholar

Chen, Ping, 1999. Modern Chinese: History and Sociolinguistics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Chen, Yujie, 2015. The semantic differentiation of demonstratives in Sinitic languages. In Chappell, (ed.), pp. 89–109.Google Scholar

Clark, Marybeth, 1974. Submissive verbs as adversatives in some Asian languages. In Liem, Nguyen Dang (ed.), South-East Asian Linguistic Studies, pp. 85–110. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-31. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Clark, Marybeth, 1985. Asking questions in Hmong and other South-East Asian languages. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 8 (2): 60–67.Google Scholar

Clark, Marybeth, 1989. Hmong and areal Southeast Asia. In Bradley, David (ed.), Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics, vol. 11: South-East Asian Syntax, pp. 175–230. Pacific Linguistics, vol. A-77. Canberra: Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University.Google Scholar

Diffloth, Gérard, 2011. Les langues austroasiatiques. In Bonvini, et al. (eds), pp. 1099–1101.Google Scholar

Diller, Anthony, 2008. Introduction. In Diller, A., Edmondson, J. and Luo, Y. (eds), The Tai-Kadai Languages, pp. 3–8. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar

Djamouri, Redouane, 2015. Object positioning in Tangwang. In Guangshun, Cao, Djamouri, Redouane and Peyraube, Alain (eds), Languages in Contact in Northwestern China. Monograph series of the Cahiers de linguistique Asie orientale. Paris: CRLAO.Google Scholar

Dong, Hongxun, 1907. 《古丈坪厅志》Guzhangping Tingzhi [Guzhang Gazetteer]. For more information, see parts reprinted in Wu and Shen 2010.Google Scholar

van Driem, George, 2011. The Trans-Himalayan phylum and its implications for population prehistory. Communication on Contemporary Anthropology 5: 135–142.Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew, 2003. Word order in Sino-Tibetan languages from a typological and geographical perspective. In Thurgood, Graham and LaPolla, Randy (eds), The Sino-Tibetan Languages, pp. 43–55. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar

Dwyer, Arianne, 1992. Altaic elements in the Linxia dialect. Journal of Chinese Linguistics 20 (1): 160–178.Google Scholar

Enfield, Nicholas J., 2005. Areal linguistics and Mainland South-East Asia. Annual Review of Anthropology 34: 181–206.Google Scholar

Hashimoto, Mantaro, 1974. Aspect and tense in Asian languages. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages 1: 15–25.Google Scholar

Hashimoto, Mantaro, 1976a. Language diffusion on the Asian continent: Problems of typological diversity in Sino-Tibetan. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages 3: 49–65.Google Scholar

Hashimoto, Mantaro, 1976b. The double object construction in Chinese. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages 6: 33–42.Google Scholar

Hashimoto, Mantaro, 1986. The altaicization of Northern Chinese. In McCoy, John and Light, Timothy (eds), Contributions to Sino-Tibetan Studies, pp. 76–97. Leiden: E.J. Brill.Google Scholar

Hashimoto, Mantaro, 1987. Hanyu beidongshi de lishi, quyu fazhan [The history and areal development of the Chinese passive]. Zhongguo Yuwen 1: 36–49.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd, 1997. Cognitive Foundations of Grammar. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd and Kuteva, Tania, 2002. Word Lexicon of Grammaticalization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2010. Language contact: Reconsideration and reassessment. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 1–28. Chichester, UK: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar

Huang, Yuanwei, 1997. The interaction between Zhuang and the Yue (Cantonese) dialects. In Edmondson, Jerold A. and Solnit, David B. (eds), Comparative Kadai: The Tai Branch, pp. 57–76. Dallas, TX: Summer Institute of Linguistics and the University of Texas at Arlington.Google Scholar

Janhunen, Juha, Peltomaa, Marja, Sandman, Erika and Dongzhou, Xiawu, 2008. Wutun. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar

Kwok, Bit-Chee, 2010. Yǔyán Jiēchù zhōng de Yǔfǎ Biànhuà: Lùn Nánníng Yùeyǔ ‘Shúyǔ + Bīnyǔ + Bǔyǔ’ Jiégòu de Láiyuán 語言接觸中的語法變化：論南寧粵語「述語＋賓語＋補語」結構的來源 [Grammatical change in language contact: on the origin of the ‘verb + object + complement’ construction in Nanning Yue]. In Hung-nin Samuel Cheung 張洪年 and Song Hing Chang 張雙慶 (eds), Diachronic Change and Language Contact: Dialects in South East China 歷時演變與語言接觸 – 中國東南方言, pp. 201–216. Journal of Chinese Linguistics Monograph, vol. 24.Google Scholar

Lamarre, Christine, 2015. The morphologization of verb suffixes in Northern Chinese. In Guangshun, Cao, Djamouri, Redouane and Peyraube, Alain (eds), Languages in Contact in Northwestern China, pp. 275–307. Monograph series of the Cahiers de linguistique Asie orientale. Paris: CRLAO.Google Scholar

Lewis, Paul (ed.), 2009. Ethnologue: Languages of the World, 16th edition. Dallas, TX: SIL International. www.ethnologue.com Google Scholar

Lewis, M. Paul, Simons, Gary F. and Fennig, Charles D. (eds), 2015. Ethnologue: Languages of the World, 18th edition. Dallas, TX: SIL International. www.ethnologue.com Google Scholar

Li, Fang-kuei, 1939. Languages and dialects. In The Chinese Yearbook (1938–1939), pp. 44–46. Shanghai: Commercial Press.Google Scholar

Li, Fang-Kuei, 1977. A Handbook of Comparative Tai. Honolulu: The University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Li, Keyou and Li, Meiling, 1998. Hanyu Qinghaihua mingci de tedian. 汉语青海话名词的特点 [Features of nouns in the Chinese of Qinghai]. Qinghai Minzu Yanjiu 青海民族研究 3: 25–34.Google Scholar

Matisoff, James, 1991a. Grammatization in Lahu. In Traugott, Elizabeth Closs and Heine, Bernd (eds), Approaches to Grammaticalization, vol. 2, pp. 383–453. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Matisoff, James, 1991b. Sino-Tibetan linguistics: Present state and future prospects. Annual Review of Anthropology 20: 469–504.Google Scholar

Milliken, Margaret, 1998. The classifier Gij in northern Zhuang. In Burusphat, S. (ed.), The International Conference on Tai Studies, pp. 173–200. Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development. Bangkok: Mahidol University.Google Scholar

Niederer, Barbara, 2011. Les langues hmong-mjen (miao-yao). In Bonvini, et al. (eds), pp. 1283–1299.Google Scholar

Norman, Jerry, 1982. Four notes on Chinese-Altaic linguistic contacts. Tsinghua Journal of Chinese Studies 14 (1/2): 243–247.Google Scholar

Norman, Jerry, 1988. Chinese. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Norman, Jerry and Mei, Tsu-Lin, 1976. The Austroasiatics in Ancient South China: Some lexical evidence. Monumenta Serica 32: 274–301.Google Scholar

Ouyang, Jueya, 1995. Liangguang Yue fangyan yu Zhuangyu de zhong zhong guanxi 两广粤方言粤语与状语的种种关系 [Different kinds of relationships between the Yue dialects of Guangxi and Guangdong and Zhuangyu]. Minzu Yuwen 民族语文 6: 49–52.Google Scholar

Peyraube, Alain, 2008. Languages in contact in Northwestern China: Convergence, mixed languages or linguistic area? Paper delivered at the 16th Annual Conference of the International Association of Chinese Linguistics, Beijing, 29 May to 2 June 2008.Google Scholar

Peyraube, Alain, 2015. A comparative analysis of the case system in some Northwestern Sinitic languages. In Guangshun, Cao, Djamouri, Redouane and Peyraube, Alain (eds), Languages in Contact in Northwestern China. Monograph series of the Cahiers de linguistique Asie orientale. Paris: CRLAO.Google Scholar

Sagart, Laurent, 2005. Sino-Tibetan-Austronesian: An updated and improved argument. In Sagart, L., Blench, R. and Sanchez-Mazas, A. (eds), The Peopling of East Asia: Putting together Archaeology, Linguistics and Genetics, pp. 161–176. London: RoutledgeCurzon.Google Scholar

Shearer, Walter and Hongkai, Sun, 2002. Speakers of the Non-Han Languages and Dialects of China. Lewiston: Edwin Mellen Press.Google Scholar

de Sousa, Hilário 2013. Nánníng Shàngyáo Pínghuà de Yīxiē Míngcí Duǎnyǔ Xiànxiàng Duìbǐ Yánjiū 南宁上尧平话的一些名词短语现象对比研究 [Comparative studies of some noun phrase phenomena in Nánníng Shàngyáo Pínghuà]. In Liú 刘丹青, Dānqīng, Zhōu 周磊, Léi and Xuē 薛才德, Cáidé (eds), Hànyǔ Fāngyán Yǔfǎ Yánjiū de Xīnshìjiǎo – Dì Wǔ Jiè Hànyǔ Fāngyán Yǔfǎ Guójì Xuéshù Yántǎohuì Lùnwénjí 汉语方言语法研究的新视角 – 第五届汉语方言语法国际学术研讨会论文集 [New Viewpoints in the Studies of Grammar of the Chinese Dialects: Proceedings of the Fifth International Conference on Syntax of Chinese Dialects], pp. 141–160. Shanghai: Shanghai Educational Publishing House 上海教育出版社.Google Scholar

de Sousa, Hilario, 2015. Language contact in Nanning: From the point of view of Nanning Pinghua and Nanning Cantonese. In Chappell, (ed.), pp. 157–189.Google Scholar

Sposato, A., 2014. Word order in Miao-Yao (Hmong-Mien). Linguistic Typology 18 (1): 83–140.Google Scholar

Stassen, Leon, 1985. Comparison and Universal Grammar. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Stolz, Thomas, 1999. Comitatives vs. instrumentals vs. agents. In Bisang, Walter (ed.), Aspects of Typology and Universals, pp. 153–174. Studia Typologica, vol. 1. Berlin: Akademie Verlag.Google Scholar

Wu, Fuxiang, 2013. Nanfang minzu yuyan bijiaoju yuxu de yanbian he bianyi 南方民族语言比较语序的演变和变异 [Development and variation in the word order of comparatives in the minority languages of Southern China]. In Guangshun, Cao, Chappell, Hilary, Djamouri, Redouane and Wiebusch, Thekla (eds), Breaking Down the Barriers: Interdisciplinary Studies in Chinese Linguistics and Beyond, two volumes, pp. 831–864. Taipei: Academia Sinica.Google Scholar

Wu, Yunji, 2005. A Synchronic and Diachronic Study of the Grammar of the Chinese Xiang Dialects. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Wu, Yunji and Cao, Xilei, 2008. Xiangxi Waxianghua he Xinan guanhua biao chuzhishi de ‘gen’ suo yinfa de yiwen 湘西瓦乡话和西南官话表处置的‘跟’所引发的疑问 [The unusual case of [gēn] 跟 used as a disposal marker in Waxiang and the Southwestern Mandarin of Western Hunan, China]. Zhongguo Yuwen Yanjiu 《中國語文研究》[Chinese Language Studies]. 26 (2): 1–14.Google Scholar

Wu, Yunji and Shen, Ruiqing, 2010. 湘西古丈瓦乡话调查报告Xiangxi Guzhang Waxianghua Diaocha Baogao [Research Report on the Waxiang Language of Guzhang, Western Hunan]. Shanghai: Jiaoyu Chubanshe.Google Scholar

Wurm, Stephen and Li, Rong (eds), 1987. Language Atlas of China 中国语言地图集. Zhongguo Yuyan Dituji. Hong Kong: Longman.Google Scholar

Xiong, Zhenghui and Zhang, Zhenxing, 2008. 汉语方言的分区 Hanyu fangyan de fenqu [The distribution of Chinese dialects]. 方言 Fangyan 2: 97–108.Google Scholar

Xu, Liejiong and Peyraube, Alain, 1997. On the double-object construction and the oblique construction in Cantonese. Studies in Language 21 (1): 105–127.Google Scholar

Yue, Anne O., 2003. Chinese dialects: Grammar. In Thurgood, Graham and LaPolla, Randy (eds), The Sino-Tibetan Languages, pp. 84–125. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar

Yue-Hashimoto, Anne, 1991. The Yue dialects. In Wang, William S-Y. (ed.), Languages and Dialects of China, pp. 294–324. Journal of Chinese Linguistics, Monograph Series, vol. 3. Berkeley: Project on Linguistic Analysis.Google Scholar

Zhang, Zhenxing (ed.), 2012. Zhongguo Yuyan Dituji Di’er ban 中国语言地图集: 第二版 [Language Atlas of China], second edition. Beijing: Commercial Press.Google Scholar

Zhu, Yongzhong, Chuluu, Ujiyediin, Slater, Keith and Stuart, Kevin, 1997. Gangou Chinese dialect: A comparative study of a strongly altaicized Chinese dialect and its Mongolic neighbor. Anthropos 92: 433–450.Google Scholar

Abbi, Anvita, 2012. Dictionary of the Great Andamanese Language: English–Great Andamanese–Hindi. Delhi: Ratna Sagar.Google Scholar

Abbi, Anvita, 2013. A Grammar of the Great Andamanese Language: An Ethnolinguistic Study. Leiden: Brill Academic.Google Scholar

Abramson, Arthur S. and L-Thongkum, Theraphan, 2009. A fuzzy boundary between tone languages and voice-register languages. In Fant, Gunnar, Fujisaki, Hiroya and Shen, Jiaxuen (eds), Frontiers in Phonetics and Speech Science, pp. 149–155. Beijing: The Commercial Press.Google Scholar

Adelaar, Alexander and Himmelmann, Nikolaus P., 2005. The Austronesian Languages of Asia and Madagascar. London: Routledge Curzon.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2000. Classifiers: A Typology of Noun Categorization Devices. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Alves, Mark J., 2001. What’s so Chinese about Vietnamese? In Thurgood, Graham W. (ed.), Papers from the Ninth Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society, pp. 221–242. Phoenix: Arizona State University.Google Scholar

Alves, Mark J., 2006. A Grammar of Pacoh: A Mon-Khmer Language of the Central Highlands of Vietnam (Shorter Grammars). Pacific Linguistics, vol. 580. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Alves, Mark J., 2009. Sino-Vietnamese grammatical vocabulary and sociolinguistic conditions for borrowing. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 1: 1–9.Google Scholar

Alves, Mark J., 2015. Morphological functions among Mon-Khmer languages: Beyond the basics. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 524–550.Google Scholar

Ammerman, Albert J. and Cavalli-Sforza, Luigi L., 1971. Measuring the rate of spread of early farming in Europe. Man 6 (4): 674–688.Google Scholar

Ansaldo, Umberto, 1999. Comparative Constructions in Sinitic: Areal Typology and Patterns of Grammaticalisation. Dissertation, Stockholm University, Stockholm.Google Scholar

Ansaldo, Umberto and Matthews, Stephen J., 2001. Typical creoles and simple languages: The case of Sinitic. Linguistic Typology 5 (2/3): 311–324.Google Scholar

Bauer, Robert S., 1996. Identifying the Tai substratum in Cantonese. In Pan-Asiatic Linguistics: Proceedings of the Fourth International Symposium on Languages and Linguistics, vol. V, pp. 1806–1844. Bangkok: Mahidol University.Google Scholar

Bellwood, Peter, 1992. Southeast Asia before prehistory. In Tarling, (ed.), vol. 1, pp. 55–136.Google Scholar

Benjamin, Geoffrey, 2006. Hervey’s ‘Kenaboi’: Lost Malayan language or forest-collecting taboo jargon? Paper presented at the 10th International Association of Historians of Asia Conference, Singapore, October 1986.Google Scholar

Bisang, Walter, 1991. Verb serialization, grammaticalization and attractor positions in Chinese, Hmong, Vietnamese, Thai and Khmer. In Seiler, Hansjakob and Premper, Waldfried (eds), Partizipation: Das sprachliche Erfassen von Sachverhalten, pp. 509–562. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar

Blench, Roger, 2011. The role of agriculture in the evolution of Mainland Southeast Asian language phyla. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 125–152.Google Scholar

Blench, Roger, 2015. The origins of nominal classification markers in MSEA languages: Convergence, contact and some African parallels. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 551–578.Google Scholar

Blench, Roger and Post, Mark W., 2013. Re-thinking Sino-Tibetan phylogeny from the perspective of North East Indian languages. In Hill, Nathan and Owen-Smith, Thomas (eds), Trans-Himalayan Linguistics, pp. 71–104. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Blust, Robert, 1994. The Austronesian settlement of Mainland Southeast Asia. In Adams, Karen L. and Hudak, Thomas John (eds), Papers from the Second Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society, pp. 25–83. Tempe, AZ: Arizona State University.Google Scholar

Blust, Robert, 2013a. Southeast Asian islands and Oceania: Austronesian linguistic history. In Bellwood, Peter (ed.), The Encyclopedia of Global Human Migration, vol. 1: Prehistory. Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar

Blust, Robert, 2013b. The Austronesian Languages (revised edition). Canberra: Asia-Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Bo, Wenze, 2002. A Study of Mulao. Beijing: The Nationalities Press.Google Scholar

Bon, Noëllie, 2014. Une Grammaire de la Langue Stieng, Langue en Danger du Cambodge et du Vietnam. Dissertation, Université Lumière Lyon 2, Lyon.Google Scholar

Bradley, David, 1995. Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics, vol. 13: Studies in Burmese Languages. Pacific Linguistics, vol. A-83. Canberra: Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University.Google Scholar

Bradley, David, 2007. Language endangerment in China and Mainland Southeast Asia. In Brenzinger, Matthias (ed.), Language Diversity Endangered, pp. 278–302. Trends in Linguistics: Studies and Monographs. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

van Breugel, Seino, 2014. A Grammar of Atong. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Brunelle, Marc, 2009. Contact-induced change? Register in three Cham dialects. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 2: 1–22.Google Scholar

Brunelle, Marc and Kirby, James, 2015. Re-assessing tonal diversity and geographical convergence in Mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 80–108.Google Scholar

Brunelle, Marc, Dương, Nguyễn Duy and Hùng, Nguyễn Khắc, 2010. A laryngographic and laryngoscopic study of Northern Vietnamese tones. Phonetica 67: 147–169.Google Scholar

Buakaw, Supakit, 2012. A Phonological Study of Palaung Dialects Spoken in Thailand and Myanmar, with Focuses on Vowels and Final Nasals. Doctoral dissertation, Mahidol University, Bangkok.Google Scholar

Bulbeck, David, 2011. Biological and cultural evolution in the population and culture history of Homo sapiens in Malaya. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 207–255.Google Scholar

Burenhult, Niclas, 2005. A Grammar of Jahai. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 566. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Burenhult, Niclas, 2006. Body part terms in Jahai. Language Sciences 28: 162–180.Google Scholar

Burenhult, Niclas, Kruspe, Nicole and Dunn, Michael, 2011. Language history and culture groups among Austroasiatic-speaking foragers of the Malay Peninsula. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 257–275.Google Scholar

Burenhult, Niclas and Majid, Asifa, 2011. Olfaction in Aslian ideology and language. The Senses and Society 6 (1): 19–29.Google Scholar

Burenhult, Niclas and Wegener, Claudia, 2009. Preliminary notes on the phonology, orthography and vocabulary of Semnam (Austroasiatic, Malay Peninsula). Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 1: 283–312.Google Scholar

Burling, Robbins, 2004. The Language of the Modhipur Mandi (Garo), vol. I: Grammar. New Delhi: Bibliophile South Asia.Google Scholar

Butler, Becky, 2015. Approaching a phonological understanding of the sesquisyllable with phonetic evidence from Khmer and Bunong. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 437–493.Google Scholar

Capell, Arthur, 1979. Further typological studies in southeast Asian languages. In Liem, Nguyen Dang (ed.), South-East Asian Linguistic Studies, vol. 3, pp. 1–42. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Cavalli-Sforza, Luigi, Menozzi, Paolo and Piazza, Alberto, 1993. Demic expansions and human evolution. Science 259 (5095): 639–646.Google Scholar

Chappell, Hilary, 2001. Language contact and areal diffusion in Sinitic languages. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, R. M. W. (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 328–357. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Chappell, John and Shackleton, N. J., 1986. Oxygen isotopes and sea level. Nature 324 (6093): 137–140.Google Scholar

Chen, Guoqing, 2005. Kemieyu yanjiu [A Study of Kemie]. Beijing: Minzu chubanshe.Google Scholar

Clark, Marybeth, 1989. Hmong and areal South-East Asia. In Bradley, David (ed.), Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics, vol. 11: Southeast Asian Syntax, pp. 175–230. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Clark, Marybeth and Prasithrathsint, Amara, 1985. Synchronic lexical derivation in Southeast Asian languages. In Ratanakul, Suriya and Premsrirat, Suwilai (eds), Southeast Asian Linguistic Studies Presented to André-G. Haudricourt, pp. 34–81. Bangkok: Mahidol University.Google Scholar

Comrie, Bernard (ed.), 1990. The Major Languages of East and South-East Asia. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Comrie, Bernard, 2007. Areal typology of mainland Southeast Asia: What we learn from the WALS maps. In Kullavanijaya, Pranee (ed.), Trends in Thai Linguistics, pp. 18–47. Special issue of Manusya 13. Bangkok: Chulalongkorn University.Google Scholar

Cooke, Joseph R., 1968. Pronominal Reference in Thai, Burmese and Vietnamese. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Coupe, A. R., 2003. A Phonetic and Phonological Description of Ao: A Tibeto-Burman Language of Nagaland, North-East India. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Coupe, A. R., 2007. A Grammar of Mongsen Ao. Mouton Grammar Library, vol. 39. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Dahl, Östen, 2008. An exercise in ‘a posteriori’ language sampling. Sprachtypologie und Universalienforschung 61 (3): 208–220.Google Scholar

Diffloth, Gérard, 2011. Austroasiatic word histories: Boat, husked rice and taro. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 295–313.Google Scholar

Diller, Anthony V. N., Edmondson, Jerold A. and Luo, Yongxian, 2008. The Tai-Kadai Languages. London: RoutledgeCurzon.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark, Hetherington, Rebecca, McElvenny, James and Dawson, Virginia, 2013. World Phonotactics Database. Canberra: Australian National University. http://phonotactics.anu.edu.au Google Scholar

van Driem, George, 2007. Austroasiatic phylogeny and the Austroasiatic homeland in light of recent population genetic studies. Mon-Khmer Studies 37: 1–14.Google Scholar

van Driem, George, 2011. Rice and the Austroasiatic and Hmong-Mien homelands. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 361–390.Google Scholar

van Driem, George, 2013. Trans-Himalayan. In Hill, Nathan and Owen-Smith, Thomas (eds), Trans-Himalayan Linguistics. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S. and Haspelmath, Martin (eds), 2013. The World Atlas of Language Structures Online. Leipzig: Max Planck Institute for Evolutionary Anthropology. http://wals.info Google Scholar

Dunn, Michael, Burenhult, Niclas, Kruspe, Nicole, Tufvesson, Sylvia and Becker, Neele, 2011. Aslian linguistic prehistory: A case study in computational phylogenetics. Diachronica 28 (3): 291–323.Google Scholar

Dunn, Michael, Kruspe, Nicole and Burenhult, Niclas, 2013. Time and place in the prehistory of the Aslian languages. Human Biology 85: 383–399.Google Scholar

Edmondson, Jerold A. and Esling, John H., 2006. The valves of the throat and their functioning in tone, vocal register and stress: laryngoscopic case studies. Phonology 23 (2): 157–191.Google Scholar

Edmondson, Jerold A. and Gregerson, Kenneth J., 2007. The languages of Vietnam: Mosaics and expansions. Language and Linguistics Compass 1 (6): 727–749.Google Scholar

Enfield, N. J., 2005. Areal linguistics and mainland Southeast Asia. Annual Review of Anthropology 34: 181–206.Google Scholar

Enfield, N. J., 2006. Languages as historical documents: The endangered archive in Laos. South East Asia Research 14 (3): 471–488.Google Scholar

Enfield, N. J., 2007. A Grammar of Lao. Mouton Grammar Library, vol. 38. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Enfield, N. J. (ed.), 2011a. Dynamics of Human Diversity: The Case of Mainland Southeast Asia. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Enfield, N. J., 2011b. Introduction: Dynamics of Human Diversity in Mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, (ed.) pp. 1–8.Google Scholar

Enfield, N. J., 2011c. Linguistic diversity in mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 63–80.Google Scholar

Enfield, N. J., 2013. Relationship Thinking: Agency, Enchrony, and Human Sociality. New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Enfield, N. J., 2015. The Utility of Meaning: What Words Mean and Why. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Enfield, N. J. and Comrie, Bernard (eds), 2015. The Languages of Mainland Southeast Asia: The State of the Art. Berlin and Boston: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Enfield, N. J. and Diffloth, Gérard, 2009. Phonology and sketch grammar of Kri, a Vietic language of Laos. Cahiers de Linguistique – Asie Orientale 38 (1): 3–69.Google Scholar

Ferlus, Michel, 2014. Arem, a Vietic Language. Mon-Khmer Studies 43 (1): 1–15.Google Scholar

Fix, Alan, 2011. Origin of genetic diversity among Malaysian Orang Asli: An alternative to the demic diffusion model. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 277–291.Google Scholar

Gai, Xingzhi, 2002. A Study of Tanglang. Beijing: The Nationalities Press.Google Scholar

Giaphong, Suchada, 2004. Plang Grammar as Spoken in Huay Namkhun Village, Chiang Rai Province. MA thesis, Mahidol University, Bangkok.Google Scholar

Gil, David, 2015. The Mekong-Mamberamo linguistic area. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 262–351.Google Scholar

Goddard, Cliff, 2005. The Languages of East and Southeast Asia. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Grant, Anthony and Sidwell, Paul, 2005. Chamic and Beyond: Studies in Mainland Austronesian Languages. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Grinevald, Colette, 2000. A morphosyntactic typology of classifiers. In Senft, Gunter (ed.), Systems of Nominal Classification, pp. 50–92.Google Scholar

Hạ, Kiều Phương, 2010. Prosody of Vietnamese from an interactional perspective: ờ, ừ and vâng in backchannels and requests for information. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 3 (1): 56–76.Google Scholar

Hạ, Kiều Phương, 2013. Prosodic means in repair initiation as an activity in Northern Vietnamese conversation. In Hole, Daniel and Löbel, Elisabeth (eds), Linguistics of Vietnamese: An International Survey, pp. 35–54. Berlin and New York: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Haas, Mary Rosamond, 1969. Sibling terms as used by marriage partners. Southwestern Journal of Anthropology 25 (3): 228–235.Google Scholar

Haiman, John, 2011. Cambodian: Khmer. London Oriental and African Language Library, vol. 16. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Hajek, John, 1998. Kenaboi: An extinct unclassified language of the Malay Peninsula. Mon-Khmer Studies 28: 137–149.Google Scholar

Hartmann, John, 1998. A linguistic geography and history of Tai Meuang-Fai (Ditch-Dike) techno-culture. Language and Linguistics 16 (2): 67–101.Google Scholar

Haspelmath, Martin, Dryer, Matthew S., Gil, David and Comrie, Bernard (eds), 2005. The World Atlas of Language Structures. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Henderson, Eugénie J. A., 1952. The main features of Cambodian pronunciation. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 14: 149–174.Google Scholar

Henderson, Eugénie J. A., 1965. The topography of certain phonetic and morphological characteristics of South East Asian languages. Lingua 15: 400–434.CrossRef Google Scholar

Henderson, Eugénie J. A., 1967. Grammar and tone in South East Asian languages. Wissenschaftliche Zeitschrift der Karl-Marx-Universität Leipzig 16 (1/2): 171–178.Google Scholar

Higbie, James and Thinsan, Snea, 2003. Thai Reference Grammar: The Structure of Spoken Thai. Bangkok: Orchid Press.Google Scholar

Higham, C., 2002. Early Cultures of Mainland Southeast Asia. Bangkok: River Books.Google Scholar

Hyslop, Gwendolyn, Morey, Stephen and Post, Mark W. (eds), 2011. North East Indian Linguistics, vol. 3. New Delhi: Cambridge University Press India.Google Scholar

Hyslop, Gwendolyn, Morey, Stephen and Post, Mark W. (eds), 2012. North East Indian Linguistics, vol. 4. New Delhi: Cambridge University Press India.Google Scholar

Hyslop, Gwendolyn, Morey, Stephen and Post, Mark W. (eds), 2013. North East Indian Linguistics, vol. 5. New Delhi: Cambridge University Press India.Google Scholar

Iwasaki, Shoichi and Horie, Preeya Ingkaphirom, 2005. A Reference Grammar of Thai. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Jacquesson, François, 2004. Le Deuri: Langue Tibéto-Birmane d’Assam. Leuven, Paris and Dudley, MA: Peeters.Google Scholar

Jenny, Mathias and Sidwell, Paul (eds), 2015. Handbook of the Austroasiatic Languages. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Jonsson, Hjorleifur, 2011. Ethnology and the issue of human diversity in Mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 109–122.Google Scholar

Jonsson, Hjorleifur, 2014. Slow Anthropology: Negotiating Difference with the Iu Mien. Ithaca, NY: Cornell Southeast Asia Program Publications.Google Scholar

Konnerth, Linda, 2014. A Grammar of Karbi. Dissertation, University of Oregon, Eugene, OR.Google Scholar

Kosaka, Ryuichi, 2000. A Descriptive Study of the Lachi Language: Syntactic Description, Historical Reconstruction and Genetic Relation. Doctoral dissertation, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies, Tokyo.Google Scholar

Kölver, Ulrike, 1991. Local prepositions and serial verb constructions in Thai. In Seiler, Hansjakob and Premper, Waldfried (eds), Partizipation: Das sprachliche Erfassen von Sachverhalten, pp. 485–508. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar

Kruspe, Nicole, 2004. A Grammar of Semelai. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Larish, Michael D., 2005. Moken and Moklen. In Himmelmann, Nikolaus P. and Adelaar, Alexander (eds), The Austronesian Languages of Asia and Madagascar, pp. 513–533. London: RoutledgeCurzon.Google Scholar

Lebar, Frank, Hickey, Gerald and Musgrave, John, 1964. Ethnic Groups of Mainland Southeast Asia. New Haven, CT: HRAF Press.Google Scholar

Li, Daqin, 2003. A Study of Geman. Beijing: The Nationalities Press.Google Scholar

Li, Daqin, 2004. Sulong Yu Yan Jiu [A Study of Sulong]. Beijing: Minzu Chubanshe.Google Scholar

Li, Yongsui, 2003. A Study of Sangkong. Beijing: The Nationalities Press.Google Scholar

Lidz, Liberty A., 2010. A Descriptive Grammar of Yongning Na (Mosuo). Doctoral dissertation, University of Texas at Austin.Google Scholar

Luong, H. V., 1988. Discursive practices and power structure: Person-referring forms and sociopolitical struggles in colonial Vietnam. American Ethnologist 15 (2): 239–253.Google Scholar

Luong, H. V., 1990. Discursive Practices and Linguistic Meanings: The Vietnamese System of Person Reference. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Majid, Asifa and Burenhult, Niclas, 2014. Odors are expressible in language, as long as you speak the right language. Cognition 130 (2): 266–270.Google Scholar

Mao, Zongwu and Li, Yunbing, 2002. A Study of Jiongnai. Beijing: Central Nationalities University Press.Google Scholar

Mao, Zongwu and Li, Yunbing, 2007. Younuoyu Yanjiu [A Study of Younuo]. Beijing: Minzu University of China Publishing House.Google Scholar

Matisoff, James A., 1973. Tonogenesis in Southeast Asia. In Hyman, Larry M. (ed.), Southern California Occasional Papers in Linguistics, no. 1, pp. 72–95. Los Angeles: University of Southern California.Google Scholar

Matisoff, James A., 1991. Areal and universal dimensions of grammatization in Lahu. In Traugott, Elizabeth Closs and Heine, Bernd (eds), Approaches to Grammaticalization, pp. 383–453. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Matisoff, James A., 2003a. Handbook of Proto-Tibeto-Burman. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Matisoff, James A., 2003b. Aslian: Mon-Khmer of the Malay Peninsula. Mon-Khmer Studies 33: 1–58.Google Scholar

Matisoff, James A., 2015. Re-examining the genetic position of Jingpho: Putting flesh on the bones of the Jingpho/Luish relationship. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 109–150.Google Scholar

Mayuree, Thawornpat, 2006. Gong: An Endangered Language of Thailand. Doctoral dissertation, Mahidol University, Bangkok.Google Scholar

Michaud, Jean (ed.), 2010. Editorial: Zomia and beyond (Special Issue). Journal of Global History 5 (2): 187–214.Google Scholar

Morey, Stephen, 2005. The Tai Languages of Assam: A Grammar and Texts. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Morey, Stephen, 2010. Turung: A Variety of Singpho Language Spoken in Assam. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Morey, Stephen and Post, Mark W. (eds), 2008. North East Indian Linguistics, vol. 1. New Delhi: Cambridge University Press India.Google Scholar

Morey, Stephen and Post, Mark W. (eds), 2010. North East Indian Linguistics, vol. 2. New Delhi: Cambridge University Press India.Google Scholar

Muysken, Pieter (ed.), 2008. From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Nettle, Daniel, 1999. Linguistic Diversity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

Nonaka, Angela M., 2004. The forgotten endangered languages: Lessons on the importance of remembering from Thailand’s Ban Khor sign language. Language in Society 33 (5): 737–767.CrossRef Google Scholar

O’Connor, Richard A., 1995. Agricultural change and ethnic succession in Southeast Asian states: A case for regional anthropology. The Journal of Asian Studies 54 (4): 968–996.Google Scholar

Oppenheimer, Stephen, 2011. MtDNA variation and southward Holocene human dispersals within Mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 81–108.Google Scholar

Oxenham, Marc and Tayles, Nancy, 2006. Bioarchaeology of Southeast Asia. New York: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Phattharathanit, Srichomthong, 2012. Identity maintenance in Lanna (Northern Thai). Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 5: 67–84.Google Scholar

Pittayaporn, Pittayawat, 2009. Proto-Southwestern-Thai: A new reconstruction. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 2: 119–143.Google Scholar

Pittayaporn, Pittayawat, 2015. Typologizing sesquisyllabicity: The role of structural analysis in the study of linguistic diversity in Mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 494–523.Google Scholar

Ploykaew, Pornsawan, 2001. Samre Grammar. Doctoral dissertation, Mahidol University, Bangkok.Google Scholar

Post, Mark W., 2007. A Grammar of Galo. Dissertation, La Trobe University, Melbourne.Google Scholar

Post, Mark W., 2011. Prosody and typological drift in Austroasiatic and Tibeto-Burman: Against ‘Indosphere’ and ‘Sinosphere’. In Srichampa, S., Sidwell, Paul and Gregerson, K. J. (eds), Austroasiatic Studies: Papers from International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics (ICAAL4), pp. 198–211. Special issue of Mon-Khmer Studies 3. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Post, Mark W. 2015. Morphosyntactic reconstruction in an areal-historical context: A pre-historical relationship between North East India and Mainland Southeast Asia? In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 205–261.Google Scholar

Ratliff, Martha, 2010. Hmong-Mien Language History. Studies in Language Change, vol. 8. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Ratliff, Martha, 2015. Word-initial prenasalization in Southeast Asia: A historical perspective. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 29–48.Google Scholar

Sagart, Laurent, 2011. The Austroasiatics: East to west or west to east? In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 345–359.Google Scholar

Sagart, Laurent, Blench, Roger and Sanchez-Mazas, A. (eds), 2005. The Peopling of East Asia: Putting Together Archaeology, Linguistics and Genetics. New York: RoutledgeCurzon.Google Scholar

Samarina, Irina, 2011. Jazyki gelao: Materialy k sopostavitel’nomu slovarju kadajskich jazykov [Gael Languages: Materials for a Comparative Dictionary of Kadai Languages]. Moskva: Academia.Google Scholar

van Schendel, Willem, 2002. Geographies of knowing, geographies of ignorance: Jumping scale in Southeast Asia. Environment and Planning D: Society and Space 20 (6): 647–668.Google Scholar

Scott, James C., 2009. The Art of Not Being Governed: An Anarchist History of Upland Southeast Asia. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.Google Scholar

Seng Mai, Ma, 2012. A Descriptive Grammar of Wa. MA thesis, Payap University, Chiang Mai, Thailand.Google Scholar

Shee, Naw Hsar, 2008. A Descriptive Grammar of Geba Karen. MA thesis, Payap University, Chiang Mai, Thailand.Google Scholar

Shintani, Tadahiko, 2008. The Palaung Language: the Comparative Lexicon of its Southern Dialects. Tokyo: Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa (ILCCA).Google Scholar

Shorto, H. L., 1960. Word and syllable pattern in Palaung. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 23 (3): 544–557.Google Scholar

Shorto, H. L., 2006. A Mon-Khmer Comparative Dictionary, edited by Sidwell, Paul. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Sidnell, Jack and Shohet, Merav, 2013. The problem of peers in Vietnamese interaction. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 19 (3): 618–638.Google Scholar

Sidwell, Paul, 2009. Proto-Mon-Khmer vocalism: Moving on from Shorto’s ‘alternances’. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 1: 205–214.Google Scholar

Sidwell, Paul, 2013. Southeast Asian Mainland: Linguistic history. In Bellwood, Peter (ed.), The Encyclopedia of Global Human Migration, vol. 1: Prehistory, pp. 259–268. Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar

Sidwell, Paul, 2015. Local drift and areal convergence in the restructuring of Mainland Southeast Asian languages. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 49–79.Google Scholar

Sidwell, Paul and Blench, Roger, 2011. The Austroasiatic Urheimat: The southeastern riverine hypothesis. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 315–343.Google Scholar

Simpson, Andrew (ed.), 2007. Language and National Identity in Asia. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Sophana, Srichampa, 2008. Patterns of polite expressions in Vietnamese. The Mon-Khmer Studies Journal 38: 117–147.Google Scholar

de Sousa, Hilário, 2015. The Far Southern Sinitic languages as part of Mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 352–436.Google Scholar

Srisakorn, Preedaporn, 2008. So (Thavung) Grammar. Dissertation, Mahidol University, Bangkok.Google Scholar

Stolz, Thomas, 2002. No Sprachbund beyond this line! On the age-old discussion of how to define a linguistic area. In Ramat, Paulo and Stolz, Thomas (eds), Mediterranean Languages: Paper from the MEDTYP Workshop, Tirrenia, June 2000, pp. 259–281. Bochum: Brockmeyer.Google Scholar

Sun, Hongkai and Liu, Guangkun, 2009. A Grammar of Anong: Language Death under Intense Contact, edited translation and annotation, with translation, editing, annotation and expansion by Thurgood, Graham, Li, Fengxiang and Thurgood, Ela. Languages of the Greater Himalayan Region. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Suwilai, Premsrirat, 1987. Khmu, a Minority Language of Thailand. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Suwilai, Premsrirat, 1998. Language maintenance and language shift in minority languages of Thailand. In Matsumura, Kazuto (ed.), Studies in Endangered Languages, pp. 191–211. Tokyo: Hituzi Syobo.Google Scholar

Suwilai, Premsrirat, 2007. Endangered languages of Thailand. International Journal of the Sociology of Language 186: 75–93.Google Scholar

Suwilai, Premsrirat, 2008. Orthography development: A tool for revitalizing and maintaining ethnic minority languages. Journal of Language and Culture 26: 18–34.Google Scholar

Svantesson, Jan-Olof, Kam, Raw, Lindell, Kristina and Lundstrom, Håkan, 2013. Dictionary of Kammu Yuan Language and Culture. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Tarling, Nicholas, 1992. The Cambridge History of Southeast Asia: from Early Times to c. 1800, vol. 1. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Thurgood, Graham, 1998. The development of the Chamic vowel system: the interaction of inheritance and borrowing. In Thomas, David (ed.), Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics, no. 15: Further Chamic Studies, pp. 61–90. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Thurgood, Graham, 1999. From Ancient Cham to Modern Dialects: Two Thousand Years of Language Contact and Change. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Thurgood, Graham, 2010. Hainan Cham, Anong, and Eastern Cham: Three languages, three social contexts, three patterns of change. Journal of Language Contact, Varia 3: 39–61.Google Scholar

Thurgood, Graham and La Polla, Randy J., 2003. The Sino-Tibetan Languages. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Thurgood, Graham, Thurgood, Ela and Li, Fengxiang, 2014. A Grammatical Sketch of Hainan Cham: History, Contact, and Phonology. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Tooley, M. J. and Shennan, Ian (eds), 1987. Sea Level Changes. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Umaporn, Sungkaman, 2007. Backchannel response in Mon conversation. Mon-Khmer Studies 37: 67–85.Google Scholar

Vittrant, Alice, 2015. Expressing motion: The contribution of Southeast Asian languages with reference to East Asian languages. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 579–625.Google Scholar

Vittrant, Alice and Watkins, Justin (eds), in press. Languages of Mainland Southeast Asia Linguistic Area: Grammatical Sketches. Boston and Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Voris, Harold K., 2000. Maps of Pleistocene sea levels in Southeast Asia: Shorelines, river systems and time durations. Journal of Biogeography 27 (5): 1153–1167.Google Scholar

Watkins, Justin, 2002. The Phonetics of Wa: Experimental Phonetics, Phonology, Orthography and Sociolinguistics. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Watkins, Justin (ed.), 2005. Studies in Burmese Linguistics. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Watkins, Justin, 2013. Dictionary of Wa, two volumes. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Wayesha, Ahsi James, 2010. A Phonological Description of Leinong Naga. MA thesis, Payap University, Chiang Mai, Thailand.Google Scholar

White, Joyce C., 2011. Cultural diversity in Mainland Southeast Asia: A view from prehistory. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 9–46.Google Scholar

Wnuk, Ewelina, 2016. Semantic Specificity of Perception Verbs in Maniq. Nijmegen: Radboud University.Google Scholar

Wnuk, Ewelina and Majid, Asifa, 2014. Revisiting the limits of language: The odor lexicon of Maniq. Cognition 131 (1): 125–138.Google Scholar

Yip, Moira, 2002. Tone. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Yu, Defen, 2007. Aspects of Lisu Phonology and Grammar, a Language of Southeast Asia. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Abercrombie, David, 1967. Elements of General Phonetics. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar

Abramson, Arthur, L-Thongkum, Theraphan and Nye, Patrick W., 2004. Voice register in Suai (Kuai): An analysis of perceptual and acoustic data. Phonetica 61: 147–171.Google Scholar

Abramson, Arthur and L-Thongkum, Theraphan, 2009. A fuzzy boundary between tone languages and voice-register languages. In Fant, Gunnar, Fujisaki, Hiroya and Shen, Jiaxuen (eds), Frontiers in Phonetics and Speech Science, pp. 149–155. Beijing: The Commercial Press.Google Scholar

Abramson, Arthur, Nye, Patrick and L-Thongkum, Theraphan, 2007. Voice register in Khmu’: Experiments in production and perception. Phonetica 64: 80–104.Google Scholar

Adisasmito-Smith, Niken, 2004. Phonetic Influences of Javanese on Indonesian. PhD dissertation, Cornell University, New York.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2006. Reflections on language contact, areal diffusion, and mechanisms of linguistic change. In Caron, Bernard and Zima, Petr (eds), Sprachbund in the West African Sahel, pp. 23–36. Louvain-Paris: Peeters.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W., 2001. Introduction. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 1–26. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Andruski, Jean E. and Ratliff, Martha, 2000. Phonation types in production of phonological tone: The case of Green Mong. Journal of the International Phonetic Association 30: 37–61.Google Scholar

Baxter, William H., 1992. A Handbook of Old Chinese Phonology. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Benedict, Paul, 1996. Interphyla flow in Southeast Asia. In Pan-Asian Linguistics: Proceedings of the Fourth International Symposium on Language and Linguistics, pp. 1579–1590. Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development, Mahidol University.Google Scholar

Bradley, David, 1982. Register in Burmese. In Bradley, David (ed.), Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics, no. 8: Tonation, pp. 117–132. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Bruhn, Daniel, 2007. The phonetic inventory of Iu-Mien. Manuscript, University of California, Berkeley. http://linguistics.berkeley.edu/~dwbruhn/dwbruhn_iu-mien.pdf Google Scholar

Brunelle, Marc, 2005. Register in Eastern Cham: Phonetic, Phonological and Sociolinguistic Approaches. PhD dissertation, Cornell University, New York.Google Scholar

Brunelle, Marc, 2006. A phonetic study of Eastern Cham register. In Sidwell, Paul and Grant, Anthony (eds), Chamic and Beyond, pp. 1–36. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Brunelle, Marc, 2009. Tone perception in Northern and Southern Vietnamese. Journal of Phonetics 37 (1): 79–96.Google Scholar

Brunelle, Marc, 2010. The role of larynx height in the Javanese tense ~ lax stop contrast. In Mercado, Raphael, Potsdam, Eric and de Mena Travis, Lisa (eds), Austronesian and Theoretical Linguistics, pp. 7–23. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Brunelle, Marc, 2012. Dialect experience and perceptual integrality in phonological registers: Fundamental frequency, voice quality and the first formant in Cham. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 131 (4): 3088–3102.Google Scholar

Brunelle, Marc and Finkeldey, Joshua, 2011. Tone perception in Sgaw Karen. In Proceedings of the 16th International Congress of Phonetic Sciences, pp. 372–375.Google Scholar

Brunelle, Marc and Kirby, James, 2015. Re-assessing tonal diversity and geographical convergence in Mainland Southeast Asia. In Comrie, Bernard and Enfield, Nick (eds), Languages of Mainland Southeast Asia: The State of the Art, pp. 82–110. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Brunelle, Marc and Pittayaporn, Pittayawat, 2012. Phonologically-constrained change: The role of the foot in monosyllabization and rhythmic shifts in Mainland Southeast Asia. Diachronica 29 (4): 411–433.Google Scholar

Chirkova, Ekaterina and Chen, Yiya, 2013. Lizu. Journal of the International Phonetic Association 43 (1): 75–86.Google Scholar

Clements, Nick, Michaud, Alexis and Patin, Cédric, 2011. Do we need tone features? In Hume, Elisabeth, Goldsmith, John and Leo Wetzels, W. (eds), Tones and Features, pp. 3–24. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Conver, Lynn C., 1999. A sketch of the phonology of a Lamet dialect. Mon-Khmer Studies, 29: 35–56.Google Scholar

Dahl, Östen, 2008. An exercise in a posteriori language sampling. Sprachtypologie und Universalienforschung 61: 208–220.Google Scholar

DiCanio, Christian T., 2009. The phonetics of register in Takhian Thong Chong. Journal of the International. Phonetic Association 39 (2): 162–188.Google Scholar

DiCanio, Christian T., 2012. Coarticulation between tone and glottal consonants in Itunyoso Trique. Journal of Phonetics 40 (1): 162–176.Google Scholar

Diffloth, Gérard, 1982. Registres, dévoisement, timbre vocalique: Leur histoire en katouique. Mon-Khmer Studies 11: 47–82Google Scholar

Diffloth, Gérard, 1989. Proto-Austroasiatic creaky voice. Mon-Khmer Studies 15: 139–154.Google Scholar

Diffloth, Gérard, 2005. The contribution of linguistic palaeontology and Austro-Asiatic. In Sagart, Laurent, Blench, Roger and Sanchez-Mazas, Alicia (eds), The Peopling of East Asia: Putting Together Archaeology, Linguistics and Genetics, pp. 77–80. London: Routledge Curzon.Google Scholar

Ding, Picus S., 2001. The pitch-accent system of Niuwozi Prinmi. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 24 (2): 57–83.Google Scholar

Ding, Picus S., 2006. A typological study of tonal systems of Japan and Prinmi: Towards a definition of pitch-accent languages. Journal of Language Universals 7 (2): 1–35.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark, 2012. The shape and spread of tone. In Donohue, Cathryn, Ishihara, Shunichi and Steed, William (eds), Quantitative Approaches to Problems in Linguistics: Studies in Honor of Phil Rose, pp. 9–20. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark and Whiting, Bronwen, 2011. Quantifying areality: A study of prenasalisation in Southeast Asia and New Guinea. Linguistic Typology 15 (1): 101–121.Google Scholar

Edmondson, Jerold A., 2010. The Kháng language of Vietnam in comparison to Ksingmul (Xinh-mun). In McElhanon, Kenneth A. and Reesink, Gerard P. (eds), A Mosaic of Languages and Cultures: Studies Celebrating the Career of Karl J. Franklin, pp. 138–154. Dallas, TX: SIL International.Google Scholar

Edmondson, Jerold A., Esling, John, Harris, Jimmy G., Shaoni, Li and Ziwo, Lama, 2001. The aryepiglottic folds and voice quality in the Yi and Bai languages: Laryngoscopic case studies. Mon-Khmer Studies 31: 83–100.Google Scholar

Egerod, Søren C., 1971. Phonation types in Chinese and South East Asian languages. Acta Linguistica Hafniensia 13 (2): 159–172.Google Scholar

Enfield, Nicholas J., 2005. Areal linguistics and mainland Southeast Asia. Annual Review of Anthropology 34: 181–206.Google Scholar

Enfield, Nicholas J., 2011. Linguistic diversity in mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, Nicholas J. (ed.), Dynamics of Human Diversity, pp. 63–79. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Enfield, Nicholas J. and Diffloth, Gérard, 2009. Phonology and sketch grammar of Kri, a Vietic language of Laos. Cahiers de Linguistique – Asie Orientale 38 (1): 3–69.Google Scholar

Evans, Jonathan P., 2001a. Contact-induced tonogenesis in Southern Qiang. Language and Linguistics 2 (2): 63–110.Google Scholar

Evans, Jonathan P., 2001b. Introduction to Qiang Phonology and Lexicon: Synchrony and Diachrony. Tokyo: ILCAA, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies.Google Scholar

Evans, Jonathan P., 2008. ‘African’ tone in the Sinosphere. Language and Linguistics 9 (3): 463–490.Google Scholar

Fagan, Joel L., 1988. Javanese intervocalic stop phonemes. Studies in Austronesian Linguistics 76: 173–202.Google Scholar

Ferlus, Michel, 1979. Formation des registres et mutations consonantiques dans les langues mon-khmer. Mon-Khmer Studies 8: 1–76.Google Scholar

Ferlus, Michel, 1996. Langues et peuples viet-muong. Mon-Khmer Studies 26: 7–28.Google Scholar

Ferlus, Michel, 1998. Les systèmes de tons dans les langues viet-muong. Diachronica 15 (1): 1–27.Google Scholar

Ferlus, Michel, 2004. The origin of tones in Viet-Muong. In Burusphat, Somsonge (ed.), Papers from the Eleventh Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistic Society, pp. 297–313. Tempe, AZ: Arizona State University, Program for Southeast Asian Studies.Google Scholar

Ferlus, Michel, 2009. What were the four divisions of Middle Chinese? Diachronica 26 (2): 184–213.Google Scholar

Gage, William W., 1985. Glottal stops and Vietnamese tonogenesis. In Acson, Veneeta Z. and Leed, Richard L. (eds), Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications, no. 20: For Gordon H. Fairbanks, pp. 21–36. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Gandour, Jack, 1974. Consonant types and tone in Siamese. Journal of Phonetics 2: 337–350.Google Scholar

Gandour, Jack, 1983. Tone perception in Far Eastern languages. Journal of Phonetics 11: 149–175.Google Scholar

Gernet, Jacques, 1996. A History of Chinese Civilization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Gregerson, Kenneth J., 1976. Tongue-root and register in Mon-Khmer. In Jenner, Philip N., Thompson, Laurence C. and Starosta, Stanley (eds), Austroasiatic Studies, pp. 323–370. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Gruber, James, 2011. An Articulatory, Acoustic, and Auditory Study of Burmese Tone. PhD thesis, Georgetown University, Washington, DC.Google Scholar

Gussenhoven, Carlos, 2000. On the origin and development of the Central Franconian tone contrast. In Lahiri, Aditi (ed.), Analogy, Leveling, and Markedness, pp. 215–260. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Haig, Geoffrey, 2001. Linguistic diffusion in present-day Anatolia: From top to bottom. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 195–224. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Hanson, H. M., 2009. Effects of obstruent consonants on fundamental frequency at vowel onset in English. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 125 (1): 425–441.Google Scholar

Hartmann-So, Helga, 1989. Morphophonemic changes in Daai Chin. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 12 (2): 51–65.Google Scholar

Haudricourt, André-Georges, 1954. De l’origine des tons en viêtnamien. Journal Asiatique 242: 69–82.Google Scholar

Haudricourt, André-Georges, 1961. Bipartition et tripartition des systèmes de tons dans quelques langues d’Extrême-Orient. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris 56 (1): 163–180.Google Scholar

Haudricourt, André-Georges, 1965. Les mutations consonantiques des occlusives initiales en mon-khmer. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris 60 (1): 160–172.Google Scholar

Haudricourt, André-Georges, 1971. New Caledonia and the Loyalty Islands. In Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Current Trends in Linguistics, vol. 8: Linguistics in Oceania, pp. 359–396. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar

Henderson, Eugénie J. A., 1952. The main features of Cambodian pronunciation. Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies 17: 140–174.Google Scholar

Henderson, Eugénie J. A., 1965. The topography of certain phonetic and morphological characteristics of South East Asian languages. Lingua 15: 400–434.Google Scholar

Henderson, Eugénie J. A., 1967. Grammar and tone in South-East Asian languages. Wissenschaftliche Zeitschrift der Karl-Marx Universität Leipzig 16 (1/2): 171–178.Google Scholar

Henderson, Eugénie J. A., 1979. Bwe Karen as a two-tone language? In Liem, Nguyen Dang (ed.), South-East Asian Linguistic Studies, vol. 3, pp. 301–326. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Hildebrandt, Kristine A., 2007. Tone in Tibeto-Burman languages: Typological and sociolinguistic approaches. In Miestamo, Matti and Wälchli, Bernhard (eds), New Trends in Typology: Young Typologists’ Contributions to Linguistic Theory, pp. 67–90. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Hombert, Jean-Marie, 1977. Development of tones from vowel height? Journal of Phonetics 5: 9–16.Google Scholar

Hombert, Jean-Marie, 1978. Consonant types, vowel quality, and tone. In Fromkin, Victoria A. (ed.), Tone: A Linguistic Survey, pp. 77–111. New York: Academic Press.Google Scholar

Hombert, Jean-Marie, Ohala, John J. and Ewan, William G., 1979. Phonetic explanations for the development of tones. Language 55 (1): 37–58.Google Scholar

House, Arthur S. and Fairbanks, Grant, 1953. The influence of consonant environment upon the secondary acoustical characteristics of vowels. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 25: 105–113.Google Scholar

Huffman, Franklin E., 1976. The register problem in fifteen Mon-Khmer languages. In Jenner, Philip N., Thompson, Laurence C. and Starosta, Stanley (eds), Austroasiatic Studies, part I, pp. 575–589. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

van der Hulst, Harry, 2011. Pitch-accent systems. In van Oostendorp, Marc, Ewan, Colin J., Hume, Elisabeth and Rice, Keren (eds), The Blackwell Companion to Phonology, vol. 2, pp. 1003–1027. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar

Hyman, Larry M., 1976. Phonologization. In Julliand, Alphonse G. (ed.), Linguistic Studies Offered to Joseph Greenberg on the Occasion of his Sixtieth Birthday, vol. 2, pp. 407–418. Saratoga: Anma Libri.Google Scholar

Hyman, Larry M., 2006. Word prosodic typology. Phonology 23: 225–257.Google Scholar

Hyman, Larry M., 2009. How (not) to do phonological typology: The case of pitch-accent. Language Sciences 31: 213–238.Google Scholar

Hyman, Larry M., 2010. Kuki-Thaadow: An African tone system in Southeast Asia. In Floricic, Franck (ed.), Essais de typologie et de linguistique générale, pp. 31–51. Lyon, France: Les Presses de l’Ecole Normale Supérieure.Google Scholar

Hyman, Larry M. and Haokip, Thien, 2004. Kuki-Thaadow Grammar (draft). http://linguistics.berkeley.edu/person/19 Google Scholar

Hyslop, Gwendolyn, 2009. Kurtöp tone: A tonogenetic case study. Lingua 119: 827–845.Google Scholar

Jenner, Philip N., 1974. The development of registers in Standard Khmer. In Liem, Nguyen Dang (ed.), South-East Asian Linguistic Studies, vol. 1, pp. 47–60. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Jones, Robert B., 1986. Pitch register languages. In McCoy, John and Light, Timothy (eds), Contributions to Sino-Tibetan Studies, pp. 135–143. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar

Kingston, John, 2005. The phonetics of Athabaskan tonogenesis. In Hargus, Sharon and Rice, Keren (eds), Athabaskan Prosody, pp. 137–184. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Kirby, James, 2010. Dialect experience in Vietnamese tone perception. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 127 (6): 3749–3757.Google Scholar

Kirby, James, 2013. The role of probabilistic enhancement in phonologization. In Yu, Alan C. L. (ed.), Origins of Sound Change: Approaches to Phonologization, pp. 228–246. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Kirby, James, 2014. Incipient tonogenesis in Phnom Penh Khmer: Acoustic and perceptual studies. Journal of Phonetics 43: 69–85.Google Scholar

L-Thongkum, Theraphan, 1979. The distribution of the sounds of Bruu. Mon-Khmer Studies 8: 221–293.Google Scholar

L-Thongkum, Theraphan, 1988. Another look at the register distinction in Mon. In Bamroongraks, Cholticha, Khanittanan, Wilaiwan and Permch, Laddawan (eds), The International Symposium on Language and Linguistics, pp. 22–51. Bangkok: Thammasat University.Google Scholar

L-Thongkum, Theraphan and Chommanad, Intajamornrak, 2008. Tonal evolution induced by language contact: A case study of the T’in (Lua’) language of Nan province, northern Thailand. Mon-Khmer Studies 38: 57–68.Google Scholar

Htay, La Maung, 2011. A Sociolinguistic Survey of Three Lisu Dialects. MA thesis, Payap University, Chiang Mai, Thailand.Google Scholar

Ladefoged, Peter, 1971. Preliminaries to Linguistic Phonetics. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

Ladefoged, Peter and Maddieson, Ian, 1996. The Sounds of the World’s Languages. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Laver, John, 1980. Phonetic Description of Voice Quality. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Lee, Ernest W., 1966. Proto-Chamic Phonological Word and Vocabulary. PhD dissertation, Indiana University.Google Scholar

Lee, Ernest W., 1998. The contribution of Cat Gia Roglai to Chamic. In Thomas, David (ed.), Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistic Studies, no. 15: Further Chamic Studies, pp. 31–54. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Leer, Jeff, 1999. Tonogenesis in Athabaskan. In Kaji, Shigeki (ed.), Cross-linguistic Studies of Tonal Phenomena, Tonogenesis, Typology, and Related Topics, pp. 37–66. Tokyo: Institute of the Study of the Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies.Google Scholar

Lehiste, Ilse, 1970. Suprasegmentals. Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.Google Scholar

Lewis, Paul W., 1973. Tone in the Akha language. Anthropological Linguistics 15: 183–188.Google Scholar

Lindell, Kristina, Svantesson, Jan-Olof and Tayanin, Damrong, 1978. Two dialects of the Romeet (Lamet) language. Cahiers de linguistique Asie Orientale 4: 5–22.Google Scholar

Lisker, Leigh, 1986. ‘Voicing’ in English: A catalogue of acoustic features signaling /b/ versus /p/ in trochees. Language and Speech 29: 3–11.Google Scholar

Luce, Gordon H., undated. Draft letter, incomplete, addressee not indicated (to Henderson?), concerning analysis of Riang tones and grammar. Luce Collection, MS 6574–7, 050a-b. National Library of Australia.Google Scholar

Maddieson, Ian, 1978. Universals of tone. In Greenberg, Joseph H., Ferguson, Charles A. and Moravcsik, Edith A. (eds), Universals of Human Language, vol. 2: Phonology, pp. 335–363. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.Google Scholar

Maddieson, Ian, 2011. Tone. In Dryer, Matthew S. and Haspelmath, Martin (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online, chapter 13. Munich: Max Planck Digital Library. http://wals.info/chapter/13 Google Scholar

Maddieson, Ian and Pang, Keng-Fong, 1993. Tone in Utsat. In Edmondson, Jerold A. and Gregerson, Kenneth J. (eds), Tonality in Austronesian Languages, pp. 91–106. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Maspero, Henri, 1912. Etudes sur la phonétique historique de la langue annamite: Les initiales. Bulletin de l’École française d’Extrême-Orient 12: 1–124.Google Scholar

Matisoff, James, 1973. Tonogenesis in Southeast Asia. In Hyman, Larry (ed.), Consonant Types and Tone, pp. 71–95. Los Angeles: Linguistics Program, University of Southern California.Google Scholar

Matisoff, James, 2001. Genetic versus contact relationship: Prosodic diffusability in South-East Asian languages. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 291–327. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Mazaudon, Martine, 1973. Phonologie du Tamang. Langues et Civilisations à Tradition Orale, vol. 4. Paris: SELAF.Google Scholar

Mazaudon, Martine, 2012. Paths to tone in the Tamang branch of Tibeto-Burman (Nepal). In de Vogalaer, Gunther and Seiler, Guido (eds), The Dialect Laboratory: Dialects as a Testing Ground for Theories of Language Change, pp. 139–177. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Mazaudon, Martine and Michaud, Alexis, 2008. Tonal contrasts and initial consonants: A case study of Tamang, a ‘missing link’ in tonogenesis. Phonetica 65: 231–256.Google Scholar

Michaud, Alexis, 2004. Final consonants and glottalization: New perspectives from Hanoi Vietnamese. Phonetica 61 (2/3): 119–146.Google Scholar

Michaud, Alexis, 2006. Tonal reassociation and rising tonal contours in Naxi. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 29 (1): 61–94.Google Scholar

Michaud, Alexis, 2008. Phonemic and tonal analysis of Yongning Na. Cahiers de Linguistique – Asie Orientale 37 (2): 159–196.Google Scholar

Michaud, Alexis, 2013. Studying level-tone systems in Asia: The case of the Naish languages. Paper presented at the International Conference on Phonetics of the Languages in China (ICPLC-2013), City University of Hong Kong, 2–4 December 2013.Google Scholar

Michaud, Alexis and Xueguang, He, 2007. Reassociated tones and coalescent syllables in Naxi (Tibeto-Burman). Journal of the International Phonetic Association 37 (3): 237–255.Google Scholar

Morey, Stephen, 2005. The Tai Languages of Assam: A Grammar and Texts. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Mundhenk, Alice T. and Goschnick, Hella E., 1977. Haroi phonemes. In Thomas, David (ed.), Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics, no. 4: Chamic Studies, pp. 1–16. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Narumol, Charoenma, 1982. The phonologies of a Lampang Lamet and Wiang Papao Lua. Mon-Khmer Studies 11: 35–45.Google Scholar

Bay, Naw Say, 1995. The phonology of the Dung dialect of Moken. In Bradley, David (ed.), Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics, no. 13: Studies in Burmese Languages, pp. 193–205. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Văn Lợi, Nguyễn, 1993. Tiếng Rục. Hanoi: Nhà xuất bản Khoa học xã hội [Social Sciences Publishing House].Google Scholar

Văn Lợi, Nguyễn and Edmondson, Jerold, 1997. Tones and voice quality in modern northern Vietnamese: Instrumental case studies. Mon-Khmer Studies 28: 1–18.Google Scholar

Nicolson, Beth, 2000. The Nung An language of Vietnam: Stepchild or aberrant son? In The Fifth International Symposium on Languages and Linguistics, pp. 266–295. Vietnam National University, Ho Chi Minh City University of Social Sciences and Humanities.Google Scholar

Ohala, John J., 1973. The physiology of tone. In Hyman, Larry M. (ed.), Consonant Types and Tone, pp. 1–14. Los Angeles: Linguistics Program, University of Southern California.Google Scholar

Pham, Andrea, 2003. Vietnamese Tone: A New Analysis. New York: Routledge.Google Scholar

Phan, John D., 2013. Lacquered Words: The Evolution of Vietnamese under Sinitic Influences from the First Century BCE through the Seventeenth Century CE. PhD dissertation, Cornell University, New York.Google Scholar

Pike, Kenneth L., 1948. Tone Languages. Ann Arbor, MI: The University of Michigan Press.Google Scholar

Premsrirat, Suwilai, 2001. Tonogenesis in Khmu dialects of SEA. Mon-Khmer Studies 31: 47–56.Google Scholar

Pulleyblank, Edwin G., 1962. The consonantal system of Old Chinese. Asia Major, Series 2 (9): 58–144, 206–265.Google Scholar

Pulleyblank, Edwin G., 1978. The nature of the Middle Chinese tones and their development to early Mandarin. Journal of Chinese Linguistics 6: 173–203.Google Scholar

Pulleyblank, Edwin G., 1986. Tonogenesis as an index of areal relationships in East Asia. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 19 (1): 65–82.Google Scholar

Ratliff, Martha, 1987. Tone sandhi compounding in White Hmong. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 10 (2): 71–105.Google Scholar

Ratliff, Martha, 1992a. Grammar and tone in Asian languages. In The Third International Symposium on Language and Linguistics, Bangkok, Thailand, pp. 1064–1078. Bangkok: Chulalongkorn University.Google Scholar

Ratliff, Martha, 1992b. Meaningful Tone: A Study of Tonal Morphology in Compounds, Form Classes and Expressive Phrases in White Hmong. Dekalb, IL: Northern Illinois University Press.Google Scholar

Ratliff, Martha, 2002. Timing tonogenesis: Evidence from borrowing. Berkeley Linguistics Society 28: 29–41.Google Scholar

Ratliff, Martha, 2015. Tonoexodus, tonogenesis, and tone change. In Honeybone, Patrick and Salmons, Joseph (eds), The Oxford Handbook of Historical Phonology, pp. 245–261. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Rivierre, Jean-Claude, 1993. Tonogenesis in New Caledonia. In Edmondson, Jerold A. and Gregerson, Kenneth J. (eds), Tonality in Austronesian Languages, pp. 155–173. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Sidwell, Paul, 2013. Issues in Austroasiatic classification. Language and Linguistics Compass 7 (8): 437–457.Google Scholar

Sidwell, Paul and Blench, Roger, 2011. The Austroasiatic Urheimat: The Southeastern Riverine Hypothesis. In Enfield, Nicholas J. (ed.), Dynamics of Human Diversity, pp. 1–30. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Steriade, Donca, 2001/2008. The phonology of perceptibility effects: The P-map and its consequences for constraint organization. In Hanson, Kristin and Inkelas, Sharon (eds), The Nature of the Word: Studies in Honor of Paul Kiparsky, pp. 151–179. Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.Google Scholar

Svantesson, Jan-Olof, 1983. Kammu Phonology and Morphology. Travaux de L’Institut de Linguistique de Lund, vol. 18. Malmö: CWK Gleerup.Google Scholar

Svantesson, Jan-Olof, 1988. U. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 11: 64–133.Google Scholar

Svantesson, Jan-Olof, 1989. Tonogenetic mechanisms in Northern Mon-Khmer. Phonetica 46: 60–79.Google Scholar

Svantesson, Jan-Olof, 1991. Hu: A language with unorthodox tonogenesis. In Davidson, Jeremy H. C. S. (ed.), Austroasiatic Languages: Essays in Honour of H. L. Shorto, pp. 67–79. London: SOAS.Google Scholar

Minh, Thạch Ngọc, 1999. Monosyllabization in Kiengiang Khmer. Mon-Khmer Studies 29: 81–95.Google Scholar

Thomason, Sarah G., 2001. Language Contact: An Introduction. Edinburgh: University of Edinburgh Press.Google Scholar

Thurgood, Ela, 2004. Phonation types in Javanese. Oceanic Linguistics 43 (2): 277–295.Google Scholar

Thurgood, Graham, 2002. Vietnamese tone: Revising the model and the analysis. Diachronica 19 (2): 333–363.Google Scholar

Uhlenbeck, Eugenius M., 1964. A Critical Survey of Studies on the Languages of Java and Madura. The Hague: Nijhoff.Google Scholar

Phương, Vũ Thang, 1981. The Acoustic and Perceptual Nature of Tone in Vietnamese. PhD dissertation, Australian National University.Google Scholar

Watkins, Justin, 2001. Burmese. Journal of the International Phonetic Association 31: 291–295.Google Scholar

Watkins, Justin, 2013. A first look at tone in Myebon Sumtu Chin. SOAS Working Papers in Linguistics 16: 79–104.Google Scholar

Watson, Richard L., 1996. Why three phonologies for Pacoh? Mon-Khmer Studies 26: 197–205.Google Scholar

Wayland, Ratree and Jongman, Allard, 2001. Chanthaburi Khmer vowels: Phonetic and phonemic analyses. Mon-Khmer Studies 31: 65–82.Google Scholar

Wayland, Ratree and Jongman, Allard, 2002. Registrogenesis in Khmer: A phonetic account. Mon-Khmer Studies 32: 101–115.Google Scholar

Wayland, Ratree and Guion, Susan A., 2005. Sound changes following the loss of /r/ in Khmer: A new tonogenetic mechanism? Mon-Khmer Studies 35: 55–82.Google Scholar

Yip, Moira, 2002. Tone. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, R. M. W. (eds), 2001. Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Austin, Peter, 1981a. Switch-reference in Australia. Language 57: 309–334.Google Scholar

Austin, Peter, 1981b. Proto-Kanyara and Proto-Mantharta historical phonology. Lingua 54: 295–333.Google Scholar

Austin, Peter, 1981c. Case-Marking in Southern Pilbara languages. Australian Journal of Linguistics 1: 211–226.Google Scholar

Austin, Peter, 1988. Classification of Southern Pilbara languages. Pacific Linguistics, Papers in Australian Linguistics, no. 17. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Austin, Peter K., 1994a. A reference grammar of the Mantharta languages, Western Australia. Unpublished manuscript, La Trobe University.Google Scholar

Austin, Peter K., 1994b. A reference grammar of the Kanyara languages, Western Australia. Unpublished manuscript, La Trobe University.Google Scholar

Baker, Brett, 2014. Word structure in Australian languages. In Koch, and Nordlinger, (eds), pp. 139–214.Google Scholar

Bowern, Claire, 2003. Another look at Australia as a linguistic area. In Proceedings of the Twenty-Ninth Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society (General Session and Parasession on Phonetic Sources of Phonological Patterns: Synchronic and Diachronic Explanations).Google Scholar

Bowern, Claire, 2006. Another look at Australia as a linguistic area. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas, pp. 244–265. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar

Busby, Peter, 1980. The distribution of phonemes in Australian Aboriginal language. In Waters, Bruce E. and Busby, Peter A. (eds), Papers in Australian Linguistics, vol. 14, pp. 73–139. Pacific Linguistics, vol. A-60. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Butcher, Andrew, 2012. On the phonetics of long, thin phonologies. In Donohue, Cathryn, Ishihara, Shunishi and Steed, William (eds), Quantitative Approaches to Problems in Linguistics: Studies in Honour of Phil Rose, pp. 133–154. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar

Butcher, Andrew and Fletcher, Janet, 2014. Sound patterns of Australian languages. In Koch, and Nordlinger, (eds), pp. 89–132.Google Scholar

Campbell, Lyle and Poser, William J., 2008. Language Classification: History and Method. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Dench, Alan, 1982. The development of an accusative case marking pattern in the Ngayarda languages of Western Australia. Australian Journal of Linguistics 2: 43–59.Google Scholar

Dench, Alan, 1987. Complex sentences in Martuthunira. In Austin, Peter (ed.), Complex Sentence Constructions in Australian Aboriginal Languages, pp. 97–139. Typological Studies in Language, vol. 15. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Dench, Alan, 1991. Panyjima. In Dixon, R. M. W. and Blake, Barry (eds), Handbook of Australian Languages, vol. 4, pp. 124–243. Melbourne: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Dench, Alan, 1994. The historical development of pronoun paradigms in the Pilbara region of Western Australia. Australian Journal of Linguistics 14: 155–191.Google Scholar

Dench, Alan, 1995. Martuthunira: A Language of the Pilbara Region of Western Australia. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-125. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Dench, Alan, 1997. Where do complex kinterms come from? In Tryon, Darryl and Walsh, Michael (eds), Boundary Rider: Essays in Honour of Geoffrey O’Grady, pp. 107–132. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-136. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Dench, Alan, 1998a. Yingkarta. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar

Dench, Alan, 1998b. What is a Ngayarta language? A reply to O’Grady and Laughren. Australian Journal of Linguistics 18: 91–107.Google Scholar

Dench, Alan, 2001. Descent and diffusion: The complexity of the Pilbara situation. In Aikhenvald, and Dixon, (eds), pp. 105–133.Google Scholar

Dench, Alan, 2006. Case marking strategies in subordinate clauses in Pilbara languages: Some diachronic speculations. Australian Journal of Linguistics 26 (1): 81–105.Google Scholar

Dench, Alan, 2007. Demonstrative paradigm splitting in the Pilbara languages of Western Australia. In Salmons, Joseph and Dubenion-Smith, Shannon (eds), Historical Linguistics 2005, pp. 224–237. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Dench, Alan, 2008. Case in an Australian language: Distribution of case and multiple case-marking in Nyamal. In Malchukov, Andrej and Spencer, Andrew (eds), The Handbook of Case, pp. 756–769. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Dench, Alan. Field notes: Ngarla, Nyamal, Yinhawangka. Manuscript, University of Western Australia, 1995–1997.Google Scholar

Dixon, R. M. W., 1980. Languages of Australia. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Dixon, R. M. W., 1997. The Rise and Fall of Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Dixon, R. M. W., 2001. The Australian linguistic area. In Aikhenvald, and Dixon, (eds), pp. 64–104.Google Scholar

Dixon, R. M. W., 2002. The Australian Languages: Their Nature and Development. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Eldredge, Niles and Gould, Stephen Jay, 1972. Punctuated equilibria: An alternative to phyletic gradualism. In Schopf, T. J. M. (ed.), Models in Palaeobiology, pp. 82–115. San Francisco: Freeman Cooper and Co.Google Scholar

Ellison, T. Mark and Miceli, Luisa, 2013. New perspectives on language change: L2 transmission and the cognitive basis for contact-induced differentiation of lexical forms. Paper presented at the 21st International Conference for Historical Linguistics, Oslo.Google Scholar

Ellison, T. Mark and Miceli, Luisa, in press. Language monitoring in bilinguals as a mechanism for rapid lexical divergence. Language 93.Google Scholar

Evans, Nicholas (ed.), 2003. The non-Pama-Nyungan Languages of Northern Australia: Comparative Studies of the Continent’s Most Linguistically Complex Region. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Evans, Nicholas, 2005. Australian languages reconsidered: A review of Dixon (2002). Oceanic Linguistics 44 (1): 242–286.Google Scholar

Evans, Nicholas and Wilkins, David, 2000. In the mind’s ear: The semantic extensions of perception verbs in Australian languages. Language 76 (3): 546–592.Google Scholar

François, Alexandre, 2011. Social ecology and language history in the Northern Vanuatu linkage: A tale of divergence and convergence. Journal of Historical Linguistics 1 (2): 175–246.Google Scholar

Gaby, Alice and Singer, Ruth, 2014. Semantics of Australian Aboriginal languages. In Koch, and Nordlinger, (eds), pp. 295–327.Google Scholar

Goddard, Clifford, 1985. A Grammar of Yankunytjatjara. Alice Springs: Institute for Aboriginal Development Press.Google Scholar

Hamilton, Philip, 1996. Phonetic Constraints and Markedness in the Phonotactics of Australian Aboriginal Languages. PhD thesis, University of Toronto.Google Scholar

Hansen, Kenneth C., 1984. Communicability of some Western Desert communalects. In Hudson, Joyce and Pym, Noreen (eds), Language Survey, pp. 1–112. Work Papers of SIL/AAB, vol. B-11. Darwin: SIL.Google Scholar

Harvey, Mark, 2011. Lexical change in pre-colonial Australia. Diachronica 28 (3): 345–381.Google Scholar

Heath, Jeffrey, 1978. Linguistic Diffusion in Arnhem Land. Canberra: Institute of Aboriginal Studies.Google Scholar

Hill, Peter, 2011. Morphology and Sentence Construction in Kurrama: A Language of the Pilbara Region of Western Australia. PhD thesis, University of Western Australia.Google Scholar

Koch, Harold, 2004. A methodological history of Australian linguistic classification. In Bowern, Claire and Koch, Harold (eds), Australian Languages: Classification and the Comparative Method, pp. 17–60. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Koch, Harold, 2009. On reconstructing pronominal proto-paradigms: Methodological considerations from the Pama-Nyungan language family of Australia. In Evans, Bethwyn (ed.), Discovering History Through Language: Papers in Honour of Malcolm Ross, pp. 317–344. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Koch, Harold, 2014. Historical relations among the Australian languages: Genetic classification and contact-based diffusion. In Koch, and Nordlinger, (ed.), pp. 23–89.Google Scholar

Koch, Harold and Nordlinger, Rachel (eds), 2014a. The Languages and Linguistics of Australia: A Comprehensive Guide. The World of Linguistics, vol. 3. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Koch, Harold and Nordlinger, Rachel, 2014b. The languages of Australia in linguistic research: Context and issues. In Koch, and Nordlinger, (eds), pp. 3–21.Google Scholar

Kohn, Allison, 1994. A Morphological Description of Ngarluma. BA (Hons) dissertation, University of Western Australia.Google Scholar

Kohn, Allison. Nyiyaparli field notes. Manuscript, University of Western Australia.Google Scholar

Kuteva, Tanja, 1999. Languages and societies: The ‘punctuated equilibrium’ model of language development. Language and Communication 19: 213–228.Google Scholar

Marmion, Douglas, 1996. A Description of the Morphology of Wajarri. BA (Hons) dissertation, University of New England.Google Scholar

McConvell, Patrick, 2010. Contact and indigenous languages in Australia. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 770–794. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar

Merlan, Francesca, 1981. Land, language and social identity in Aboriginal Australia. Mankind 13 (2): 133–148.Google Scholar

Miceli, Luisa, 2004. Pama-Nyungan as a genetic entity. In Bowern, Claire and Koch, Harold (eds), Australian Languages: Classification and the Comparative Method, pp. 61–68. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Miceli, Luisa, 2015a. Pama-Nyungan. In Bowern, Claire and Evans, Bethwyn (eds), The Routledge Handbook of Historical Linguistics, pp. 704–725. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar

Miceli, Luisa, 2015b. Looking for evidence of an anti-doppel bias in the Pilbara. Paper presented at Workshop on Comparative Australian Linguistics, Australian National University.Google Scholar

Miceli, Luisa and Round, Erich R., 2014. Sound change in Australia: Current knowledge and research priorities. Paper presented at Third Biennial Workshop on Sound Change, University of California, Berkeley, May 28–31 2014.Google Scholar

Miller, W. R., 1971. Dialect differentiation in the Western Desert Language. Anthropological Forum 3: 61–78.Google Scholar

O’Grady, Geoffrey, 1958. The Significance of the Circumcision Boundary in Western Australia. BA thesis, Sydney University.Google Scholar

O’Grady, Geoffrey, 1966. Proto-Ngayarda phonology. Oceanic Linguistics 5: 71–130.Google Scholar

O’Grady, Geoffrey, Voegelin, Carl F. and Voegelin, Frances M., 1966. Languages of the World: Indo-Pacific Fascicle Six. Anthropological Linguistics 8 (2): 1–197.Google Scholar

Radcliffe-Brown, A., 1913. Three tribes of Western Australia. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 43: 141–195.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 2001. Contact-induced change in Oceanic languages in North-East Melanesia. In Aikhenvald, and Dixon, (eds), pp. 134–166.Google Scholar

Round, Erich R., 2013. The phonologically exceptional continent: A large cross-linguistic survey reveals why Australia is, and is not, typologically unusual. Paper presented at the Association for Linguistic Typology 10th Biennial Conference, Leipzig.Google Scholar

Stirling, Lesley and Dench, Alan, 2012. Tense, aspect, modality and evidentiality in Australian languages: Foreword. Australian Journal of Linguistics 32: 1–6.Google Scholar

Sutton, Peter, 1997. Materialism, sacred myth and pluralism: Competing theories of the origin of Australian languages. In Merlan, Francesca, Morton, John and Rumsey, Alan (eds), Scholar and Sceptic: Australian Aboriginal Studies in Honour of L. R. Hiatt, pp. 211–242. Canberra: Aboriginal Studies Press.Google Scholar

Sutton, Peter and Koch, Harold, 2008. Australian languages: A singular vision. Journal of Linguistics 44: 471–504.Google Scholar

Ulm, Sean, 2013. ‘Complexity’ and the Australian continental narrative: Themes in the archaeology of Holocene Australia. Quaternary International 285: 182–192.Google Scholar

Voegelin, C.F., Voegelin, F. M., Wurm, Stephen, O’Grady, Geoffrey N. and Matsuda, Tokuichiro 1963. Obtaining an index of phonological differentiation from the construction of non-existent minimax systems. International Journal of American Linguistics 29 (1): 4–29.Google Scholar

Westerlund, Torbjörn, 2007. A Grammatical Sketch of Ngarla: A Language of Western Australia. Master’s thesis, Uppsala University.Google Scholar

Westerlund, Torbjörn, 2013. Finite Verbs in Ngarla (Pama-Nyungan, Ngayarta). PhD thesis, Uppsala University.Google Scholar

Williams, Alan, Ulm, Sean, Turney, Chris S. M., Rohde, David, White, Gentry, 2015. Holocene demographic changes and the emergence of complex societies in prehistoric Australia. PLoS ONE 10 (6) 1–17.Google Scholar

Wordick, Frank, 1982. The Yindjibarndi Language. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Baird, Louise, 2008. A Grammar of Klon: A Non-Austronesian Language of Alor, Indonesia. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 596. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Barnes, Barney, 1989. Urat grammar essentials. Unpublished manuscript, Summer Institute of Linguistics Papua New Guinea Branch.Google Scholar

Bellwood, Peter, 2002. Farmers, foragers, languages, genes: The genesis of agricultural societies. In Bellwood, and Renfrew, (eds), pp. 17–28.Google Scholar

Bellwood, Peter and Renfrew, Colin (eds), 2002. Examining the Farming/Language Dispersal Hypothesis. Cambridge: McDonald Institute of Archaeological Research.Google Scholar

Bellwood, Peter, Ross, Malcolm, Chambers, Geoff and Hung, Hsiao-chun, 2011. Are ‘cultures’ inherited? Multidisciplinary perspectives on the origins and migrations of Austronesian-speaking peoples prior to 1000 BCE. In Roberts, Ben and Vander Linden, Marc (eds), Investigating Archaeological Cultures: Material Culture, Variability and Transmission, pp. 321–354. New York: Springer.Google Scholar

Bickel, Balthasar and Nichols, Johanna, 2006. Oceania, the Pacific Rim, and the theory of linguistic areas. Berkeley Linguistics Society 32.Google Scholar

Blust, Robert A., 1982. The linguistic value of the Wallace Line. Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde 138: 231–250.Google Scholar

Blust, Robert A., 1993. Central and Central-Eastern Malayo-Polynesian. Oceanic Linguistics 32: 241–293.Google Scholar

Blust, Robert A., 2009. The position of the languages of Eastern Indonesia: A reply to Donohue and Grimes. Oceanic Linguistics 48: 36–77.Google Scholar

Blust, Robert, 2013. The Austronesian Languages, revised edition. Asia-Pacific Linguistics Open Access Monographs, vol. A-PL 008. Canberra: Australian National University. http://hdl.handle.net/1885/10191 Google Scholar

Bowden, John, 2001. Taba: Description of a South Halmahera Language. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 521. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Brandes, J. H. L., 1884. Bijdragen tot de vergelijkende klankleer der westerse afdeling van de Maleisch-Polynesische taalfamilie. PhD dissertation, Rijksuniversiteit te Leiden.Google Scholar

Bugenhagen, Robert D., 1994. The semantics of irrealis in the Austronesian languages of Papua New Guinea. In Reesink, Ger P. (ed.), Topics in Descriptive Austronesian Linguistics, pp. 1–39. Semaian, vol. 11. Leiden: Vakgroep Talen en Culturen van Zuidoost-Azie en Oceanie, Rijksuniversiteit te Leiden.Google Scholar

Cahill, Michael, 2011. Tonal diversity in languages of Papua New Guinea. SIL Electronic Working Papers 2011:008.Google Scholar

Campbell, Lyle, 2006. Areal linguistics: A closer scrutiny. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas: Convergence in Historical and Typological Perspective, pp. 1–31. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar

Campbell, Lyle and Poser, William J., 2008. Language Classification: History and Method. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Capell, Arthur, 1943. The Linguistic Position of South-Eastern Papua. Sydney: Australasian Medical Publishing Company.Google Scholar

Capell, Arthur, 1948. Distribution of languages in the Central Highlands of New Guinea. Oceania 19: 104–129, 234–253, 249–377.Google Scholar

Capell, Arthur, 1949. Two tonal languages of New Guinea. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 13: 184–199.Google Scholar

Capell, Arthur, 1952. Languages of Bogia District, New Guinea. Oceania 22: 130–147, 178–207.Google Scholar

Capell, Arthur, 1969. A Survey of New Guinea Languages. Sydney: Sydney University Press.Google Scholar

Capell, Arthur, 1976. Austronesian and Papuan ‘mixed’ languages: General remarks. In Wurm, S. A. (ed.), New Guinea Area Languages and Language Study, vol. 2: Austronesian Languages, pp. 527–579. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-39. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Coller, Matthew, 2007. Sahul Time. Melbourne: Monash University. http://sahultime.monash.edu.au Google Scholar

Comrie, Bernard and Cysouw, Michael, 2012. New Guinea through the eyes of WALS. Language and Linguistics in Melanesia 30: 65–94.Google Scholar

Conrad, Robert J. and Wogiga, Kepas, 1991. An Outline of Bukiyip Grammar. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-113. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Corbett, Greville G., 2013. Canonical morphosyntactic features. In Brown, Dunstan, Chumakina, Marina and Corbett, Greville G. (eds), Canonical Morphology and Syntax, pp. 48–65. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Corris, Miriam, 2005. A Grammar of Barupu: A Language of Papua New Guinea. PhD thesis, University of Sydney.Google Scholar

David, Bruno, McNiven, Ian J., Richards, Thomas et al., 2011. Lapita sites in the Central Province of mainland Papua New Guinea. World Archaeology 43: 576–593.Google Scholar

Dempwolff, Otto, 1937. Vergleichende Lautlehre des Austronesischen Wortschatzes, vol. 2: Deduktive Anwendung des Urindonesischen auf austronesische Einzelsprachen. Beihefte zur Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, vol. 17. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar

Dempwolff, Otto, 1939. Grammatik der Jabêm-Sprache auf Neuguinea. Hamburg: Friederichsen, de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Dempwolff, Otto. Grammar of the Graged language. Unpublished mimeograph, Lutheran Mission, Narer, Karkar Island.Google Scholar

Denham, T. P., Haberle, S. G., Lentfer, C. et al., 2003. Origins of agriculture at Kuk Swamp in the Highlands of New Guinea. Science 301: 189–193.Google Scholar

D’Jernes, Lucille, 1990. Arop-Lokep grammar. Unpublished manuscript, Summer Institute of Linguistics, Ukarumpa.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark, 1997. Tone systems in New Guinea. Linguistic Typology 1: 347–386.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark, 2005a. Tone and the Trans New Guinea languages. In Kaji, (ed.), pp. 33–53.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark, 2005b. Word order in New Guinea: Dispelling a myth. Oceanic Linguistics 44: 527–536.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark, 2005c. Configurationality in the languages of New Guinea. Australian Journal of Linguistics 25: 181–218.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark, 2007a. The Papuan language of Tambora. Oceanic Linguistics 46: 520–537.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark, 2007b. Word order in Austronesian from north to south and west to east. Linguistic Typology 11: 349–391.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark and Denham, Tim, 2010. Farming and language in Island Southeast Asia: Reframing Austronesian history. Current Anthropology 51: 223–256.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark and San Roque, Lila, 2004. I’saka. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 554. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark and Schapper, Antoinette, 2008. Whence the Austronesian possession construction? Oceanic Linguistics 47: 316–327.Google Scholar

Drabbe, Peter, 1940/1941. Beitrag zur Sprachgruppierung in Holländisch-Neuguinea. Anthropos 35/36: 355.Google Scholar

Drabbe, Peter, 1949a. Bijzonderheden uit de talen van Frederik-Hendrik-Eiland: Kimaghama, Ndom en Riantana. Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde 105: 1–24.Google Scholar

Drabbe, Peter, 1949b. Aantekeningen over twee talen in het centraal gebergte van Nederlands Nieuw-Guinea. Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde 105: 423–444.Google Scholar

Drabbe, Peter, 1950. Talen en dialecten van Zuid-West Nieuw-Guinea. Anthropos 45: 545–574.Google Scholar

Drabbe, Peter, 1952. Spraakkunst can het Ekagi. The Hague : Martinus Nijhoff.Google Scholar

Drabbe, Peter, 1953. Spraakkunst van de Kamoro-taal. The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff.Google Scholar

Drabbe, P., 1955. Spraakkunst van het Marind, zuidkust Nederlands Nieuw-Guinea. Studia Instituti Anthropos, vol. 11. Posieux and Fribourg: Instituut Anthropos.Google Scholar

Drabbe, P., 1959. Kaeti en Wambon: Twee Awju Dialecten. The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff.Google Scholar

Draper, Norm and Draper, Sheila, 2002. Dictionary of Kyaka Enga, Papua New Guinea. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 532. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S., 1988. Object-verb order and adjective-noun order: Dispelling a myth. Lingua 74: 185–217.Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S., 1992. The Greenbergian word order correlations. Language 68: 81–138.Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S., 2013a. Order of adjective and noun. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), chapter 87. http://wals.info/chapter/87 Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S., 2013b. Relationship between the order of object and verb and the order of adjective and noun. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), chapter 97. http://wals.info/chapter/97 Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S., 2013c. Relationship between the order of object and verb and the order of adposition and noun phrase. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), chapter 95. http://wals.info/chapter/95 Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S., 2013d. Order of genitive and noun. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), chapter 86. http://wals.info/chapter/86 Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S., 2013e. Position of negative morpheme with respect to subject, object, and verb. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), chapter 144. http://wals.info/chapter/144 Google Scholar

Dryer, Matthew S. and Haspelmath, Martin (eds), 2013. The World Atlas of Language Structures Online. Leipzig: Max Planck Institute for Evolutionary Anthropology. http://wals.info Google Scholar

Dunn, Michael, Levinson, Stephen C., Lindström, Eva, Reesink, Ger and Terrill, Angela, 2008. Structural phylogeny in historical linguistics: Methodological explorations applied in Island Melanesia. Language 84: 710–759.Google Scholar

Dutton, Tom, 2010. Reconstructing Proto-Koiarian: The History of a Papuan Language Family. Studies in Language Change, vol. 7. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Emeneau, Murray B., 1956. India as a linguistic area. Language 32: 3–16.Google Scholar

Emeneau, Murray B., 1980. The Indian linguistic area revisited. In Emeneau, Murray B. (ed.), Language and Linguistic Area, pp. 197–249. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.Google Scholar

Enfield, Nicholas J., 2003. Linguistic Epidemiology: Semantics and Grammar of Language Contact in Mainland Southeast Asia. London: RoutledgeCurzon.Google Scholar

Enfield, Nicholas J., 2005. Areal linguistics and mainland Southeast Asia. Annual Review of Anthropology 34: 181–206.Google Scholar

Etherington, Paul, 2002. Nggem Morphology and Syntax. MA thesis, Northern Territory University.Google Scholar

Evans, Bethwyn and Palmer, Bill, 2011. Contact-induced change in southern Bougainville. Oceanic Linguistics 50: 483–523.Google Scholar

Evans, Nicholas, 2012. Even more diverse than we had thought: The multiplicity of Trans-Fly languages. In Evans, Nicholas and Klamer, Marian (eds), Melanesian Languages on the Edge of Asia: Challenges for the Twenty-first Century, pp. 109–149. Language Documentation and Conservation Special Publication 5. Honolulu: Language Documentation and Conservation.Google Scholar

Ewing, Michael C., 2010. Agentive alignment in Central Maluku languages. In Ewing, and Klamer, (eds), pp. 119–141.Google Scholar

Ewing, Michael and Klamer, Marian (eds), 2010. East Nusantara: Typological and Areal Analyses. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 618. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Florey, Margaret J., 2010. Negation in the Moluccan languages. In Ewing, and Klamer, (eds), pp. 227–250.Google Scholar

Foley, William A., 1986. The Papuan Languages of New Guinea. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Foley, William A., 2000. The languages of New Guinea. Annual Review of Anthropology 29: 357–404.Google Scholar

Foley, William A., 2005a. Linguistic prehistory in the Sepik-Ramu basin. In Pawley, et al. (eds), pp. 109–144.Google Scholar

Foley, William A., 2005b. Semantic parameters and the unaccusative split in the Austronesian language family. Studies in Language 29: 385–430.Google Scholar

Foley, William A., 2010. Clause linkage and nexus in Papuan languages. In Bril, Isabelle (ed.), Clause Linking and Clause Hierarchy: Syntax and Pragmatics, pp. 27–50. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Foley, William A., in press. The languages of the Sepik-Ramu Basin and environs. In Palmer, Bill (ed.), The Languages and Linguistics of New Guinea: A Comprehensive Guide. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Foley, William A. and Van Valin, Robert D., 1984. Functional Syntax and Universal Grammar. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Friedlaender, Jonathan S. (ed.), 2007. Genes, Language and Culture History in the Southwest Pacific. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Friedlaender, Jonathan S., Friedlaender, F. R., Hodgson, J. A. et al., 2007. Mitochondrial DNA variation in Northern Island Melanesia. In Friedlaender, (ed.), pp. 61–80.Google Scholar

Gil, David, 2015. The Mekong-Mamberamo linguistic area. In Enfield, N. J. and Comrie, Bernard (eds), Mainland Southeast Asian Languages: The State of the Art, pp. 261–350. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Golson, Jack, 1977. The making of the New Guinea Highlands. In Winslow, J. H. (ed.), The Melanesian Environment, pp. 45–56. Canberra: Australian National University Press.Google Scholar

Gravelle, Gilles, 2002. Morphosyntactic properties of Meyah word classes. In Reesink, Ger P. (ed.), Languages of the Eastern Bird’s Head, pp. 109–180. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 524. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Greenberg, Joseph H., 1960. A quantitative approach to the morphological study of language. International Journal of American Linguistics 26: 178–194. Originally published in Spencer, Robert F. (ed.), 1954, Method and Perspective in Anthropology: Papers in Honor of Wilson D. Wallis, Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.Google Scholar

Grimes, Charles E., 1991. The Buru Language of Eastern Indonesia. PhD thesis, Australian National University.Google Scholar

Hammarström, Harald, 2010. Online appendix for ‘A full-scale test of the language farming dispersal hypothesis’ (Diachronica 27: 197–213).Google Scholar

Hammarström, Harald, 2012. Pronouns and the (preliminary) classification of Papuan languages. In Hammarström, and van den Heuvel, (eds), pp. 428–538.Google Scholar

Hammarström, Harald and van den Heuvel, Wilco (eds), 2012. History, Contact and Classification of Papuan Languages, part 2. Special issue of Language and Linguistics in Melanesia. Port Moresby: Linguistic Society of Papua New Guinea.Google Scholar

Haspelmath, Martin, Dryer, Matthew, Gil, David and Comrie, Bernard (eds), 2005. The World Atlas of Language Structures. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Healey, Alan, 1964. The Ok Family in New Guinea. PhD dissertation, Australian National University.Google Scholar

Healey, Alan, 1970. Proto-Awyu-Dumut phonology. In Wurm, S. A. and Laycock, D. C. (eds), Pacific Linguistic Studies in Honour of Arthur Capell, pp. 997–1063. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-13. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Holton, Gary, 2010. Person-marking, verb classes, and and the notion of alignment in Western Pantar. In Ewing, and Klamer, (eds), pp. 97–117.Google Scholar

Kaji, Shigeki (ed.), 2005. Crosslinguistic Studies of Tonal Phenomena: Historical Development, Tone-Syntax Interface, and Descriptive Studies. Tokyo: Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies.Google Scholar

Kaspruś, Alois, 1945. The languages of the Mugil District, NE-New Guinea. Anthropos 37–40: 711–778.Google Scholar

Kennedy, Jean, 2002. Manus from the beginning: An archaeological overview. In Kaufmann, Christian, Schmid, C. Kocher and Ohnemus, S. (eds), Admiralty Islands: Art from the South Seas, pp. 17–29. Zürich: Museum Rietberg.Google Scholar

Kennedy, Jean and Clarke, William, 2004. Cultivated Landscapes of the Southwest Pacific. Resource Management in Asia-Pacific Working Paper, vol. 50. Canberra: Resource Management in Asia-Pacific Program, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, The Australian National University.Google Scholar

Klaffl, Johann and Vormann, Friedrich, 1905. Die Sprachen des Berlinhafen-Bezirks in Deutsch-Neuguinea. Mitteilungen des Seminars für Orientalische Sprachen 8: 1–138.Google Scholar

Klamer, Marian, 2010. A Grammar of Teiwa. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Klamer, Marian and Ewing, Michael, 2010. The languages of East Nusantara: An introduction. In Ewing, and Klamer, (eds), pp. 1–24.Google Scholar

Klamer, Marian, Reesink, Ger P. and van Staden, Mirjam, 2008. East Nusantara as a linguistic area. In Muysken, Pieter (ed.), From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics, pp. 95–149. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Ladefoged, Peter, Cochran, Anne and Disner, Sandra, 1977. Laterals and trills. Journal of the International Phonetic Association 7: 46–54.Google Scholar

Ladefoged, Peter and Maddieson, Ian, 1996. The Sounds of the World’s Languages. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Laidig, Wyn D. and Laidig, Carol J., 1995. A synopsis of Larike morphology and syntax. NUSA 38: 18–42.Google Scholar

Lepofsky, Diane, 1988. The environmental context of Lapita settlement locations. In Kirch, Patrick V. and Hunt, T. L. (eds), The Archaeology of the Lapita Cultural Complex: A Critical Review, pp. 33–47. Thomas Burke Memorial Washington State Museum Monographs, vol. 5. Seattle: Burke Museum.Google Scholar

Lewis, M. Paul, Simons, Gary F. and Fennig, Charles D. (eds), 2014. Ethnologue: Languages of the World, 17th edition. Dallas, TX: SIL International. www.ethnologue.com Google Scholar

Lichtenberk, Frantisek, 1983. A Grammar of Manam. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Lichtenberk, Frantisek, 2013. The rise and demise of possessive classifiers in Austronesian. In Kikusawa, Ritsuko and Reid, Lawrence A. (eds), Historical Linguistics 2011: Selected Papers from the 20th International Conference on Historical Linguistics, Osaka, 25–30 July 2011, pp. 199–225. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Longacre, Robert E., 1972. Hierarchy and Universality of Discourse Constituents on New Guinea Languages: Discussion. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press.Google Scholar

Loughnane, Robyn and Fedden, Sebastian, 2011. Is Oksapmin Ok? A study of the genetic relationship between Oksapmin and the Ok languages. Australian Journal of Linguistics 31: 1–42.Google Scholar

Lynch, John, 1977. Notes on Maisin: An Austronesian language of the Northern Province of Papua New Guinea. Paper presented to the Annual Congress of the Linguistic Society of Papua New Guinea.Google Scholar

MacDonald, Lorna, 1990. A Grammar of Tauya. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Maddieson, Ian, 2013. Lateral consonants. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), chapter 8. http://wals.info/chapter/8 Google Scholar

McElhanon, Kenneth A. and Voorhoeve, C. L., 1970. The Trans-New Guinea phylum: Explorations in Deep Level Genetic Relationships. Pacific Linguistics, vol. B-16. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Milke, Wilhelm, 1958. Zur inneren Gliederung und geschichtlichen Stellung der ozeanisch-austronesischen Sprachen. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie 83: 58–62.Google Scholar

Milke, Wilhelm, 1961. Beiträge zur ozeanischen Linguistik. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie 86: 162–182.Google Scholar

Nettle, Daniel, 1999. Linguistic Diversity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 1997. Sprung from two common sources: Sahul as a linguistic area. In McConvell, Patrick and Evans, Nicholas (eds), Archaeology and Linguistics: Aboriginal Australia in Global Perspective, pp. 135–168. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 2010. Macrofamilies, macroareas and contact. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 361–379. Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar

Pawley, Andrew, 2005. The chequered career of the Trans New Guinea hypothesis: Recent research and its implications. In Pawley, et al. (eds), pp. 67–107.Google Scholar

Pawley, Andrew, 2007. Recent research on the historical relationships of the Papuan languages, or, what does linguistics say about the prehistory of Melanesia? In Friedlaender, Jonathan (ed.), Population Genetics, Linguistics, and Culture History in the Southwest Pacific: A Synthesis, pp. 36–59. New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Pawley, Andrew, 2008. Where and when was Proto Oceanic spoken? Linguistic and archaeological evidence. In Lander, Yury A. and Ogoblin, Alexander K. (eds), Language and Text in the Austronesian World: Studies in Honour of Ülo Sirk, pp. 47–71. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar

Pawley, Andrew, 2012. How reconstructable is Proto Trans New Guinea? Problems, progress, prospects. In Hammarström, and van den Heuvel, (eds), pp. 88–164.Google Scholar

Pawley, Andrew, Attenborough, Robert, Golson, Jack and Hide, Robin (eds), 2005. Papuan Pasts: Cultural, Linguistic and Biological Histories of Papuan-speaking Peoples. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 572. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Pawley, Andrew and Hammarström, Harald, in press. The Trans New Guinea family. In Palmer, Bill (ed.), The Languages and Linguistics of New Guinea: A Comprehensive Guide. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Pilhofer, G., 1933. Grammatik der Kâte-Sprache in Neuguinea. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar

Ray, Sidney H., 1911. Comparative notes on Maisin and other languages of eastern Papua. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 41: 397–405.Google Scholar

Ray, Sidney H., 1913. The languages of the Papuan Gulf District, Papua. Zeitschrift fur Kolonialsprachen 4: 20–80.Google Scholar

Ray, Sidney H., 1923. The languages of the Western Division of Papua. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 53: 332–360.Google Scholar

Ray, Sidney H., 1926. A Comparative Study of the Melanesian Island Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Ray, Sidney H., 1929. The languages of the Central Division of Papua. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 59: 65–96.Google Scholar

Ray, Sidney H., 1932. A Grammar of the Kiwai Language, Fly Delta, Papua, with a Kiwai Vocabulary by E. Baxter Riley. Port Moresby: E.G. Baker, Government Printer.Google Scholar

Ray, Sidney H., 1938. The languages of the Eastern and South-Eastern Divisions of Papua. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 68: 153–208.Google Scholar

Reesink, Ger, 2002. Clause-final negation: Structure and interpretation. Functions of Language 9: 239–268.Google Scholar

Reesink, Ger, 2003. The North Papuan Linkage: A hypothesis. Paper for the Workshop Pioneers of Island Melanesia, Cambridge, April 2003.Google Scholar

Reesink, Ger, 2009. A connection between Bird’s Head and (Proto) Oceanic. In Evans, Bethwyn (ed.), Discovering History through Language: Papers in Honour of Malcolm Ross, pp. 181–192. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 605. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Reesink, Ger, 2010. Prefixation of arguments in West Papuan languages. In Ewing, and Klamer, (eds), pp. 71–95.Google Scholar

Reesink, Ger and Dunn, Michael, 2012. Systematic typological comparison as a tool for investigating language history. In Evans, Nicholas and Klamer, Marian (eds), Melanesian Languages on the Edge of Asia: Challenges for the Twenty-first Century, pp. 34–71. Language Documentation and Conservation Special Publication 5. Honolulu: Language Documentation and Conservation.Google Scholar

Reesink, Ger, Singer, Ruth and Dunn, Michael, 2009. Explaining the linguistic diversity of Sahul using population models. PLoS Biology 7: e1000241.Google Scholar

Remijsen, Bert, 2001. Word-prosodic Systems of Raja Ampat Languages. PhD dissertation, University of Leiden.Google Scholar

Remijsen, Bert, 2002. Lexically contrastive stress accent and lexical tone in Ma’ya. In Gussenhoven, Carlos and Warner, Natasha (eds), Laboratory Phonology, vol. 7, pp. 585–614. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Renfrew, Colin, 2002. ‘The emerging synthesis’: The archaeogenetics of farming/language dispersals and other spread zones. In Bellwood, and Renfrew, (eds), pp. 3–16.Google Scholar

Roberts, John R., 1997. Switch-reference in Papua New Guinea: A preliminary survey. In Pawley, Andrew (ed.), Papers in Papuan Linguistics, no. 3, pp. 101–241. Pacific Linguistics, vol. A-87. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 1984. Maisin: A preliminary sketch. In Papers in New Guinea Linguistics, no. 23, pp. 1–82. Pacific Linguistics, vol. A-63. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 1987. A contact-induced morphosyntactic change in the Bel languages of Papua New Guinea. In Laycock, Donald C. and Winter, W. (eds), A World of Language: Papers Presented to Professor S. A. Wurm on his 65th Birthday, pp. 583–601. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-100. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 1988. Proto Oceanic and the Austronesian Languages of Western Melanesia. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-98. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 1993. Tonogenesis in the North Huon Gulf chain. In Edmondson, Jerold A. and Gregerson, Kenneth J. (eds), Tonality in Austronesian Languages, pp. 133–153. Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications, vol. 24. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 1994. Areal phonological features in north central New Ireland. In Dutton, Tom and Tryon, Darrell (eds), Language Contact and Change in the Austronesian World, pp. 551–572. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 1996. Contact-induced change and the comparative method: Cases from Papua New Guinea. In Durie, Mark and Ross, Malcolm (eds), The Comparative Method Reviewed: Regularity and Irregularity in Language Change, pp. 180–217. New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 2001. Contact-induced change in Oceanic languages in north-west Melanesia. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, R. M. W. (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 134–166. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 2003. Diagnosing prehistoric language contact. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Motives for Language Change, pp. 174–198. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 2005a. Pronouns as a preliminary diagnostic for grouping Papuan languages. In Pawley, et al. (eds), pp. 15–66.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 2005b. Towards a reconstruction of the history of tone in the Trans New Guinea family. In Kaji, (ed.), pp. 3–31.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 2007. Calquing and metatypy. Journal of Language Contact, Thema 1: 116–143.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 2008. A history of metatypy in the Bel languages. Journal of Language Contact, Thema 2 (1): 149–164.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 2013. Diagnosing contact processes from their outcomes: The importance of life stages. Journal of Language Contact 6: 5–47.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 2014. Reconstructing the history of languages in northwest New Britain: Inheritance and contact. Journal of Historical Linguistics 4: 84–132.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm and Næss, Åshild, 2007. An Oceanic origin for Äiwoo, the language of the Reef Islands? Oceanic Linguistics 46: 456–498.Google Scholar

Sahlins, Marshall D., 1963. Poor man, rich man, big-man, chief: Political types in Melanesia and Polynesia. Comparative Studies in Society and History 5: 285–303.Google Scholar

Schapper, Antoinette, 2009. Bunaq: A Papuan Language of Central Timor. PhD thesis, The Australian National University.Google Scholar

Schapper, Antoinette, 2014. Elevation in the spatial deictic systems of Alor-Pantar languages. In Klamer, Marian (ed.), Alor-Pantar Languages: History and Typology, pp. 247–284. Berlin: Language Science Press.Google Scholar

Schapper, Antoinette, Huber, Juliette and van Engelenhoven, Aone, 2014. The relatedness of Timor-Kisar and Alor-Pantar languages: A preliminary demonstration. In Klamer, Marian (ed.), Alor-Pantar Languages: History and Typology, pp. 99–154. Berlin: Language Science Press.Google Scholar

Scheinfeldt, Laura B., Friedlaender, F. R., Friedlaender, Jonathan S. et al., 2007. Y-chromosome variation in Northern Island Melanesia. In Friedlaender, (ed.), pp. 81–95.Google Scholar

Smallhorn, Jacinta, 2011. The Binanderean Languages of Papua New Guinea: Reconstruction and Subgrouping. Studies in Language Change, vol. 9. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Smith, Ellen, 2016. Contact-induced change in a highly endangered language of northern Bougainville. Australian Journal of Linguistics 36 (3): 369–405.Google Scholar

Specht, Jim, 2005. Revisiting the Bismarcks: Some alternative views. In Pawley, Andrew, Attenborough, Robert, Golson, Jack and Hide, Robin (eds), Papuan Pasts: Cultural, Linguistic and Biological Histories of Papuan-Speaking Peoples, pp. 235–288. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 572. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Spriggs, Matthew, 1996. Chronology and colonisation in Island Southeast Asia and the Pacific: New data and an evaluation. In Davidson, Janet, Irwin, Geoffrey, Leach, Foss, Pawley, Andrew and Brown, Dorothy (eds), Oceanic Culture History: Essays in Honour of Roger Green, pp. 33–50. Dunedin: New Zealand Journal of Archaeology.Google Scholar

Spriggs, Matthew J. T., 1997. The Island Melanesians. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Strong, W. M., 1911. The Maisin language. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 41: 381–396.Google Scholar

Summerhayes, Glenn R., Leavesley, Matthew, Fairbairn, Andrew et al., 2010. Human adaptation and plant use in highland New Guinea 49,000 to 44,000 years ago. Science 330: 78–81.Google Scholar

Suter, Edgar, 2012. Verbs with pronominal object prefixes in Finisterre-Huon languages. In Hammarström, and van den Heuvel, (eds), pp. 23–59.Google Scholar

Swadling, Pamela and Hide, Robin, 2005. Changing landscape and social interaction: Looking at agricultural history from a Sepik-Ramu perspective. In Pawley, et al. (eds), pp. 289–327.Google Scholar

Terrill, Angela, 2002. Systems of nominal classification in East Papuan languages. Oceanic Linguistics 41: 63–88.Google Scholar

Thomason, Sarah Grey, 2001. Language Contact: An Introduction. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar

Thurston, William R., 1982. A Comparative Study of Anêm and Lusi. Pacific Linguistics, vol. B-83. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Thurston, William R., 1987. Processes of Change in the Languages of North-Western New Britain. Pacific Linguistics, vol. B-99. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Thurston, William R., 1989. How exoteric languages build a lexicon: Esoterogeny in West New Britain. In Harlow, Ray and Hooper, Robin (eds), VICAL 1, Oceanic Languages: Papers from the Fifth International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics, pp. 555–579. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand.Google Scholar

Thurston, William R., 1992. Sociolinguistic typology and other factors effecting change in northwestern New Britain, Papua New Guinea. In Dutton, Tom (ed.), Culture Change, Language Change: Case Studies from Melanesia, pp. 123–139. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-120. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Thurston, William R., 1994. Renovation and innovation in the languages of north-western New Britain. In Dutton, Tom and Tryon, Darrell (eds), Language Contact and Change in the Austronesian World, pp. 573–609. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Usher, Timothy and Suter, Edgar, 2015. The Anim languages of Southern New Guinea. Oceanic Linguistics 54 (1): 110–142.Google Scholar

Van Valin, Robert D. Jr and LaPolla, Randy J., 1997. Syntax: Structure, Meaning and Function. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Voorhoeve, C. L., 2001. Proto Awyu-Dumut phonology II. In Pawley, Andrew, Ross, Malcolm and Tryon, Darrell (eds), The Boy from Bundaberg: Studies in Melanesian Linguistics in Honour of Tom Dutton, pp. 361–381. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 514. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Weinreich, Uriel, 1953. Languages in Contact: Findings and Problems. Publications of the Linguistic Circle of New York, vol. 1. New York: Linguistic Circle of New York.Google Scholar

Wurm, Stefan A., 1975a. Language distribution in the New Guinea area. In Wurm, (ed.), pp. 3–38.Google Scholar

Wurm, Stefan A. (ed.), 1975b. New Guinea Area Languages and Language Study, vol. 1: Papuan Languages and the New Guinea Linguistic Scene. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-38. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Wurm, Stefan A., 1982. The Papuan Languages of Oceania. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar

Wurm, Stefan A. and Hattori, Shirō (eds), 1981. Language Atlas of the Pacific Area, part 1. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-66. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Wurm, Stefan A. and McElhanon, K. A., 1975. Papuan language classification problems. In Wurm, (ed.), pp. 145–164.Google Scholar

Wurm, Stefan A., Voorhoeve, C. L. and McElhanon, K. A., 1975. The Trans-New Guinea phylum in general. In Wurm, (ed.), pp. 299–322.Google Scholar

Arthur, Bill and Morphy, Frances (eds), 2005. Macquarie Atlas of Indigenous Australia. New South Wales: Macquarie Library Pty.Google Scholar

Attenbrow, Val, 2010. Sydney’s Aboriginal Past: Investigating the Archaeological and Historical Records. University of New South Wales Press.Google Scholar

Ball, Douglas, 2007. On ergativity and accusativity in Proto-Polynesian and Proto-Central Pacific. Oceanic Linguistics 46 (1): 128–153.Google Scholar

Beaglehole, J. C. (ed.), 1969. The Journals of Captain James Cook: The Voyage of the Resolution and Adventure, 1772–1775. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press for the Hakluyt Society.Google Scholar

Bedford, Stuart, Sand, Christophe and Connaughton, Sean P. (eds), 2007. Oceanic Explorations: Lapita and Western Pacific Settlement. Canberra: Australian National University Press.Google Scholar

Biggs, Bruce, 1965. Direct and indirect inheritance in Rotuma. Lingua 13: 373–405. Revised version in Geraghty, and Tent, (eds), pp. 1–32.Google Scholar

Biggs, Bruce, 1991. A linguist revisits the New Zealand bush. In Pawley, Andrew K. (ed.), Man and a Half: Essays in Pacific Anthropology and Ethnobiology in Honour of Ralph Bulmer, pp. 67–72. Auckland: The Polynesian Society.Google Scholar

Blust, Robert A., 1981. Some remarks on labiovelar correspondences in Oceanic languages. In Hollyman, and Pawley, (eds), pp. 229–253.Google Scholar

Blust, Robert A., 1987. Rennell-Bellona /l/ and the ‘Hiti’ substratum. In Laycock, Donald C. and Winter, Werner (eds), A World of Language: Papers Presented to Professor S. A. Wurm on his Sixty Fifth Birthday, pp. 69–79. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-100. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Blust, Robert, 2005. Review of Lynch, Ross and Crowley 2002. Oceanic Linguistics 44 (2): 544–558.Google Scholar

Blust, Robert, 2008. Remote Melanesia: One history or two? An addendum to Donohue and Denham. Oceanic Linguistics 47 (2): 445–459.Google Scholar

Capell, Arthur, 1941. A New Fijian Dictionary. Sydney: Australian Medical Publishing Company.Google Scholar

Capell, Arthur, 1943. The Linguistic Position of South-East Papua. Sydney: The Australasian Medical Publishing Co.Google Scholar

Capell, Arthur, 1962. Oceanic linguistics today. Current Anthropology 3 (4): 371–428.Google Scholar

Capell, Arthur, 1971. The Austronesian languages of Australian New Guinea. In Sebeok, T. E. (ed.), Current Trends in Linguistics, vol. 8: Oceania, pp. 240–340. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar

Churchward, C. Maxwell, 1940. Rotuman Grammar and Dictionary. Sydney: Australasian Medical Publishing Co.Google Scholar

Churchward, C. Maxwell, 1959. Tongan Dictionary. Government of Tonga.Google Scholar

Clark, Ross, 1986. Linguistic convergence in Central Vanuatu. In Geraghty, Paul, Carrington, Lois and Wurm, Stephen A. (eds), FOCAL II: Papers from the Fourth International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics, pp. 333–342. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-94. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Clark, Ross, 1994. The Polynesian outliers as a locus of language contact. In Dutton, and Tryon, (eds), pp. 109–139.Google Scholar

Codrington, R. H., 1885. The Melanesian Languages. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar

Codrington, R. H., 1891. The Melanesians: Studies in their Anthropology and Folk Lore. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar

Cowan, H. K. J., 1962. Comments on Arthur Capell, ‘Oceanic linguistics today’. Current Anthropology 3: 398–400.Google Scholar

Crowley, Terry, 1990. An Illustrated Bislama–English and English–Bislama Dictionary. Vila: Pacific Languages Unit, University of the South Pacific.Google Scholar

Crowley, Terry, 2000. An Erromangan (Sye) Dictionary. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 508. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Davenport, William, 1962. Comments on Arthur Capell, ‘Oceanic linguistics today’. Current Anthropology 3: 400–402.Google Scholar

Deacon, A. Bernard, 1934. Malekula: A Vanishing People in the New Hebrides. London: Routledge.Google Scholar

Dempwolff, Otto, 1920. Die Lautentsprechungen der indonesischen lippenlaute in einigen anderen austronesischen Südseesprachen. Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, Supplement 2. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar

Dempwolff, Otto, 1937. Vergleichende Lautlehre des Austronesischen Wortschatzes, vol. 2. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar

Dixon, R. M. W., 1980. The Languages of Australia. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark, 2005. Word order in New Guinea: Dispelling a myth. Oceanic Linguistics 44 (2): 527–536.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark and Denham, Tim, 2008. The languages of Lapita: Vanuatu and an early Papuan presence in the Pacific. Oceanic Linguistics 47 (2): 433–444.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark and Denham, Tim, 2012. Lapita and Proto-Oceanic: Thinking outside the pot? The Journal of Pacific History 47 (4): 443–457.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark and Musgrave, Simon, 2007. Typology and the linguistic macrohistory of Island Melanesia. Oceanic Linguistics 46 (2): 348–387.Google Scholar

Donohue, Mark and Schapper, Antoinette, 2008. Whence the Austronesian indirect possession construction? Oceanic Linguistics 47 (2): 316–327.Google Scholar

Dubois, M. J., 1976. Peuplement du Pacifique. Bulletin de la Société d’Etudes Historiques de la Nouvelle-Calédonie 28: 12–28.Google Scholar

Dubois, M. J., 1981. Histoire résumée de Maré (Iles Loyauté). Publication 27. Nouméa: Société d’Etudes Historiques de la Nouvelle-Calédonie.Google Scholar

Dubois, M. J., 1982. Kwênyii: l’Ile des Pins aux temps anciens. Publication 30. Nouméa: Société d’Etudes Historiques de la Nouvelle-Calédonie.Google Scholar

Dunn, Michael, Foley, Robert, Levinson, Stephen, Reesink, Ger and Terrill, Angela, 2007. Statistical reasoning in the evaluation of typological diversity in Island Melanesia. Oceanic Linguistics 46 (2): 388–403.Google Scholar

Dunn, Michael, Terrill, Angela, Reesink, Ger, Foley, Robert A. and Levinson, Stephen C., 2005. Structural phylogenetics and the reconstruction of ancient language history. Science 309 (5743): 2072–2075.Google Scholar

Dutton, Tom and Tryon, Darrell T. (eds), 1994. Language Contact and Change in the Austronesian World. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Evans, Bethwyn (ed.), 2009. Discovering History through Language: Papers in Honour of Malcolm Ross. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 605. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Evans, Bethwyn and Palmer, Bill, 2011. Contact-induced change in southern Bougainville. Oceanic Linguistics 50 (2): 483–523.Google Scholar

Foley, William A., 1986. The Papuan Languages of New Guinea. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Fox, C. E., 1955. A Dictionary of the Nggela Language. Auckland: Unity Press.Google Scholar

Fox, Charles E., 1978. Arosi Dictionary. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-57. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

François, Alexandre, 2006. Are Vanikoro languages really Austronesian? Paper read at Second Conference on Austronesian Languages and Linguistics, Oxford.Google Scholar

François, Alexandre, 2007. Noun articles in Torres and Banks languages: Conservation and innovation. In Siegel, , Lynch, and Eades, (eds), pp. 313–326.Google Scholar

François, Alexandre, 2009. The languages of Vanikoro: Three lexicons and one grammar. In Evans, (ed.), pp. 103–126.Google Scholar

Geraghty, Paul A., 1977. Fijian dialect diversity and foreigner talk: The evidence of pre-missionary manuscripts. In Schütz, (ed.), pp. 51–67.Google Scholar

Geraghty, Paul A., 1983. The History of the Fijian Languages. Oceanic Linguistics Special Publication 19. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Geraghty, Paul, 1989. Proto Southern Oceanic and its relationships. In Harlow, Ray and Hooper, Robin (eds), VICAL 1: Oceanic Languages: Papers from the Fifth International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics, special publication: Te Reo. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand.Google Scholar

Geraghty, Paul, 1994. Linguistic evidence for the Tongan Empire. In Dutton, and Tryon, (eds), pp. 233–249.Google Scholar

Geraghty, Paul, 1996. Problems with Proto Central Pacific. In Lynch, John and Pat, Fa’afo (eds), Oceanic Studies: Proceedings of the First International Conference on Oceanic Linguistics, pp. 85–93. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-133. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Geraghty, Paul, 2001. Amazing -a: The suffix that named the Pacific world. Rongorongo Studies 11 (2): 63–74.Google Scholar

Geraghty, Paul, 2004. Borrowed plants in Fiji and Polynesia: Some linguistic evidence. In Geraghty, and Tent, (eds), pp. 65–98.Google Scholar

Geraghty, Paul and Nunn, Patrick, 2013. Pre-European contact between Australia and New Caledonia: linguistic and other evidence. Paper presented at COOL9 [Ninth International Conference on Oceanic Linguistics], University of Newcastle, NSW, Australia.Google Scholar

Geraghty, Paul and Tent, Jan, 2004. Borrowing: A Pacific Perspective. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

Grace, George W., 1961. Austronesian linguistics and culture history. American Anthropologist 63: 359–368.Google Scholar

Grace, George W., 1962. Comments on Arthur Capell, ‘Oceanic linguistics today’. Current Anthropology 3: 408–410.Google Scholar

Grace, George W., 1981. An Essay on Language. Columbia, SC: Hornbeam.Google Scholar

Green, Roger, 1991. Near and remote Oceania: Disestablishing ‘Melanesia’ in culture history. In Pawley, Andrew (ed.), Man and a Half: Essays in Pacific Anthropology and Ethnobiology in Honour of Ralph Bulmer, pp. 491–502. Auckland: The Polynesian Society.Google Scholar

Harrison, Sheldon P., 1981. Recent directions in Oceanic linguistics: A review of the contributions to Studies in Pacific Languages and Cultures. Oceanic Linguistics 20: 151–231.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2012. Early English and the Celtic hypothesis. In Nevalainen, Terttu and Traugott, Elizabeth Closs (eds), The Oxford Handbook of the History of English, pp. 497–507. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Hocart, A. M., 1923. Who are the Melanesians? Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland 53: 472.Google Scholar

Hollyman, Jim and Pawley, Andrew (eds), 1981. Studies in Pacific Languages and Cultures in Honour of Bruce Biggs. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand.Google Scholar

Horton, David (ed.), 1994. The Encyclopaedia of Aboriginal Australia. Canberra: Aboriginal Studies Press.Google Scholar

Howells, William, 1973. The Pacific Islanders. New York: Scribners.Google Scholar

Jackson, Geoffrey W., 2001. Tuvaluan Dictionary. Suva: the author.Google Scholar

Kirch, Patrick Vinton, 1997. The Lapita Peoples: Ancestors of the Oceanic World. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Labillardière, J., 1800. An Account of a Voyage in Search of La Pérouse. John Stockdale.Google Scholar

Layard, John, 1942. Stone Men of Malekula. London: Chatto and Windus.Google Scholar

Lincoln, Peter, 1978. Reef-Santa Cruz as Austronesian. In Wurm, Stephen and Carrington, Lois (eds), Second International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics: Proceedings, pp. 929–967. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-61. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Lindstrom, Lamont, 1986. Kwamera Dictionary. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-95. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Lynch, John, 1977. Lenakel Dictionary. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-55. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Lynch, John, 1981. Melanesian diversity and Polynesian homogeneity: The other side of the coin. Oceanic Linguistics 20: 95–129.Google Scholar

Lynch, John, 2001. The Linguistic History of Southern Vanuatu. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 509. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Lynch, John, 2002. The Proto-Oceanic labiovelars: Some new observations. Oceanic Linguistics 41 (2): 310–362.Google Scholar

Lynch, John, 2005. The apicolabial shift in Nese. Oceanic Linguistics 44 (2): 389–403.Google Scholar

Lynch, John, 2009. At sixes and sevens: The development of numeral systems in Vanuatu and New Caledonia. In Evans, (ed.), pp. 391–411.Google Scholar

Lynch, John, Ross, Malcolm and Crowley, Terry, 2002. The Oceanic Languages. Curzon Language Family Series. Richmond, UK: Curzon Press.Google Scholar

Lynch, John and Tepahae, Philip, 2001. Anejom Dictionary. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 510. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Lynch, John and Tryon, D. T., 1985. Central-Eastern Oceanic: A subgrouping hypothesis. In Pawley, Andrew and Carrington, Lois (eds), Austronesian Linguistics at the Eleventh Pacific Science Congress, pp. 31–52. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-88. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Muller, Kal, 1972. Taboos and magic rule Namba lives. National Geographic 141 (1): 56–83.Google Scholar

Næss, Åshild, 2006. Bound nominal elements in Äiwoo (Reefs): A reappraisal of the ‘multiple noun class systems’. Oceanic Linguistics 45 (2): 269–296.Google Scholar

Næss, Åshild, 2013. From Austronesian voice to Oceanic transitivity: Äiwoo as the ‘missing link’. Paper presented at COOL9 [Ninth International Conference on Oceanic Linguistics], University of Newcastle, NSW, Australia.Google Scholar

Pawley, Andrew, 1972. On the internal relationships of Eastern Oceanic languages. In Green, Roger and Kelly, M. (eds), Studies in Oceanic Culture History, vol. 3, pp. 1–142. Pacific Anthropological Records. Honolulu: Bishop Museum.Google Scholar

Pawley, Andrew, 1981. Melanesian diversity and Polynesian homogeneity: A unified explanation for language. In Hollyman, and Pawley, (eds), pp. 269–309.Google Scholar

Pawley, Andrew, 2006. Explaining the aberrant Austronesian languages of Southeast Melanesia: 150 years of debate. Journal of the Polynesian Society 115 (3): 215–258.Google Scholar

Pawley, Andrew, 2007. The origins of Early Lapita culture: The testimony of historical linguistics. In Bedford, , Sand, and Connaughton, (eds), pp. 17–49.Google Scholar

Pawley, Andrew, 2009. The role of the Solomon Islands in the first settlement of Remote Oceania: Bringing linguistic evidence to an archaeological debate. In Adelaar, Alexander and Pawley, Andrew (eds), Austronesian Historical Linguistics and Culture History: A Festschrift for Robert Blust, pp. 515–540. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 601. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Pietrusewsky, Michael and Douglas, Michele T., 1993. Tooth ablation in old Hawai‘i. Journal of the Polynesian Society 102 (3): 255–272.Google Scholar

Ray, Sidney Herbert, 1926. A Comparative Study of the Melanesian Island Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Reid, Lawrence A., 1994. Unravelling the linguistic histories of Philippine Negritos. In Dutton, and Tryon, (eds), pp. 443–475.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 1996. Contact-induced change and the comparative method: Cases from Papua New Guinea. In Durie, Mark and Ross, Malcolm (eds), The Comparative Method Reviewed: Regularity and Irregularity in Language Change, pp. 180–217. New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 2001. Is there an East Papuan phylum? Evidence from pronouns. In Pawley, Andrew, Ross, Malcolm and Tryon, Darrell (eds), The Boy From Bundaberg: Studies in Melanesian Linguistics in Honour of Tom Dutton, pp. 301–321. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 514. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 2004. The grammaticalization of directional verbs in Oceanic languages. In Bril, Isabelle and Ozanne-Rivierre, Françoise (eds), Complex Predicates in Oceanic Languages: Studies in the Dynamics of Binding and Boundness, pp. 297–329. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 2005. Pronouns as a preliminary diagnostic for grouping Papuan languages. In Pawley, Andrew, Attenborough, Robert, Golson, Jack and Hide, Robin (eds), Papuan Pasts: Cultural, Linguistic and Biological Histories of the Papuan-Speaking Peoples, pp. 15–65. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 572. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm and Næss, Åshild, 2007. An Oceanic origin for Äiwoo, the language of the Reef Islands? Oceanic Linguistics 46: 456–498.Google Scholar

Sand, Christophe, 1996. Le début du peuplement austronésien de la Nouvelle-Calédonie: données archéologiques récentes. Les cahiers de l’archéologie en Nouvelle-Calédonie, vol. 6. Nouméa: Département de l’archéologie, Service Territorial des Musées et du Patrimoine.Google Scholar

Schmitz, Carl A., 1962. Comments on Arthur Capell, ‘Oceanic linguistics today’. Current Anthropology 3: 417–420.Google Scholar

Schütz, Albert (ed.), 1977. Fijian Language Studies: Borrowing and Pidginization. Bulletin of the Fiji Museum, vol. 4. Suva: Fiji Museum.Google Scholar

Siegel, Jeff, 2016. Contact-induced grammatical change in Melanesia: Who were the agents of change? Australian Journal of Linguistics 36 (3): 406–428.Google Scholar

Siegel, Jeff, Lynch, John and Eades, Diana (eds), 2007. Language Description, History and Development: Linguistic Indulgence in Memory of Terry Crowley. Creole Language Library, vol. 30. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Speiser, Felix, 1946. Versuch einer Siedlungsgeschichte der Südsee. Denkschriften der schweizerischen naturforschenden Gesellschaft, vol. 72: 1.Google Scholar

Speiser, Felix, 1990. Ethnology of Vanuatu: An Early Twentieth-Century Study, translated by Stephenson, D. Q.. Bathurst: Crawford House Press.Google Scholar

Spriggs, Matthew, 1997. The Island Melanesians. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Terrill, Angela, 2002. Systems of nominal classification in East Papuan languages. Oceanic Linguistics 41: 63–88.Google Scholar

Terrill, Angela, 2011. Languages in contact: An exploration of stability and change in the Solomon Islands. Oceanic Linguistics 50 (2): 312–337.Google Scholar

Thurston, William R., 1982. A Comparative Study in Anêm and Lusi. Pacific Linguistics, vol. B-83. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Thurston, William R., 1994. Renovation and innovation in the languages of north-western New Britain. In Dutton, and Tryon, (eds), pp. 573–609.Google Scholar

Tryon, Darrell T., 1982. The Solomons and Vanuatu: Varying responses to diversity. In May, R. J. and Nelson, Hank (eds), Melanesia: Beyond Diversity, pp. 241–248. Canberra: Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University.Google Scholar

Tryon, Darrell T., 1994. Language contact and contact-induced language change in the Eastern Outer Islands, Solomon Islands. In Dutton, and Tryon, (eds), pp. 611–648.Google Scholar

Tryon, Darrell T. and Hackman, B. D., 1983. Solomon Islands Languages: An Internal Classification. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-72. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Wurm, Stephen, 1954. The Indonesian element in Melanesia: A reply. Journal of the Polynesian Society 63: 266–273.Google Scholar

Wurm, Stephen, 1978. Reefs-Santa Cruz: Austronesian, but… In Wurm, Stephen and Carrington, Lois (eds), Second International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics: Proceedings, pp. 969–1010. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-61. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Wurm, Stephen A., 1982. Papuan Languages of Oceania. Ars Linguistica, vol. 7. Tübingen: Günter Narr.Google Scholar

Wurm, Stephen, 1985. Language contact and special lexical developments. In Pieper, Ursula and Stickel, Gerhard (eds), Studia Linguistica Diachronica et Synchronica: Werner Winter sexagenario anno MCMLXXXIII, pp. 961–971. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Bender, Byron W., et al., 2003. Proto-Micronesian reconstructions, parts I, II. Oceanic Linguistics 42: 1–110, 271–358.Google Scholar

Blust, Robert, 1980. More on the origin of glottalic consonants. Lingua 52: 123–156.Google Scholar

Blust, Robert, 1981. Variation of retention rate among Austronesian languages. Paper presented at the Third International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics, Denpasar, Bali.Google Scholar

Blust, Robert, 2000. Chamorro historical phonology. Oceanic Linguistics 39: 83–123.Google Scholar

von Chamisso, Adelbert, 1864 [1836]. Reise um die Welt. Berlin: Weidmann.Google Scholar

Costenoble, Hermann, 1940. Die Chamoro-Sprache. The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff.Google Scholar

Elbert, Samuel H., 1972. A Puluwat Dictionary. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-24. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Fritz, Georg, 1911. Die zentralkarolinische Sprache. Berlin: Reimer.Google Scholar

Goodenough, Ward H., 1992. Gradual and quantum changes in the history of Chuukese (Trukese) phonology. Oceanic Linguistics 31: 93–114.Google Scholar

Goodenough, Ward H. and Sugita, Hiroshi (eds), 1990. Trukese–English Dictionary, Supplementary Volume: English–Trukese Finderlist. Philadelphia: American Philosophical Society.Google Scholar

Grant, Anthony P., 2002a. Fabric, pattern, shift and diffusion: What change in Oregon Penutian languages can tell historical linguists. In Buszard-Welcher, Laura (ed.), Proceedings of the Meeting of the Hokan-Penutian Workshop, June 17–18, 2000, University of California at Berkeley, report 11: Survey of California and Other Indian Languages, pp. 33–56. Berkeley, CA: Department of Linguistics, University of California.Google Scholar

Grant, Anthony P., 2002b. Problems in placing Palauan within Malayo-Polynesian. Unpublished manuscript, University of Manchester.Google Scholar

Grant, Anthony P., 2003. Review of Ruth King, The Lexical Basis of Grammatical Borrowing: A Prince Edward Island Case Study (Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 2000). Word 54 (3): 251–256.Google Scholar

Grant, Anthony P., 2014. The ‘language of Tobi’ as presented in Horace Holden’s Narrative: Evidence for restructuring and lexical mixture in a Nuclear Micronesian-based pidgin. In Buchstaller, Isabelle, Holmberg, Anders and Almoaily, Mohammad (eds), Pidgins and Creoles beyond Africa-Europe Encounters, pp. 41–56. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Hall, Robert A. Jr, 1945. English loan-words in Micronesian languages. Language 21: 212–217.Google Scholar

Holden, Horace, 1836. Narrative of the Shipwreck, Captivity and Sufferings of Horace Holden and Benj. H. Nute. Boston: Russell, Shattuck and Co.Google Scholar

Izui, Hironasuke, 1965. The languages of Micronesia: Their origin and diversity. Lingua 15: 349–359.Google Scholar

Jackson, Frederick Henry, 1983. The Internal and External Relationships of the Trukic Languages of Micronesia. PhD dissertation, University of Hawai‘i. Ann Arbor: University Microfilms International.Google Scholar

Jackson, Frederick H. and Marck, Jeffrey C., 1991. Carolinian–English Dictionary. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Jensen, John Thayer, 1977. Yapese Reference Grammar. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Jensen, John Thayer, Pugram, Leo David and Defeg, Raphael, 1977. Yapese–English Dictionary. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Josephs, Lewis S., 1975. Palauan Reference Grammar. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Josephs, Lewis S., 1977. Handbook of Palauan Grammar, two volumes. Koror: Bureau of Curriculum and Instruction, Ministry of Education.Google Scholar

Josephs, Lewis S., 1984. The impact of borrowing on Palauan. In Bender, Byron W. (ed.), Studies in Micronesian Linguistics, pp. 81–123. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-80. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Lynch, John, Ross, Malcolm and Crowley, Terry, 2002. The Oceanic Languages. Curzon Language Family Series. Richmond, Surrey: Curzon Press.Google Scholar

McManus, , Edwin, S.J., edited by Josephs, Lewis S., 1977. Palauan–English Dictionary. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Reid, Lawrence A., 2002. Morphosyntactic evidence for the position of Chamorro in the Austronesian language family. In Bauer, Robert S. (ed.), Collected Papers on Southeast Asian and Pacific Linguistics, pp. 63–94. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Rodríguez-Ponga Salamanca, R., 1995. El elemento español en la lengua chamorra (Islas Marianas). Madrid: Servicio de Publicaciones de la Universidad Complutense.Google Scholar

Ross, Malcolm, 1996. Is Yapese Oceanic? In Nothofer, Bernd (ed.), Reconstruction, Classification, Description: Festschrift in Honor of Isidore Dyen, pp. 121–166. Hamburg: Abera.Google Scholar

Sakiyama, Osamu, 1982. The characteristics of Nguluwan from the viewpoint of language contact. In Aoyagi, Machiko (ed.), Islanders and their Outside World: A Report of the Cultural Anthropological Research in the Caroline Islands of Micronesia in the Years 1980–1981, pp. 105–127. Tokyo: Committee for Micronesian Research, St Paul’s (Rikkyo) University.Google Scholar

Salas Palomo, R. and Stolz, Thomas, 2008. Pro or contra Hispanisms: Attitudes of native speakers of modern Chamoru. In Stolz, Thomas, Bakker, D. and Salas Palomo, R. (eds), Hispanisation: The Impact of Spanish on the Lexicon and Grammar of the Indigenous Languages of Austronesia and the Americas, pp. 237–267. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Sohn, Ho-Min 1975. Woleaian Reference Grammar. PALI Language Texts. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Sohn, Ho-Min and Bender, Byron W., 1973. A Ulithian Grammar. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-23. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Sohn, Ho-Min and Tawerilmang, Anthony F., 1975. Woleaian–English Dictionary. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Thomason, Sarah Grey, 2000. Linguistic areas and language history. In Gilbers, Dicky, Nerbonne, John and Schaeken, Jos (eds), Proceedings of the Groningen Conference on Languages in Contact, pp. 311–327. Amsterdam: Rodopi.Google Scholar

Topping, Donald M. (with the assistance of Dungca, Bernadita C.), 1973. Chamorro Reference Grammar. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Topping, Donald M. and Ogo, Pedro M., 1980. Spoken Chamorro. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Topping, Donald M., Ogo, Pedro M. and Dungca, Bernadita C., 1975. Chamorro–English Dictionary. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar

Walsh, John A. and Harui-Walsh, Eulalia, 1979. Loan words in Ulithian. Anthropological Linguistics 21: 154–161.Google Scholar

Zobel, Erik, 2002. The position of Chamorro and Palauan in the Austronesian family tree: Evidence from verb morphosyntax. In Wouk, Fay and Ross, Malcolm (eds), The History and Typology of Western Austronesian Voice Systems, pp. 406–434. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 520. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

Andrade, Manuel J., 1933. Quileute. In Boas, Franz (ed.), 1933–1938, Handbook of American Indian Languages, part 3, pp. 149–292. Glückstadt, Hamburg and New York: J. J. Augustin.Google Scholar

Aoki, Haruo, 1962. Nez Perce and Northern Sahaptin: A binary comparison. International Journal of American Linguistics 28: 172–182.Google Scholar

Beck, David, 2000. Grammatical convergence and the genesis of diversity in the Northwest Coast Sprachbund. Anthropological Linguistics 42 (2): 147–213.Google Scholar

Bereznak, Catherine, 1995. The Pueblo Region as a Linguistic Area: Diffusion among the Indigenous Languages of the Southwest United States. Unpublished PhD thesis, Louisiana State University.Google Scholar

Blansitt, E. L., 1975. Progressive aspect. Working Papers on Language Universals 18: 1–34.Google Scholar

Boas, Franz, 1921. Ethnology of the Kwakiutl. Bureau of American Ethnology Annual Report 35, for the Years 1913–1914. Washington.Google Scholar

Boas, Franz, 1947. Kwakiutl Grammar, edited by Yampolsky, Helene Boas. Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, vol. 37.2.Google Scholar

Boas, Franz and Deloria, Ella, 1941. Dakota Grammar. Memoirs of the National Academy of Sciences, vol. XXIII.2. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office.Google Scholar

Booker, Karen M., 1980. Comparative Muskogean: Aspects of Proto-Muskogean Verb Morphology. Unpublished PhD thesis, University of Kansas.Google Scholar

Booker, Karen M., 1991. Languages of the Aboriginal Southeast: An Annotated Bibliography. Native American Bibliography Series, vol. 15. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press.Google Scholar

Booker, Karen M., 2005. Muskogean historical phonology. In Hardy, and Scancarelli, (eds), pp. 246–298.Google Scholar

Booker, Karen M., Hudson, Charles and Rankin, Robert, 1992. Place name identification and multilingualism in the sixteenth-century Southeast. Ethnohistory 39: 399–451.Google Scholar

Brain, Jeffrey P., Roth, George and de Reuse, Willem J., 2004. Tunica, Biloxi, and Ofo. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 586–597.Google Scholar

Bright, William, 1957. The Karok Language. University of California Publications in Linguistics, vol. 13.Google Scholar

Bright, William, 1959. Review of The Yurok language, by R. H. Robins. Language 35: 100–104.Google Scholar

Brown, James A., 2004. Exchange and interaction until 1500. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 677–685.Google Scholar

Bybee, Joan, Perkins, Revere and Pagliuca, William, 1994. The Evolution of Grammar: Tense, Aspect and Modality in the Languages of the World. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

Byington, Cyrus, 1915. A Dictionary of the Choctaw Language, edited by Swanton, John R. and Halbert, Henry. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office. 1973 reprint, Oklahoma City, OK: Oklahoma City Indian Calendar, Inc.Google Scholar

Callaghan, Catherine, 1964. Phonemic borrowing in Lake Miwok. In Bright, William (ed.), Studies in Californian Linguistics, pp. 46–53. University of California Publications in Linguistics, vol. 34. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Callaghan, Catherine, 1987. Lake Miwok naturalization of borrowed phonemes. In Joseph, Brian and Zwicky, Arnold (eds), A Festschrift for Ilse Lehiste, pp. 84–93. Working Papers in Linguistics, vol. 35. Columbus, OH: Ohio State University Department of Linguistics.Google Scholar

Callaghan, Catherine, 1991. Climbing a low mountain. In Chung, Sandra and Hankamer, Jorge (eds), A Festschrift for William F. Shipley, pp. 47–59. Santa Cruz: Syntax Research Center, University of California.Google Scholar

Campbell, Lyle, 1997. American Indian Languages: The Historical Linguistics of Native America. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Chafe, Wallace, 2005. Caddo. In Hardy, and Scancarelli, (eds), pp. 323–350.Google Scholar

Conathan, Lisa, 2004. The Linguistic Ecology of Northwestern California: Contact, Functional Convergence and Dialectology. PhD dissertation, University of California, Berkeley.Google Scholar

Crawford, James, 1975. Southeastern Indian languages. In Crawford, James M. (ed.), Studies in Southeastern Indian Languages, pp. 1–120. Athens, GA: University of Georgia Press.Google Scholar

Dayley, Jon, 1989. Tümpisa (Panamint) Shoshone Grammar. University of California Publications in Linguistics, vol. 115. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

De Laguna, Frederica, 1990. Tlingit. In Suttles, (ed.), pp. 203–228.Google Scholar

DeLancey, Scott, 1996. Penutian in the bipartite stem belt: Disentangling areal and genetic correspondences. In Proceedings of the Twenty-Second Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society: Special Session on Historical Topics in Native American Languages, pp. 37–54.Google Scholar

Dorsey, James Owen and Swanton, John R., 1912. A Dictionary of the Biloxi and Ofo Languages, Accompanied with Thirty-one Biloxi Texts and Numerous Biloxi Phrases. Bureau of American Ethnology Bulletin, vol. 47. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar

Dunn, John, 1995. Sm’algyax: A Reference Dictionary and Grammar for the Coast Tsimshian Language. Seattle, WA: University of Washington/Sealaska Heritage Foundation.Google Scholar

Einaudi, Paula, 1976. A Grammar of Biloxi. New York: GarlandGoogle Scholar

Elmendorf, William W. and Kroeber, A. L., 1960. The structure of Twana culture. Washington State University Research Studies 28.3: Monographic Supplement 2. Pullman. Reprinted 1992 in Coast Salish and Western Washington Indians IV, Seattle, WA: Washington State University Press.Google Scholar

Epps, Patience, Pat-El, Na’ama and Huehnergard, John (eds), 2013. Contact among Genetically Related Languages. Special issue of Journal of Language Contact 6 (2).Google Scholar

Fogelson, Raymond D., 2004a. Cherokee in the East. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 337–353.Google Scholar

Fogelson, Raymond D. (ed.), 2004b. Handbook of North American Indians, vol. 14: Southeast. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar

Ford, Richard, 1983. Inter-Indian exchange in the Southwest. In Ortiz, (ed.), pp. 711–722.Google Scholar

Frachtenberg, Leo, 1922. Siuslawan (Lower Umpqua). In Boas, Franz (ed.), Handbook of American Indian Languages, part 2, pp. 431–629. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office.Google Scholar

Galloway, Patricia and Jackson, Jason Baird, 2004. Natchez and neighboring groups. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 598–615.Google Scholar

Galloway, Patricia and Kidwell, Clara Sue, 2004. Choctaw in the East. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 499–519.Google Scholar

Gatschet, Albert S. and Swanton, John R., 1932. A Dictionary of the Atakapa Language, Accompanied by Text Material. Bureau of American Ethnology Bulletin, vol. 108. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar

Haas, Mary R., 1941. Tunica. In Boas, Franz (ed.), Handbook of American Indian Languages, pp. 159–204. Bureau of American Ethnology Bulletin, vol. 40.1. New York: J. J. Augustin.Google Scholar

Haas, Mary R., 1946. A grammatical sketch of Tunica. In Linguistic Structures of Native America, pp. 337–366. Viking Fund Publications in Anthropology, vol. 6. New York: Wenner-Gren.Google Scholar

Haas, Mary R., 1950. Tunica texts. University of California Publications in Linguistics 6 (1): 1–174.Google Scholar

Haas, Mary R., 1953. Tunica dictionary. University of California Publications in Linguistics 6 (2): 175–332.Google Scholar

Haas, Mary R., 1967. Language and taxonomy in northwestern California. American Anthropologist 96: 358–362.Google Scholar

Haas, Mary R., 1969. The Prehistory of Languages. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar

Haas, Mary R., 1970. Consonant symbolism in northwestern California: A problem in diffusion. In Swanson, Earl H. Jr (ed.), Languages and Cultures of Western North America: Essays in Honor of Sven S. Liljeblad, pp. 86–89. Pocatello: Idaho State University Press.Google Scholar

Haas, Mary R., 1971. Southeastern Indian linguistics. In Hudson, Charles (ed.), Red, White, and Black: Symposium on Indians in the Old South. Southern Anthropological Society Proceedings, vol. 5. Athens, GA: University of Georgia Press.Google Scholar

Haas, Mary R., 1973. The Southeast. In Sebeok, Thomas (ed.), Linguistics in North America, pp. 1210–1249. Current Trends in Linguistics, vol. 10. The Hague: Mouton. Reprinted in 1976 in Sebeok, Thomas (ed.), Native Languages of the Americas, pp. 121–152. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar

Haas, Mary R., 1976. The Northern California linguistic area. In Langdon, Margaret and Silver, Shirley (eds), Hokan Studies: Papers from the First Conference on Hokan Languages, pp. 347–359. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar

Haas, Mary R., 1979. Southeastern languages. In Campbell, Lyle and Mithun, Marianne (eds), The Languages of Native North America, pp. 299–326. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar

Haas, Mary R. and Hill, James H., 2015. Creek Texts, edited and translated by Martin, Jack B., Mauldin, Margaret McKane and McGirt, Juanita. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Hajda, Yvonne, 1984. Regional social organization in the Greater Lower Columbia. Paper read at the Annual Meeting of the American Anthropological Association, Chicago.Google Scholar

Hardy, Heather and Scancarelli, Janine (eds), 2005. Native Languages of the Southeastern United States. Lincoln, NE: University of Nebraska Press.Google Scholar

Heaton, Raina, 2013. Active/stative agreement in Tunica. Manuscript, University of Hawai‘i.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd, 1993. Auxiliaries: Cognitive Forces and Grammaticalization. New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Heine, Bernd and Kuteva, Tania, 2005. Language Contact and Grammatical Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Heizer, Robert (ed.), 1978. Handbook of North American Indians, vol. 8: California. Washington: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2010. Language contact: Reconsideration and reassessment. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 1–28. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar

Hickey, Raymond, 2012. Early English and the Celtic hypothesis. In Nevalainen, Terttu and Traugott, Elizabeth Closs (eds), The Oxford Handbook on the History of English, pp. 497–507. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Hoijer, Harry, 1933. Tonkawa: An Indian language of Texas. In Boas, Franz (ed.), 1933–1938, Handbook of American Indian Languages, part 3, pp. 1–148. Glückstadt, Hamburg and New York: J. J. Augustin.Google Scholar

Hymes, Dell, 1955. The Language of the Kathlamet Chinook. Unpublished PhD thesis, Indiana University.Google Scholar

Innes, Pamela, 2004. Creek in the West. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 393–403.Google Scholar

Jacobs, Melville, 1954. The areal spread of sound features in the languages north of California. In Papers from the Symposium on American Indian Linguistics Held at Berkeley, July 7, 1951. University of California Publications in Linguistics, vol. 10.Google Scholar

Jacobsen, William H., 1969. Origin of the Nootka pharyngeals. International Journal of American Linguistics 35: 125–153.Google Scholar

Jacobsen, William H., 1980a. Inclusive/exclusive: A diffused pronominal category in native western North America. In Proceedings of the Chicago Linguistic Society, Papers from the Parasession on Pronouns and Anaphora, pp. 204–227.Google Scholar

Jacobsen, William., 1980b. Washo bipartite verb stems. In Klar, Kathryn, Langdon, Margaret and Silver, Shirley (eds), American Indian and Indoeuropean Studies, pp. 85–100. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar

Jany, Carmen, 2009. Chimariko Grammar: Areal and Typological Perspective. University of California Publications in Linguistics, vol. 142.Google Scholar

Johanson, Lars, 2008. Remodeling grammar: Copying, conventionalization, grammaticalization. In Siemund, Peter and Kintana, Noemi (eds), Language Contact and Contact Languages, pp. 61–79. Hamburg Studies on Multilingualism, vol. 7. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Kaufman, David, 2013. Positional auxiliaries in Biloxi 1. International Journal of American Linguistics 79 (2): 283–299.Google Scholar

Kimball, Geoffrey, 2005. Natchez. In Hardy, and Scancarelli, (eds), pp. 385–453.Google Scholar

Kinkade, M. Dale, 1991. Prehistory of the Native languages of the Northwest Coast. In Great Ocean Conference: The North Pacific to 1600, pp. 37–158. Portland: Oregon Historical Society Press.Google Scholar

Kinkade, M. Dale, Elmendorf, William H., Rigsby, Bruce and Aoki, Haruo, 1998. Languages. In Walker, (ed.), 49–72.Google Scholar

Kroskrity, Paul, 1982. Language contact and linguistic diffusion: The Arizona Tewa speech community. In Barkin, F., Brandt, E. and Ornstein-Galicia, J. (eds), Bilingualism and Language Contact: Spanish, English, and Native American Languages, pp. 51–72. New York: Teachers College Press.Google Scholar

Kuteva, Tania, 2001. Auxiliation: An Enquiry into the Nature of Grammaticalization. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Langdon, Margaret, 1971. Sound symbolism in Yuman languages. In Sawyer, Jesse (ed.), Studies in American Indian Languages, pp. 149–174. University of California Publications in Linguistics, vol. 65.Google Scholar

Lipkind, William, 1945. Winnebago Grammar. New York: King’s Crown Press.Google Scholar

Macaulay, Monica, 1992. Inverse marking in Karuk: The function of the suffix -ap. International Journal of American Linguistics 58: 182–210.Google Scholar

Macaulay, Monica, 2000. Obviative marking in ergative contexts: The case of Karuk ’îin. International Journal of American Linguistics 66: 464–498.Google Scholar

Martin, Jack B., 1994. Modeling language contact in the prehistory of the southeastern U.S. In Kwachka, Patricia (ed.), Perspectives on the Southeast: Linguistics, Archaeology, and Ethnohistory, pp. 14–24, 143–163. Southern Anthropological Society Proceedings, vol. 27. Athens, GA: University of Georgia Press.Google Scholar

Martin, Jack, 2004. Languages. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 68–86.Google Scholar

Martin, Jack B., 2011. A Grammar of Creek (Muskogee). Lincoln, NE: University of Nebraska Press.Google Scholar

Matthews, G. Hubert, 1970. Notes on the Proto-Siouan continuants. International Journal of American Linguistics 36: 98–109.Google Scholar

May, Stephanie, 2004. Alabama and Koasati. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 407–414.Google Scholar

Mithun, Marianne, 1991. Active/agentive case marking and its motivations. Language 67: 510–546.Google Scholar

Mithun, Marianne, 1997. Lexical affixes and morphological typology. In Haiman, John, Bybee, Joan and Thompson, Sandra (eds), Essays on Language Function and Language Type, pp. 357–372. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Mithun, Marianne, 1999. The Languages of Native North America. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Mithun, Marianne, 2007a. Grammar, contact, and time. Journal of Language Contact, Thema 1: 133–155.Google Scholar

Mithun, Marianne, 2007b. Integrating approaches to diversity: Argument structure on the Northwest Coast. In Matsumoto, Yoshiko, Oshima, David, Robinson, Orrin and Sells, Peter (eds), Diversity in Language, pp. 9–36. Stanford, CA: CSLI (Center for the Study of Language and Information).Google Scholar

Mithun, Marianne, 2008. The emergence of agentive systems. In Donohue, Mark and Wichmann, Søren (eds), The Typology of Semantic Alignment Systems, pp. 297–333. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Mithun, Marianne, 2012a. Morphologies in contact: Form, meaning, and use in the grammar of reference. In Stolz, Thomas, Vanhove, Martine, Otsuka, Hitomi and Urdzu, Anna (eds), Morphologies in Contact, pp. 15–36. Studia Typologica, vol. 10. Berlin: Akademie Verlag.Google Scholar

Mithun, Marianne, 2012b. Core argument patterns and deep genetic relations: Hierarchical systems in Northern California. In Suihkonen, Pirkko, Comrie, Bernard and Solovyev, Valery (eds), Typology of Argument Structure and Grammatical Relations, pp. 257–294. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Mithun, Marianne, 2013. Challenges and benefits of contact among relatives: Morphological copying. Journal of Language Contact 6: 243–270.Google Scholar

Munro, Pamela, 1985. Auxiliaries and auxiliarization in Western Muskogean. In Fisiak, Jacek (ed.), Historical Syntax, pp. 333–362. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Nakayama, Toshihide (ed.), 2003. George Louie’s Nuu-chah-nulth (Ahousaht) Texts with Grammatical Analysis. Endangered Languages of the Pacific Rim, vol. A2–028. Kyoto: Nakanish.Google Scholar

Newman, Stanley, 1944. Yokuts Language of California. Viking Fund Publications in Anthropology, vol. 2. New York: Wenner-Gren.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 1971. Diminutive consonant symbolism in Western North America. Language 47 (4): 826–848.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

O’Neill, Sean, 2008. Cultural Contact and Linguistic Relativity among the Indians of Northwestern California. Norman, OK: University of Oklahoma Press.Google Scholar

Ortiz, Alfonso (ed.), 1983. Handbook of North American Indians, vol. 10: Southwest. Washington: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar

Parsons, Elsie Clews, 1939. Pueblo Indian Religion. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

Quintero, Carolyn, 2004. Osage Grammar. Lincoln, NE: University of Nebraska Press.Google Scholar

Rankin, Robert L., 1977. From verb to auxiliary to noun classifier and definite article. Grammaticalization of the Siouan verbs ‘sit’, ‘stand’, ‘lie’. In Brown, R. L. et al. (eds), Proceedings of the 1976 Mid-America Linguistics Conference, pp. 273–283. St Paul, MN: Department of Linguistics, University of Minnesota.Google Scholar

Rankin, Robert L., 1978. On the origin of the classificatory verbs in Muskogean. Paper presented at the Annual meeting of the American Anthropological Association, Los Angeles.Google Scholar

Rankin, Robert L., 1987. Fricative ablaut in Choctaw and Siouan. Paper presented at the Kentucky Foreign Language Conference Session on the Southeast, Lexington.Google Scholar

Rankin, Robert L., 1988. Quapaw: Genetic and areal affiliations. In Shipley, William (ed.), In Honor of Mary Haas, pp. 629–650. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Rankin, Robert, 2004. The history and development of Siouan positionals with special attention to polygrammaticalization in Dhegiha. Sprachtypologie und Universalienforschung (STUF) 2/3: 202–227.Google Scholar

Rankin, Robert L., 2005. Quapaw. In Hardy, and Scancarelli, (eds), pp. 454–498.Google Scholar

Rankin, Robert L., 2011. The Siouan enclitics: A beginning. Paper prepared for the Comparative Linguistics Workshop, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor.Google Scholar

Reichard, Gladys, 1938. Coeur d’Alene. In Boas, Franz (ed.), 1933–1938, Handbook of American Indian Languages, part 3, pp. 517–707. Glückstadt, Hamburg and New York: J. J. Augustin.Google Scholar

Rigsby, Bruce and Silverstein, Michael, 1969. Nez Perce vowels and Proto-Sahaptian vowel harmony. Language 45: 45–59.Google Scholar

Sapir, Edward, 1911. Diminutive and augmentative consonantism in Wishram. In Boas, Franz (ed.), Handbook of American Indian Languages, part 1, pp. 638–645. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office.Google Scholar

Sapir, Edward, 1929. A study in phonetic symbolism. Journal of Experimental Psychology 12: 225–239. Reprinted in 1949 in Mandelbaum, D. G. (ed.), Selected Writings of Edward Sapir, pp. 61–72. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Scancarelli, Janine, 2005. Cherokee. In Hardy, and Scancarelli, (eds), pp. 351–384.Google Scholar

Sherzer, Joel, 1968. An Areal-Typological Study of the American Indian Languages North of Mexico. PhD dissertation, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia.Google Scholar

Sherzer, Joel, 1973. Areal linguistics in North America. In Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Linguistics in North America, pp. 749–795. Current Trends in Linguistics, vol. 10. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar

Sherzer, Joel, 1976. An Areal-Typological Study of American Indian Languages North of Mexico. Amsterdam: North Holland.Google Scholar

Shipley, William, 1963. Maidu Texts and Dictionary. University of California Publications in Linguistics, vol. 33. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar

Sturtevant, William (ed.), 1988. Handbook of North American Indians, vol. 4: History of Indian–White Relations. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar

Suttles, Wayne (ed.), 1990a. Handbook of North American Indians, vol. 7: Northwest Coast. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar

Suttles, Wayne, 1990b. Introduction. In Suttles, (ed.), pp. 1–15.Google Scholar

Swadesh, Morris, 1933. Chitimacha verbs of derogatory or abusive connotation with parallels from European languages. Language 9: 192–201.Google Scholar

Swadesh, Morris, 1939. Chitimacha Grammar. Philadelphia, PA: American Philosophical Society Library.Google Scholar

Swadesh, Morris, 1946. Chitimacha. In Linguistic Structures of Native America, pp. 312–336. Viking Fund Publications in Anthropology, vol. 6. New York: Wenner-Gren.Google Scholar

Swanton, John R., 1921. The Tunica language. International Journal of American Linguistics 2: 1–39.Google Scholar

Swanton, John R., 1929. A sketch of the Atakapa language. International Journal of American Linguistics 5: 121–149.Google Scholar

Talmy, Leonard, 1972. Semantic Structures in English and Atsugewi. Unpublished PhD thesis, University of California, Berkeley.Google Scholar

Tarpent, Marie-Lucie, 1987. A Grammar of the Nisgha Language. Unpublished PhD thesis, University of Victoria, BC, Canada.Google Scholar

Thompson, Laurence D., 1972. Language universals, nasals, and the Northwest Coast. In Smith, Estelle (ed.), Studies in Linguistics in Honor of George L. Trager, pp. 441–456. Janua Linguarum, Series Maior, vol. 52. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar

Thompson, Laurence D. and Kinkade, M. Dale, 1990. Languages. In Suttles, (ed.), pp. 30–51.Google Scholar

Walker, Deward E. Jr (ed.), 1998. Handbook of North American Indians, vol. 6: Plateau. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar

Walker, Willard, 2004. Creek confederacy before removal. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 373–392.Google Scholar

Waselkov, Gregory A., 2004. Exchange and interaction since 1500. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 686–696.Google Scholar

Waterman, T. T. and Kroeber, A. L., 1934. Yurok marriages. University of California Publications in American Archaeology and Ethnology 35: 1–14.Google Scholar

Adelaar, Willem, 2008. Towards a typological profile of the Andean languages. In Lubotsky, Alexander, Schaeken, Jos and Wiedenhoff, Jeroen (eds), Evidence and Counter-Evidence: Essays in Honour of Frederik Kortlandt, vol. 2: General Linguistics, pp. 23–33. Amsterdam: Rodopi.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 1999a. Areal diffusion and language contact in the Içana-Vaupés basin, north-west Amazonia. In Dixon, and Aikhenvald, (eds), pp. 384–416.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 1999b. Serial constructions and verb compounding: Evidence from Tariana (North Arawak). Studies in Language 23 (3): 469–498.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2001a. Language awareness and correct speech among the Tariana of NW Amazonia. Anthropological Linguistics 43 (4): 411–430.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2001b. Areal diffusion, genetic inheritance, and problems of subgrouping: A North Arawak case study. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 167–194. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2002. Language Contact in Amazonia. Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2003. Mechanisms of change in areal diffusion: New morphology and language contact. Journal of Linguistics 39: 1–29.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2007a. Semantics and pragmatics of grammatical relations in the Vaupés linguistic area. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Grammars in Contact: A Cross-linguistic Typology, pp. 237–266. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2007b. Classifiers in multiple environments: Baniwa of Içana/Kurripako: A North Arawak perspective. International Journal of American Linguistics 73: 475–500.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2012. The Languages of the Amazon. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Arhem, Kaj, 1989. The Makú, the Makuna and the Guiana system: Transformations of social structure in northern lowland South America. Ethnos 54: 5–22.Google Scholar

Ball, Christopher, 2011. Pragmatic multilingualism in the Upper Xingu speech community. In Franchetto, (ed.), pp. 87–112.Google Scholar

Basso, Ellen B., 1973. The use of Portuguese relationship terms in Kalapalo (Xingu Carib): Changes in a central Brazilian communicative network. Language in Society 2: 1–21.Google Scholar

Beier, Christine, Michael, Lev and Sherzer, Joel, 2002. Discourse forms and processes in indigenous lowland South America: An areal-typological perspective. Annual Review of Anthropology 31: 121–145.Google Scholar

Birchall, Joshua, 2014. Argument Marking Patterns in South American Languages. PhD dissertation, Radboud Universiteit, Nijmegen.Google Scholar

Bolaños Quinonez, Katherine, 2012. Contact induced categories: A case study of evidentiality in Kakua. Conference presentation, The Nature of Evidentiality. Leiden, 14 June 2014.Google Scholar

Bowern, Claire, Epps, Patience, Gray, Russell et al., 2011. Does lateral transmission obscure inheritance in hunter–gatherer languages? PLoS ONE 6 (9): e25195.Google Scholar

Bowern, Claire, Haynie, Hannah, Sheard, Catherine et al., 2014. Loan and inheritance patterns in hunter–gatherer ethnobiological nomenclature. Journal of Ethnobiology 34 (2): 195–227.Google Scholar

Braga, Alzerinda, Cabral, Ana Suelly A. C., Rodrigues, Aryon Dall’Igna and Mindlin, Betty, 2011. Línguas entrelaçadas: Uma situação sui generis de línguas em contato [Intertwined languages: A sui generis situation of languages in contact]. Papia 21 (2): 221–230.Google Scholar

Braunstein, José and Miller, Elmer S., 1999. Ethnohistorical introduction. In Miller, Elmer S. (ed.), Peoples of the Gran Chaco, pp. 1–22. Westport, CT: Bergin & Garvey.Google Scholar

Bruzzi Alves da Silva, Alcionilio, 1977. A Civilação Indígena do Vaupés [The Indigenous Civilization of the Vaupés]. Rome: LAS.Google Scholar

Campbell, Lyle, 2012. Typological characteristics of South American Indian languages. In Campbell, and Grondona, (eds), pp. 259–330.Google Scholar

Campbell, Lyle and Grondona, Verónica, 2010. Who speaks what to whom? Multilingualism and language choice in Misión La Paz. Language in Society 39: 617–646.Google Scholar

Campbell, Lyle and Grondona, Verónica, 2012a. Languages of the Chaco and Southern Cone. In Campbell, and Grondona, (eds), pp. 625–668.Google Scholar

Campbell, Lyle and Grondona, Verónica (eds), 2012b. The Indigenous Languages of South America: A Comprehensive Guide. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Campbell, Lyle, Kaufman, Terrence and Smith-Stark, Thomas, 1986. Mesoamerica as a linguistic area. Language 62: 530–570.Google Scholar

Carlin, Eithne, 2007. Feeling the need: The borrowing of Cariban functional categories into Mawayana (Arawak). In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Grammars in Contact: A Cross-Linguistic Perspective, pp. 313–332. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Carlin, Eithne, 2011. Nested identities in the southern Guyana-Suriname corner. In Hornborg, and Hill, (eds), pp. 225–236.Google Scholar

Carneiro, Robert L., 2000. The evolution of the tipiti: A study in the process of invention. In Feinman, Gary and Manzanilla, Linda (eds), Cultural Evolution: Contemporary Viewpoints, pp. 61–91. New York: Kluwer Academic Publishers.Google Scholar

Chacon, Thiago, 2013. Kubeo: Linguistic and cultural interactions in the Upper Rio Negro. In Epps, and Stenzel, (eds), pp. 403–440.Google Scholar

Chang, William and Michael, Lev, 2014. A relaxed admixture model of language contact. Language Dynamics and Change 4 (1): 1–26.Google Scholar

Chernela, Janet, 2013. Toward an East Tukano ethnolinguistics: Metadiscursive practices, identity, and sustained linguistic diversity in the Vaupés basin of Brazil and Colombia. In Epps, and Stenzel, (eds), pp. 197–244.Google Scholar

Clastres, Hélène, 1995. The Land-without-Evil: Tupí-Guaraní Prophetism. Urbana and Chicago: University of Illinois Press.Google Scholar

Constenla-Umaña, Adolfo, 1991. Las lenguas del área intermedia: introducción a su estudo areal [The Languages of the Intermediate Area: Introduction to their Areal Study]. San José: Editorial de la Universidad de Costa Rica.Google Scholar

Crevels, Mily and van der Voort, Hein, 2008. The Guaporé-Mamoré region as a linguistic area. In Muysken, Pieter (ed.), From Linguistic Areas To Areal Linguistics, pp. 151–179. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Derbyshire, Desmond, 1987. Morphosyntactic areal characteristics of Amazonian languages. International Journal of American Linguistics 53: 311–326.Google Scholar

Derbyshire, Desmond and Payne, Doris, 1990. Noun classification systems of Amazonian languages. In Payne, Doris (ed.), Amazonian Linguistics: Studies in Lowland South American Languages, pp. 243–271. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar

Dixon, Robert M. W. and Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. (eds), 1999a. The Amazonian Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Dixon, Robert M. W. and Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 1999b. Introduction. In Dixon, and Aikhenvald, (eds), pp. 1–22.Google Scholar

Dumont, Jean-Paul, 1991. The Headman and I: Ambiguity and Ambivalence in the Fieldworking Experience. Prospect Heights, IL: Waveland Press.Google Scholar

Dunn, Michael, Terrill, Angela, Reesink, Ger, Foley, Robert and Levinson, Stephen, 2005. Structural phylogenetics and the reconstruction of ancient language history. Science 309: 2072–2075.Google Scholar

Echeverri, Juan Alvaro, 1997. The People of the Center of the World: A Study in Culture, History, and Orality in the Colombian Amazon. PhD dissertation, New School for Social Research, New York.Google Scholar

Edmundson, George, 1904. The Dutch on the Amazon and Negro in the seventeenth century, part II: Dutch trade in the basin of the Rio Negro. The English Historical Review 19 (73): 1–25.Google Scholar

Edmundson, George, 1922. Introduction. Journal of the Travels and Labours of Father Samuel Fritz in the River of the Amazons Between 1686 and 1723, pp. 3–31. London: Hakluyt Society.Google Scholar

Epps, Patience, 2005. Areal diffusion and the development of evidentiality: Evidence from Hup. Studies in Language 29 (3): 617–650.Google Scholar

Epps, Patience, 2007a. The Vaupés melting pot: Tukanoan influence on Hup. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Grammars in Contact: A Cross-linguistic Typology, pp. 267–289. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Epps, Patience, 2007b. Birth of a noun classification system: The case of Hup. In Wetzels, W. Leo (ed.), Language Endangerment And Endangered Languages: Linguistic and Anthropological Studies with Special Emphasis on the Languages and Cultures of the Andean–Amazonian Border Area, pp. 107–128. The Netherlands: Leiden University.Google Scholar

Epps, Patience, 2008. Grammatical borrowing in Hup. In Matras, Yaron and Sakel, Jeanette (eds), Grammatical Borrowing: A Cross-linguistic Survey, pp. 551–565. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Epps, Patience, 2009. Loanwords in Hup, a Nadahup language of Amazonia. In Haspelmath, Martin and Tadmor, Uri (eds), Loanwords in the World’s Languages: A Comparative Handbook. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Epps, Patience, 2012. On form and function in language contact: A case study from the Amazonian Vaupés region. In Léglise, Isabelle and Chamoreau, Claudine (eds), Dynamics of Contact-induced Language Change. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Epps, Patience, 2013. Inheritance, calquing, or independent innovation? Reconstructing morphological complexity in Amazonian numerals. In Epps, , Pat-El, and Huehnergard, (eds), pp. 329–357.Google Scholar

Epps, Patience, 2014. Exploring traces of contact between Tupí-Guaraní languages and their neighbors. Talk given 29 May 2014, Amazónicas V, Belém, Brazil.Google Scholar

Epps, Patience, 2015. South American languages. In Bowern, Claire, Epps, Patience, Hill, Jane and McConvell, Patrick, Languages of Hunter-Gatherers and their Neighbors: Database. https://huntergatherer.la.utexas.edu Google Scholar

Epps, Patience, Bowern, Claire, Hansen, Cynthia, Hill, Jane and Zentz, Jason, 2012. On numeral complexity in hunter–gatherer languages. Linguistic Typology 16: 39–107.Google Scholar

Epps, Patience and Neely, Kelsey, 2014. Movimiento y orientación en construcciones verbales: Una perspectiva amazónica [Movement and orientation in verbal constructions: An Amazonian perspective]. In Guerrero, Lilián (ed.), Movimiento y espacio en lenguas de América [Movement and Space in Languages of the Americas]. México: Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México.Google Scholar

Epps, Patience, Pat-El, Na’ama and Huehnergard, John (eds), 2013. Contact Among Genetically Related Languages. Special edition of Journal of Language Contact 6 (2).Google Scholar

Epps, Patience and Stenzel, Kristine (eds), 2013. Upper Rio Negro: Cultural and Linguistic Interaction in Northwestern Amazonia. Rio de Janeiro: Museu do Índio-FUNAI.Google Scholar

Eriksen, Love and Danielsen, Swintha, 2014. The Arawakan matrix. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 152–176.Google Scholar

Fausto, Carlos, Franchetto, Bruna and Heckenberger, Michael J., 2008. Language, ritual and historical reconstruction: Towards a linguistic, ethnographical and archaeological account of Upper Xingu Society. In Harrison, David K., Rood, David S. and Dwyer, Aryenne (eds), Lessons from Documented Endangered Languages, pp. 129–158. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Floyd, Simeon, 2013. Semantic transparency and cultural calquing in the northwest Amazon. In Epps, and Stenzel, (eds), pp. 271–309.Google Scholar

Franchetto, Bruna (ed.), 2011. Alto Xingu: Uma sociedade multilíngue [Upper Xingu: A Multilingual Society]. Rio de Janeiro: Museu do Índio-FUNAI.Google Scholar

Gomez-Imbert, Elsa, 1993. Problemas en torno a la comparación de las lenguas Tukano orientales [Problems of comparison in Eastern Tukanoan languages]. In Rodríguez de Montes, Maria Luisa (ed.), Estado actual de la clasificación de las lenguas indígenas de Colombia [Current State of Classification of the Indigenous Languages of Colombia], pp. 235–267. Santafé de Bogotá: Instituto Caro y Cuervo.Google Scholar

Gomez-Imbert, Elsa, 1996. When animals become ‘rounded’ and ‘feminine’: Conceptual categories and linguistic classification in a multilingual setting. In Gumperz, John J. and Levinson, Stephen C. (eds), Rethinking Linguistic Relativity, pp. 438–469. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Guillaume, Antoine, in press. Sistemas complejos de movimiento asociado en las lenguas Takana y Pano: Perspectivas descriptiva, tipológica e histórico-comparativa [Complex systems of associated motion in the Takanan and Panoan languages: Descriptive, typological and historical-comparative perspectives]. In Guillaume, A. and Valenzuela, P. M. (eds), Estudios sincrónicos y diacrónicos sobre lenguas Pano y Takana: fonología, morfología y sintaxis [Synchronic and Diachronic Studies of Panoan and Takanan Languages: Phonology, Morphology and Syntax], special edition of Amerindia.Google Scholar

Guillaume, Antoine and Rose, Françoise, 2010. Sociative causative markers in South American languages: A possible areal feature. In Floricic, Franck (ed.), Essais de typologie et de linguistique générale: Mélanges offerts à Denis Creissels, pp. 383–402. Lyon: ENS Éditions.Google Scholar

Guirardello-Damien, Raquel, 2011. Léxico comparativo: Explorando aspectos da história trumai [Lexical comparison: Exploring aspects of Trumai history]. In Franchetto, (ed.), pp. 113–154.Google Scholar

Haspelmath, Martin, 2004. How hopeless is genealogical linguistics, and how advanced is areal linguistics? Studies in Language 28 (1): 209–223.Google Scholar

Haynie, Hannah, Bowern, Claire, Epps, Patience, Hill, Jane and McConvell, Patrick, 2014. Wanderwörter in languages of the Americas and Australia. Ampersand 1: 1–18.Google Scholar

Heckenberger, Michael and Neves, Eduardo Góes, 2009. Amazonian archaeology. Annual Review of Anthropology 38: 251–266.Google Scholar

Hill, Jonathan, 1996. Ethnogenesis in the northwest Amazon: An emerging regional picture. In History, Power, and Identity: Ethnogenesis in the Americas, 1492–1992, pp. 142–160. Iowa City: University of Iowa Press.Google Scholar

Hornborg, Alf, 2005. Ethnogenesis, regional integration, and ecology in prehistoric Amazonia: Toward a system perspective. Current Anthropology 46 (4): 589–620.Google Scholar

Hornborg, Alf and Eriksen, Love, 2011. An attempt to understand Panoan ethnogenesis in relation to long-term patterns and transformations of regional interaction in western Amazonia. In Hornborg, and Hill, (eds), pp. 129–154.Google Scholar

Hornborg, Alf and Hill, Jonathan D. (eds), 2011a. Ethnicity in Ancient Amazonia: Reconstructing Past Identities from Archeology, Linguistics, and Ethnohistory. Boulder, CO: University Press of Colorado.Google Scholar

Hornborg, Alf and Hill, Jonathan, 2011b. Introduction. In Hornborg, and Hill, (eds), pp. 1–30.Google Scholar

Howard, Catherine Vaughan, 2001. Wrought Identities: The Waiwai Expeditions In Search of the ‘Unseen Tribes’ of Northern Amazonia. PhD dissertation, University of Chicago.Google Scholar

Jackson, Jean, 1983. The Fish People: Linguistic Exogamy and Tukanoan Identity in Northwest Amazonia. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Krashnoukhova, Olga, 2012. The Noun Phrase in the Languages of South America. PhD dissertation, Radboud Universiteit, Nijmegen.Google Scholar

Lathrap, Donald, 1973. The antiquity and importance of long-distance trade relationships in the moist tropics of pre-Columbian South America. World Archaeology 5 (2): 170–186.Google Scholar

Lévi-Strauss, C., 1948. Tribes of the right bank of the Guaporé river. In Steward, J. H. (ed.), Handbook of South American Indians, vol. 3, pp. 370–379. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar

Londoño Sulkin, Carlos, 2012. People of Substance: An Ethnography of Morality in the Colombian Amazon. Toronto: University of Toronto Press.Google Scholar

Maldi, Denise, 1991. O complexo cultural do marico: Sociedades indígenas do rio Branco, Colorado e Mequens, afluentes do médio Guaporé [The marico cultural complex: Indigenous societies of the Rio Branco, Colorado, and Mequens]. Boletim do Museu Paraense Emílio Goeldi 7: 209–269.Google Scholar

Michael, Lev, Chang, William and Stark, Tammy, 2014. Exploring phonological areality in the circum-Andean region using a naive Bayes classifier. Language Dynamics and Change 4 (1): 27–86.Google Scholar

Michael, Lev, Stark, Tammy and Chang, Will (compilers), 2012. South American Phonological Inventory Database v1.1.2. Survey of California and Other Indian Languages Digital Resource. Berkeley, CA: University of California. http://linguistics.berkeley.edu/~saphon/en/Google Scholar

Migliazza, Ernesto, 1985. Languages of the Orinoco-Amazonia region: Current status. In Klein, Harriet E. M. and Stark, Louisa R. (eds), South American Indian Languages: Retrospect and Prospect, pp. 17–139. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar

Muysken, Pieter, 2012. Contacts between indigenous languages in South America. In Campbell, and Grondona, (eds), pp. 235–258.Google Scholar

Muysken, Pieter, Hammarström, Harald, Birchall, Joshua, van Gijn, Rik, Krasnoukhova, Olga and Müller, Neele, 2015. Linguistic areas, bottom up or top down? The case of the Guaporé-Mamoré region. In Comrie, Bernard and Golluscio, Lucía (eds), Language Contact and Documentation / Contacto Lingüístico y Documentación, pp. 205–238. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Muysken, Pieter, et al., 2014. South American Indigenous Language Structures (SAILS) Online. Leipzig: Online Publication of the Max Planck Institute for Evolutionary Anthropology. http://sails.clld.org Google Scholar

Nordenskiöld, Erland, 1922. Deductions Suggested by the Geographical Distribution of Some Post-Columbian Words Used by the Indians of South America. Göteborg: Elanders Boktryckeri Aktiebolag.Google Scholar

O’Connor, Loretta and Muysken, Pieter (eds), 2014. The Native Languages of South America. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Ospina Bozzi, Ana Maria and Gomez-Imbert, Elsa, 2013. Predicados complejos en el Noroeste Amazónico: El caso del Yuhup, el Tatuyo y el Barasana [Complex predicates in the northwest Amazon: The case of Yuhup, Tatuyo, and Barasana]. In Epps, and Stenzel, (eds), pp. 309–352.Google Scholar

de Oviedo y Valdés, Gonzalo Fernández, 1851–1855 [1535]. Historia general de las indias [General History of the Indies]. Madrid.Google Scholar

Payne, Doris, 1990. Introduction. In Payne, Doris (ed.), Amazonian Linguistics: Studies in Lowland South American Languages, pp. 1–10. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar

Rivière, Peter, 1984. Individual and Society in Guiana: A Comparative Study of Amerindian Social Organization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Rodrigues, Aryon, 2000. Panorama das línguas indígenas da Amazônia. In Queixalós, Francesc and Renault-Lescure, Odile (eds), As línguas amazônicas hoje [Amazonian Languages Today], pp. 15–28. São Paulo: Instituto Socioambiental, Museu Parense Emílio Goeldi.Google Scholar

Roth, W. E., 1924. An introductory study of the arts, crafts, and customs of the Guiana Indians. In Thirty-Eighth Annual Report of the Bureau of American Ethnology, pp. 26–745.Google Scholar

Rydén, Stig, 1962 . Salt trading in the Amazon Basin: Conclusions suggested by the distribution of Guaraní terms for salt. Anthropos 57 (3/6): 644–659.Google Scholar

Seifart, Frank, 2007. The prehistory of nominal classification in Witotoan languages. International Journal of American Linguistics 73: 411–445.Google Scholar

Seifart, Frank, 2011. Bora Loans in Resígaro: Massive Morphological and Little Lexical Borrowing in a Moribund Arawakan Language. Cadernos de Etnolingüística, Série Monografias, 2.Google Scholar

Seifart, Frank, 2012. The principle of morphosyntactic subsystem integrity in language contact: Evidence from morphological borrowing in Resígaro (Arawakan). Diachronica 29 (4): 471–504.Google Scholar

Seifart, Frank, Fagua, Doris, Gasché, Jürg and Echeverri, Juan Alvaro (eds), 2009. A Multimedia Documentation of the Languages of the People of the Center. Online publication of transcribed and translated Bora, Ocaina, Nonuya, Resígaro, and Witoto audio and video recordings with linguistic and ethnographic annotations and descriptions. Nijmegen: DOBES-MPI.Google Scholar

Seifart, Frank and Payne, Doris, 2007. Nominal classification in the northwest Amazon: Issues in areal diffusion and typological characterization. International Journal of American Linguistics 73 (4): 381–387.Google Scholar

Seki, Lucy, 1999. The Upper Xingu as an incipient linguistic area. In Dixon, and Aikhenvald, (eds), pp. 417–430.Google Scholar

Seki, Lucy, 2011. Alto Xingu: Uma sociedade multilíngue? In Franchetto, (ed.), pp. 57–86.Google Scholar

Sicoli, Mark A. and Holton, Gary, 2014. Linguistic phylogenies support back-migration from Beringia to Asia. PLoS ONE 9 (3): e91722.Google Scholar

Silverstein, Michael, 1981. The limits of awareness. Working Papers in Sociolinguistics 84. Austin, TX: Southwest Educational Development Laboratory.Google Scholar

Sorensen, Arthur P. Jr, 1967. Multilingualism in the Northwest Amazon. American Anthropologist 69: 670–684.Google Scholar

Stenzel, Kristine, 2005. Multilingualism in the Northwest Amazon, revisited. Memorias del Congreso de Idiomas Indígenas de Latinoamérica-II, University of Texas at Austin. www.ailla.utexas.org/site/cilla2/Stenzel_CILLA2_vaupes.pdf Google Scholar

Stenzel, Kristine, 2008. Kotiria ‘differential object marking’ in cross-linguistic perspective. Amerindia 32: 154–181.Google Scholar

Stenzel, Kristine, 2013a. Contact and innovation in Vaupés possession-marking strategies. In Epps, and Stenzel, (eds), pp. 353–402.Google Scholar

Stenzel, Kristine, 2013b. Butterflies ‘leaning’ on the doorframe: Expressions of location and position in Kotiria and Wa’ikhana. In Bozzi, Ana Maria Ospina (ed.), Expresión de nociones espaciales en lenguas amazónicas, pp. 85–107. Bogotá: Instituto Caro y Cuervo/Universidad Nacional de Colombia.Google Scholar

Stenzel, Kristine and Gomez-Imbert, Elsa, 2009. Contato linguístico e mudança linguística no noroeste amazônico: o caso do Kotiria (Wanano) [Language contact and language change in the northwest Amazon: The case of Kotiria]. Revista da ABRALIN 8: 71–100.Google Scholar

Thomason, Sarah G. and Kaufman, Terrence, 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Vidal, Alejandra and Nercesian, Verónica, 2009. Loanwords in Wichí, a Mataco-Mataguayan language of Argentina. In Haspelmath, Martin and Tadmor, Uri (eds), Loanwords in the World’s Languages: A Comparative Handbook, pp. 1015–1034. Berlin and New York: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Vidal, Sílvia M., 2000. Kuwé Duwákalumi: The Arawak sacred routes of migration, trade, and resistance. Ethnohistory 47 (3/4): 635–667.Google Scholar

Viveiros de Castro, Eduardo, 1998. Cosmological deixis and Amerindian perspectivism. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 4 (3): 469–488.Google Scholar

Viveiros de Castro, Eduardo, 2002. A inconstância da alma selvagem [The Inconstancy of the Savage Soul]. São Paulo (Brazil): Cosac and Naify Edições.Google Scholar

Viveiros de Castro, Eduardo, 2012. Cosmological Perspectivism in Amazonia and Elsewhere. HAU: Journal of Ethnographic Theory, Masterclass Series, vol. 1.Google Scholar

van der Voort, Hein, 2005. Kwaza in comparative perspective. International Journal of American Linguistics 71: 365–412.Google Scholar

Whiffen, Thomas 1915. The North-West Amazons: Notes of Some Months Spent Among Cannibal Tribes. London: Constable.Google Scholar

Zuñiga, Fernando, 2007. The discourse–syntax interface in northwestern Amazonia: Differential object marking in Makú and some Tucanoan languages. In Wetzels, W. Leo (ed.), Language Endangerment and Endangered Languages: Linguistic and Anthropological Studies with Special Emphasis on the Languages and Cultures of the Andean–Amazonian Border Area, pp. 209–227. Leiden: University of Leiden.Google Scholar

Adelaar, Willem (with Muysken, Pieter), 2004. The Languages of the Andes. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Adelaar, Willem, 2008. Towards a typological profile of the Andean languages. In Lubotsky, Alexander, Schaeken, Jos and Wiedenhof, Jeroen (eds), Evidence and Counter-Evidence: Essays in Honour of Frederik Kortlandt, vol. 2: General Linguistics, pp. 23–33. Amsterdam: Rodopi.Google Scholar

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2002. Language Contact in Amazonia. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Birchall, Joshua, 2014a. Verbal argument marking patterns in South American languages. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 223–249.Google Scholar

Birchall, Joshua, 2014b. Argument Realization in the Languages of South America. Doctoral dissertation, Radboud University, Nijmegen.Google Scholar

Bowern, Claire, Epps, Patience, Gray, Russell et al., 2011. Does lateral transmission obscure inheritance in hunter–gatherer languages? PLoS ONE 6 (9): e25195.Google Scholar

Brackelaire, Vincent and Azanha, Gilberto, 2006. Últimos pueblos indígenas aislados en América Latina: Reto a la supervivencia [Last isolated indigenous peoples in Latin America: The challenge of their Survival]. In Lenguas y Tradiciones Orales de la Amazonía: ¿Diversidad en Peligro? [Languages and Oral Traditions of Amazonia: Diversity in Peril?], pp. 313–367. La Habana: Casa de las Américas.Google Scholar

Campbell, Lyle, Kaufman, Terrence and Smith-Stark, Thomas C., 1986. Meso-America as a linguistic area. Language 62 (3): 530–570.Google Scholar

Campbell, Lyle, 2012a. Classification of the indigenous languages of South America. In Campbell, Lyle and Grondona, Verónica (eds), The Indigenous Languages of South America: A Comprehensive Guide, pp. 59–166. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Campbell, Lyle, 2012b. Typological characteristics of South American indigenous languages. In Campbell, Lyle and Grondona, Verónica (eds), The Indigenous Languages of South America: A Comprehensive Guide, pp. 259–330. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Campbell, Lyle, this volume, Chapter 2. Why is it so hard to define a linguistic area?Google Scholar

Chang, Will and Michael, Lev, 2014. A relaxed admixture model of contact. Language Dynamics and Change 4 (1): 1–26.Google Scholar

Constenla-Umaña, Adolfo, 1991. Las Lenguas del Area Intermedia: Introducción a su Estudio Areal [The Languages of the Intermediate Area: Introduction to Their Areal Study]. San José: Editorial de la Universidad de Costa Rica.Google Scholar

Crevels, Mily and van der Voort, Hein, 2008. The Guaporé-Mamoré region as a linguistic area. In Muysken, Pieter (ed.), From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics, pp. 151–180. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar

Dahl, Östen, Gillam, J. Christopher, Anderson, David G., Iriarte, José and Copé, Silvia M., 2012. Linguistic diversity zones and cartographic modeling: GIS as a method for understanding the prehistory of lowland South America. In Hornborg, Alf and Hill, Jonathan David (eds), Ethnicity in Ancient Amazonia: Reconstructing Past Identities from Archaeology, Linguistics, and Ethnohistory, pp. 211–224. Boulder, CO: University Press of Colorado.Google Scholar

Derbyshire, Desmond C. and Pullum, Geoffrey K., 1986. Introduction. In Derbyshire, Desmond C. and Pullum, Geoffrey K. (eds), Handbook of Amazonian Languages, vol. 1, pp. 1–28. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Dixon, R. M. W. and Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 1999. Other small families and isolates. In Dixon, Robert M. W. and Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. (eds), The Amazonian Languages, pp. 341–381. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Dunne, Thomas and Mertes, Leal Anne Kerry, 2007. Rivers. In Veblen, Thomas T., Young, Kenneth R. and Orme, Anthony R. (eds), The Physical Geography of South America, pp. 76–90. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Eriksen, Love, 2011. Nature and Culture in Prehistoric Amazonia. PhD Dissertation, Lund University.Google Scholar

Evans, Nicholas and Levinson, Stephen C., 2009. The myth of language universals: Language diversity and its importance for cognitive science. Behavioral and Brain Sciences 32 (5): 429–492.Google Scholar

van Gijn, Rik, 2014a. The Andean foothills and adjacent Amazonian fringe. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 102–125.Google Scholar

van Gijn, Rik, 2014b. Subordination strategies in South America: Nominalization. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 274–297.Google Scholar

Greenberg, Joseph H., 1987. Language in the Americas. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.Google Scholar

Hammarström, Harald and O’Connor, Loretta, 2013. Dependency-sensitive typological distance. In Borin, Lars and Saxena, Anju (eds), Approaches to Measuring Linguistic Differences, pp. 337–360. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Hammarström, Harald and Güldemann, Tom, 2014. Quantifying geographical determinants of large-scale distributions of linguistic features. Language Dynamics and Change 4 (1): 87–115.Google Scholar

van de Kerke, Simon and Muysken, Pieter, 2014. The Andean matrix. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 126–151.Google Scholar

Krasnoukhova, Olga, 2012. The Noun Phrase in the Languages of South America. Doctoral dissertation, Radboud University, Nijmegen.Google Scholar

Krasnoukhova, Olga, 2014. The noun phrase: Focus on demonstratives, redrawing the semantic map. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 250–273.Google Scholar

Michael, Lev, Chang, Will and Stark, Tammy, 2014. Exploring phonological areality in the circum-Andean region using a Naive Bayes Classifier. Language Dynamics and Change 4 (1): 27–86.Google Scholar

Müller, Neele, 2014. Language internal and external factors in the development of the desiderative in South American indigenous languages. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 203–222.Google Scholar

Muysken, Pieter, 2010. Scenarios for language contact. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 265–281. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar

Muysken, Pieter, 2012. Contacts between indigenous languages in South America. In Grondona, Veronica and Campbell, Lyle (eds), Handbook of South American Historical Linguistics, pp. 235–258. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar

Muysken, Pieter, Hammarström, Harald, Birchall, Joshua et al., 2014. The languages of South America: Deep families, areal relationships, and language contact. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 299–322.Google Scholar

Muysken, Pieter, Hammarström, Harald, Birchall, Joshua, van Gijn, Rik, Krasnoukhova, Olga and Müller, Neele, 2015. Linguistic areas, bottom up or top down? The case of the Guaporé-Mamoré. In Comrie, Bernard and Golluscio, Lucia (eds), Language Contact and Documentation, pp. 205–238. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar

Nettle, Daniel, 1996. Language diversity in West Africa: An ecological approach. Journal of Anthropological Archaeology 15 (4): 403–438.Google Scholar

Nettle, Daniel, 1999. Linguistic Diversity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 1990. Linguistic diversity and the first settlement of the New World. Language 66 (3): 475–521.Google Scholar

Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar

Nordhoff, Sebastian, Hammarström, Harald, Forkel, Robert and Haspelmath, Martin, 2013. Glottolog 2.1. Leipzig: Max Planck Institute for Evolutionary Anthropology. http://glottolog.org Google Scholar

O’Connor, Loretta and Muysken, Pieter (eds), 2014. The Native Languages of South America: Origins, Development, Typology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

Orme, Anthony R., 2007. The tectonic framework of South America. In Veblen, Thomas T., Young, Kenneth R. and Orme, Anthony R. (eds), The Physical Geography of South America, pp. 3–22. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

Payne, Doris, 1990. Morphological characteristics of Amazonian languages. In Payne, Doris (ed.), Amazonian Linguistics: Studies in Lowland South American Languages, pp. 213–241. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar

Seki, Lucy, 1999. The Upper Xingú as an incipient linguistic area. In Dixon, R. M. W. and Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. (eds), The Amazonian Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 417–430.Google Scholar

Tessmann, Günter, 1930. Die Indianer Nordost-Perus: Grundlegende Forschungen für eine systematische Kulturkunde. Hamburg: Friedrichsen, de Gruyter and Co.Google Scholar

Torero, Alfredo, 2002. Idiomas de los Andes: Lingüística e Historia [Languages of the Andes: Linguistics and History]. Lima: IFEA and Editorial Horizonte.Google Scholar

Book contents

Part II - Case Studies for Areal Linguistics

Access options

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

Book contents

Part II - Case Studies for Areal Linguistics

Access options

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

References

Save book to Kindle

Save book to Dropbox

Save book to Google Drive